S7IL90b en-US PDF

Security information 1
Basics 2
Operator control blocks 3

SIMATIC
HVAC blocks 4
Process Control System PCS 7
PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0 5
Communication blocks
Logic blocks 6
Function Manual
Mathematical blocks 7
Motor and valve blocks 8
Panel blocks 9
Controller blocks 10
System blocks 11
Monitoring blocks 12
08/2017
A5E42064473-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E42064473-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 09/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Security information....................................................................................................................................19
2 Basics.........................................................................................................................................................21
2.1 About this document..............................................................................................................21
2.2 Overview of function blocks...................................................................................................22
2.3 Operator control and monitoring in WinCC............................................................................24
2.3.1 Block icon...............................................................................................................................24
2.3.2 Faceplate...............................................................................................................................25
2.3.3 Notes on configuration...........................................................................................................34
2.3.4 Setting of the standard server................................................................................................36
2.4 Hierarchical operating concept...............................................................................................37
2.4.1 Description of the concept......................................................................................................37
2.4.2 Configuration of the multiple control room operation.............................................................38
2.5 Panel integration....................................................................................................................39
2.5.1 Interface to the operator panel...............................................................................................39
2.5.2 Description of the concept......................................................................................................41
2.5.3 Overview of the IL S7 Comfort types.....................................................................................43
2.5.4 Operator control and monitoring in WinCC Comfort..............................................................45
2.5.4.1 General view of the panel blocks...........................................................................................45
2.5.4.2 Configuration of the panel interface.......................................................................................47
3 Operator control blocks..............................................................................................................................49
3.1 S7Aggr08 - Switchover for up to 8 units.................................................................................49
3.1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................49
3.1.2 Calling OBs............................................................................................................................49
3.1.3 Setting the operating mode....................................................................................................49
3.1.4 Number of units......................................................................................................................50
3.1.5 Master unit (OP_TIME_S parameter = 0)...............................................................................50
3.1.6 Maximum units to be switched...............................................................................................50
3.1.7 Activation/deactivation depending on operating hours / priorities (OP_TIME_S = 1
parameter)..............................................................................................................................51
3.1.8 Unit switch-on and switch-off delay........................................................................................51
3.1.9 Error handling.........................................................................................................................52
3.1.10 Cascading..............................................................................................................................52
3.1.11 Message behavior..................................................................................................................53
3.1.12 Startup characteristics............................................................................................................53
3.1.13 Time behavior........................................................................................................................53
3.1.14 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................53
3.1.15 Block parameters...................................................................................................................54
3.1.16 Operator control and monitoring............................................................................................58
3.1.16.1 S7Aggr08 views.....................................................................................................................58
3.1.16.2 S7Aggr08 standard view........................................................................................................58
3.1.16.3 S7Aggr08 parameter view......................................................................................................59
3.1.16.4 S7Aggr08 block icon..............................................................................................................60
PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

Function Manual, 08/2017, A5E42064473-AA 3
Table of contents
3.2 S7UsrM - Selection of operating level from 8 levels..............................................................61

3.2.1 Function.................................................................................................................................61
3.2.2 Calling OBs............................................................................................................................61
3.2.3 Error handling.........................................................................................................................61
3.2.5 Assignment of message text and message class to the block parameters............................62
3.2.6 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................62
3.2.8.1 S7UsrM views........................................................................................................................65
3.2.8.2 S7UsrM standard view...........................................................................................................65
3.2.8.3 S7UsrM block icons...............................................................................................................66
3.3 S7OpA - Operator control of an analog measured value.......................................................67
3.3.1 Function.................................................................................................................................67
3.3.2 Calling OBs............................................................................................................................67
3.3.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................67
3.3.5 Operator panel.......................................................................................................................67
3.3.6 Switch permission..................................................................................................................68
3.3.7 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................68
3.3.9.1 S7OpA views..........................................................................................................................69
3.3.9.2 S7OpA standard view............................................................................................................69
3.3.9.3 S7OpA block icons.................................................................................................................70
3.4 S7OpD - Operator control of a binary measured value..........................................................71
3.4.1 Function.................................................................................................................................71
3.4.2 OBs to be called.....................................................................................................................71
3.4.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................71
3.4.4 Operating modes....................................................................................................................71
3.4.5 Operator panel.......................................................................................................................71
3.4.6 Switch permission..................................................................................................................72
3.4.8 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................72
3.4.10.1 S7OpD views.........................................................................................................................73
3.4.10.2 S7OpD standard view............................................................................................................73
3.4.10.3 S7OpD block icons.................................................................................................................75
4 HVAC blocks..............................................................................................................................................77
4.1 S7CalcWatP - Calculation of thermal power and emitted energy..........................................77
4.1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................77
4.1.2 OBs to be called.....................................................................................................................78
4.1.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................78
4.1.4 Operator panel.......................................................................................................................78
4.1.5 Error handling.........................................................................................................................78
4.1.8 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................79

4 Function Manual, 08/2017, A5E42064473-AA
Table of contents

4.1.10.1 CalcWatP views.....................................................................................................................81
4.1.10.2 CalcWatP standard view........................................................................................................82
4.1.10.3 CalcWatP parameter view......................................................................................................82
4.1.10.4 CalcWatP block icons............................................................................................................83
4.2 S7ConvAbRe - Conversion of humidity from absolute to relative or relative to absolute.......84
4.2.1 Function.................................................................................................................................84
4.2.2 OBs to be called.....................................................................................................................84
4.2.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................84
4.2.4 Error handling.........................................................................................................................84
4.3 S7ConvCF - Conversion of unit of temperature from °C to °F or from °F to °C.....................86
4.3.1 Function.................................................................................................................................86
4.3.2 OBs to be called.....................................................................................................................86
4.3.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................86
4.3.4 Error handling.........................................................................................................................86
4.4 S7HxFct - Calculation of enthalpy, absolute humidity, and saturated humidity according
to Mollier.................................................................................................................................87
4.4.1 Function.................................................................................................................................87
4.4.2 OBs to be called.....................................................................................................................87
4.4.3 Time behavior........................................................................................................................88
4.4.4 Operator panel.......................................................................................................................88
4.4.5 Error handling.........................................................................................................................88
4.4.8 Called blocks..........................................................................................................................89
4.4.10.1 S7HxFct views.......................................................................................................................90
4.4.10.2 S7HxFct standard view..........................................................................................................91
4.4.10.3 S7HxFct block icons...............................................................................................................91
5 Communication blocks...............................................................................................................................93
5.1 Application areas for the communication blocks....................................................................93
5.2 S7SndDig - Sending digital values.......................................................................................101
5.2.1 S7SndDig description...........................................................................................................101
5.2.2 S7SndDig operating modes.................................................................................................102
5.2.3 Function of S7SndDig..........................................................................................................102
5.2.4 S7SndDig error handling......................................................................................................102
5.2.5 S7SndDig messaging...........................................................................................................102
5.2.6 S7SndDig I/Os.....................................................................................................................103
5.2.7 S7SndDig block diagram......................................................................................................103
5.3 S7SndAna - Sending analog values....................................................................................104
5.3.1 S7SndAna description..........................................................................................................104
5.3.2 S7SndAna operating modes................................................................................................105
5.3.3 Function of S7SndAna.........................................................................................................105
5.3.4 S7SndAna error handling.....................................................................................................105
5.3.5 S7SndAna messaging..........................................................................................................106
5.3.6 S7SndAna I/Os....................................................................................................................106

Table of contents
5.3.7 S7SndAna block diagram.....................................................................................................106

5.4 S7RcvDig - Receiving digital values....................................................................................107
5.4.1 S7RcvDig description...........................................................................................................107
5.4.2 S7RcvDig operating modes.................................................................................................108
5.4.3 Function of S7RcvDig..........................................................................................................108
5.4.4 S7RcvDig error handling......................................................................................................109
5.4.5 S7RcvDig messaging...........................................................................................................109
5.4.6 S7RcvDig I/Os......................................................................................................................109
5.4.7 S7RcvDig block diagram......................................................................................................110
5.5 S7RcvAna - Receiving analog values..................................................................................111
5.5.1 S7RcvAna description..........................................................................................................111
5.5.2 S7RcvAna operating modes................................................................................................112
5.5.3 Function of S7RcvAna.........................................................................................................112
5.5.4 S7RcvAna error handling.....................................................................................................113
5.5.5 S7RcvAna messaging..........................................................................................................113
5.5.6 S7RcvAna I/Os.....................................................................................................................113
5.5.7 S7RcvAna block diagram.....................................................................................................114
5.6 S7SndHDig - Sending digital values....................................................................................115
5.6.1 S7SndHDig description........................................................................................................115
5.6.2 S7SndHDig operating modes...............................................................................................116
5.6.3 Function of S7SndHDig........................................................................................................116
5.6.4 S7SndHDig error handling...................................................................................................116
5.6.5 S7SndHDig messaging........................................................................................................117
5.6.6 S7SndHDig I/Os...................................................................................................................117
5.6.7 S7SndHDig block diagram...................................................................................................118
5.7 S7SndHAna - Sending analog values..................................................................................119
5.7.1 S7SndHAna description.......................................................................................................119
5.7.2 S7SndHAna operating modes..............................................................................................120
5.7.3 Function of S7SndHAna.......................................................................................................120
5.7.4 S7SndHAna error handling..................................................................................................120
5.7.5 S7SndHAna messaging.......................................................................................................121
5.7.6 S7SndHAna I/Os..................................................................................................................121
5.7.7 S7SndHAna block diagram..................................................................................................122
5.8 S7RcvHDig - Receiving digital values..................................................................................123
5.8.1 S7RcvHDig description........................................................................................................123
5.8.2 S7RcvHDig operating modes...............................................................................................124
5.8.3 Function of S7RcvHDig........................................................................................................124
5.8.4 S7RcvHDig error handling...................................................................................................125
5.8.5 S7RcvHDig messaging........................................................................................................125
5.8.6 S7RcvHDig I/Os...................................................................................................................125
5.8.7 S7RcvHDig block diagram...................................................................................................126
5.9 S7RcvHAna - Receiving analog values...............................................................................127
5.9.1 S7RcvHAna description.......................................................................................................127
5.9.2 S7RcvHAna operating modes..............................................................................................128
5.9.3 Function of S7RcvHAna.......................................................................................................128
5.9.4 S7RcvHAna error handling..................................................................................................129
5.9.5 S7RcvHAna messaging.......................................................................................................129
5.9.6 S7RcvHAna I/Os..................................................................................................................129
5.9.7 S7RcvHAna block diagram..................................................................................................130

Table of contents
5.10 ASRcvH - H-system communication receive block..............................................................131

5.10.1 Function...............................................................................................................................131
5.10.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................131
5.10.3 Monitoring the receiving procedure......................................................................................132
5.10.4 Message behavior................................................................................................................132
5.10.5 Startup characteristics..........................................................................................................133
5.10.6 Time behavior......................................................................................................................133
5.10.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................133
5.10.8 Block parameters.................................................................................................................133
5.11 ASSendH - H-system communication send block................................................................150
5.11.1 Function...............................................................................................................................150
5.11.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................150
5.11.3 Monitoring the sending procedure........................................................................................151
5.11.6 Time behavior......................................................................................................................152
5.11.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................152
5.12 S7Get - AS-AS communication, read data...........................................................................160
5.12.1 Function...............................................................................................................................160
5.12.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................162
5.12.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................162
5.12.4 Monitoring of the communication procedure........................................................................162
5.12.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................163
5.13 S7Put - AS-AS communication, write data...........................................................................165
5.13.1 Function...............................................................................................................................165
5.13.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................167
5.13.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................167
5.13.4 Monitoring of the communication procedure........................................................................167
5.13.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................168
6 Logic blocks..............................................................................................................................................171
6.1 S7SelB - Select one of two BOOL values............................................................................171
6.1.1 Function...............................................................................................................................171
6.1.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................171
6.2 S7SelI - Select one of two INTEGER values.......................................................................172
6.2.1 Function...............................................................................................................................172
6.2.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................172
6.3 S7SelR - Select one of two REAL values............................................................................173
6.3.1 Function...............................................................................................................................173
6.3.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................173

Table of contents

7 Mathematical blocks.................................................................................................................................175
7.1 S7AccuS - Accumulated measured value with specific heat...............................................175
7.1.1 Function...............................................................................................................................175
7.1.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................175
7.1.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................175
7.1.4 Operating modes..................................................................................................................175
7.1.6 Integrate...............................................................................................................................176
7.1.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................176
7.1.9 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................178
7.1.9.1 S7AccuS views....................................................................................................................178
7.1.9.2 S7AccuS standard view.......................................................................................................178
7.1.9.3 S7AccuS block icons............................................................................................................178
7.2 S7Average - Generation of mean/minimum/maximum value...............................................179
7.2.1 Function...............................................................................................................................179
7.2.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................179
7.2.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................179
7.2.4 How it works.........................................................................................................................179
7.2.5 Plausibility check..................................................................................................................180
7.2.8 Called blocks........................................................................................................................181
7.2.10.1 S7Average views.................................................................................................................183
7.2.10.2 S7Average standard view....................................................................................................184
7.2.10.3 S7Average parameter view..................................................................................................184
7.2.10.4 S7Average block icon..........................................................................................................185
8 Motor and valve blocks.............................................................................................................................187
8.1 General information about motor blocks - Description of the general functions of all motor
blocks...................................................................................................................................187
8.1.1 General information about motor blocks..............................................................................187
8.1.2 Function...............................................................................................................................188
8.1.3 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................189
8.1.4 Time behavior......................................................................................................................189
8.1.5 How it works.........................................................................................................................189
8.1.6 Operating modes..................................................................................................................190
8.1.7 Interlock................................................................................................................................192
8.1.8 Control..................................................................................................................................192
8.1.9 Runtime monitoring..............................................................................................................192
8.1.10 Motor protection...................................................................................................................193
8.1.11 Error handling.......................................................................................................................193
8.1.12 Bumpless switchover...........................................................................................................193
8.1.15 Availability............................................................................................................................195
8.1.16 Maintenance information......................................................................................................195
8.1.17 Anti-blocking function (ABS)................................................................................................196

Table of contents
8.1.18 Called blocks........................................................................................................................196

8.1.19.1 Views of motor blocks in general.........................................................................................196
8.1.19.2 Motor blocks parameter view...............................................................................................196
8.1.19.3 Maintenance view of motor blocks in general......................................................................197
8.2 S7Vlv - Valve control............................................................................................................198
8.2.1 Function...............................................................................................................................198
8.2.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................198
8.2.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................198
8.2.4 How it works.........................................................................................................................198
8.2.5 Neutral position....................................................................................................................199
8.2.6 Operating modes..................................................................................................................199
8.2.7 Interlock................................................................................................................................200
8.2.8 Monitoring............................................................................................................................201
8.2.9 Bumpless switchover...........................................................................................................201
8.2.10 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................201
8.2.11 Switch permission................................................................................................................201
8.2.12 Error handling.......................................................................................................................202
8.2.14 Availability............................................................................................................................202
8.2.16 Called blocks........................................................................................................................203
8.2.18.1 S7Vlv views..........................................................................................................................206
8.2.18.2 S7Vlv standard view.............................................................................................................207
8.2.18.3 S7Vlv parameter view..........................................................................................................208
8.2.18.4 S7Vlv block icons.................................................................................................................208
8.3 S7Mot - Single-stage motor.................................................................................................209
8.3.1 Function...............................................................................................................................209
8.3.2 Control outputs.....................................................................................................................209
8.3.3 Feedback.............................................................................................................................209
8.3.4 Monitoring times...................................................................................................................209
8.3.5 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................209
8.3.7 Called blocks........................................................................................................................210
8.3.8 Special block parameters.....................................................................................................210
8.3.9.1 S7Mot views.........................................................................................................................214
8.3.9.2 S7Mot standard view............................................................................................................214
8.3.9.3 S7Mot block icons................................................................................................................215
8.4 S7MotRev - Reversing motor...............................................................................................217
8.4.1 Function...............................................................................................................................217
8.4.2 Control outputs.....................................................................................................................217
8.4.3 Feedback.............................................................................................................................217
8.4.5 Control..................................................................................................................................217
8.4.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................218
8.4.8 Called blocks........................................................................................................................218

Table of contents

8.4.10.1 S7MotRev views..................................................................................................................223
8.4.10.2 S7MotRev standard view.....................................................................................................223
8.4.10.3 S7MotRev block icons..........................................................................................................224
8.5 S7MotSpd - Two-stage motor..............................................................................................225
8.5.1 Function...............................................................................................................................225
8.5.2 Control outputs.....................................................................................................................225
8.5.3 Feedback.............................................................................................................................225
8.5.5 Control..................................................................................................................................225
8.5.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................226
8.5.8 Called blocks........................................................................................................................227
8.5.10.1 S7MotSpd views..................................................................................................................231
8.5.10.2 S7MotSpd standard view.....................................................................................................231
8.5.10.3 S7MotSpd block icons..........................................................................................................233
8.6 S7MotSpdC - Frequency-controlled motor...........................................................................234
8.6.1 Function...............................................................................................................................234
8.6.2 Control outputs.....................................................................................................................234
8.6.3 Feedback.............................................................................................................................234
8.6.5 Speed specification..............................................................................................................234
8.6.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................235
8.6.8 Called blocks........................................................................................................................235
8.6.10.1 S7MotSpdC views................................................................................................................240
8.6.10.2 S7MotSpdC standard view...................................................................................................240
8.6.10.3 S7MotSpdC block icons.......................................................................................................242
8.7 S7MV3P -3-point final controlling element...........................................................................244
8.7.1 Function...............................................................................................................................244
8.7.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................244
8.7.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................244
8.7.4 Operating modes..................................................................................................................244
8.7.5 Neutral position....................................................................................................................244
8.7.6 Control outputs.....................................................................................................................245
8.7.7 Setpoint................................................................................................................................245
8.7.8 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................245
8.7.10 Error handling / Message behavior......................................................................................246
8.7.12 Availability............................................................................................................................246
8.7.13 Called blocks........................................................................................................................247
8.7.15.1 S7MV3P views.....................................................................................................................251
8.7.15.2 S7MV3P standard view........................................................................................................251
8.7.15.3 S7MV3P parameter view.....................................................................................................254

Table of contents
8.7.15.4 S7MV3P block icons............................................................................................................255

8.8 S7VlvMot - Control of motor valve.......................................................................................256
8.8.1 S7VlvMot description...........................................................................................................256
8.8.2 S7VlvMot operating modes..................................................................................................259
8.8.3 S7VlvMot functions..............................................................................................................260
8.8.4 S7VlvMot error handling.......................................................................................................269
8.8.5 S7VlvMot messaging...........................................................................................................270
8.8.6 S7VlvMot I/Os......................................................................................................................271
8.8.7.1 S7VlvMot views....................................................................................................................279
8.8.7.2 S7VlvMot standard view.......................................................................................................280
8.8.7.3 Limit view of S7VlvMot.........................................................................................................283
8.8.7.4 S7VlvMot parameter view....................................................................................................285
8.8.7.5 S7VlvMot preview................................................................................................................287
8.8.7.6 S7VlvMot block icons...........................................................................................................289
9 Panel blocks.............................................................................................................................................291
9.1 S7PCalcWatP - Operator panel interface for S7CalcWatP..................................................291
9.1.1 Function...............................................................................................................................291
9.1.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................291
9.1.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................292
9.1.6.1 S7CalcWatP views...............................................................................................................293
9.1.6.2 S7CalcWatP standard view..................................................................................................293
9.1.6.3 S7CalcWatP block icons......................................................................................................294
9.2 S7PHxFct - Operator panel interface for S7HxFct...............................................................295
9.2.1 Function...............................................................................................................................295
9.2.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................295
9.2.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................295
9.2.6.1 S7PHxFct views...................................................................................................................297
9.2.6.2 S7PHxFct standard view......................................................................................................297
9.2.6.3 S7PHxFct block icon............................................................................................................297
9.3 S7PMonAn - Operator panel interface for S7MonAn...........................................................298
9.3.1 Function...............................................................................................................................298
9.3.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................298
9.3.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................298
9.3.6.1 S7PMonAn views.................................................................................................................300
9.3.6.2 S7PMonAn standard view....................................................................................................301
9.3.6.3 S7PMonAn block icons........................................................................................................301
9.4 S7PMonAn08 - Operator panel interface for S7MonAn08...................................................302
9.4.1 Function...............................................................................................................................302
9.4.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................302

Table of contents

9.4.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................302
9.4.6.1 S7PMonAn08 views.............................................................................................................304
9.4.6.2 S7PMonAn08 standard view................................................................................................305
9.4.6.3 S7PMonAn08 block icons....................................................................................................305
9.5 S7PMonAnDi - Operator panel interface for S7MonAnDi....................................................306
9.5.1 Function...............................................................................................................................306
9.5.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................306
9.5.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................306
9.5.6.1 S7PMonAnDi views..............................................................................................................308
9.5.6.2 S7PMonAnDi standard view................................................................................................309
9.5.6.3 S7PMonAnDi block icons.....................................................................................................309
9.6 S7PMonAnGrad - Operator panel interface for S7MonAnGrad...........................................310
9.6.1 Function...............................................................................................................................310
9.6.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................310
9.6.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................310
9.6.6.1 S7PMonAnGrad views.........................................................................................................312
9.6.6.2 S7PMonAnGrad standard view............................................................................................313
9.6.6.3 S7PMonAnGrad block icons................................................................................................313
9.7 S7PMonDi - Operator panel interface for S7MonDi.............................................................314
9.7.1 Function...............................................................................................................................314
9.7.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................314
9.7.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................314
9.7.6.1 S7PMonDi views..................................................................................................................316
9.7.6.2 S7PMonDi standard view.....................................................................................................316
9.7.6.3 S7PMonDi block icon...........................................................................................................317
9.8 S7PMonDi08 - Operator panel interface for S7MonDi08.....................................................318
9.8.1 Function...............................................................................................................................318
9.8.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................318
9.8.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................318
9.8.6.1 S7PMonDi08 views..............................................................................................................321
9.8.6.2 S7PMonDi08 standard view.................................................................................................321
9.8.6.3 S7PMonDi08 block icons.....................................................................................................321
9.9 S7PMot - Operator panel interface for S7Mot......................................................................322
9.9.1 Function...............................................................................................................................322
9.9.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................322

Table of contents
9.9.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................322

9.9.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................323
9.9.7.1 S7PMot views......................................................................................................................325
9.9.7.2 S7PMot standard view.........................................................................................................325
9.9.7.3 S7PMot block icon...............................................................................................................325
9.10 S7PMotRev - Operator panel interface for S7MotRev.........................................................326
9.10.1 Function...............................................................................................................................326
9.10.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................326
9.10.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................327
9.10.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................327
9.10.7.1 S7PMotRev views................................................................................................................329
9.10.7.2 S7PMotRev standard view...................................................................................................329
9.10.7.3 S7PMotRev block icons.......................................................................................................329
9.11 S7PMotSpd - Operator panel interface for S7MotSpd.........................................................330
9.11.1 Function...............................................................................................................................330
9.11.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................330
9.11.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................330
9.11.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................331
9.12 S7PMotSpdC - Operator panel interface for S7MotSpdC....................................................334
9.12.1 Function...............................................................................................................................334
9.12.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................334
9.12.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................335
9.12.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................335
9.12.7.1 S7PMotSpdC views.............................................................................................................337
9.12.7.2 S7PMotSpdC standard view................................................................................................337
9.12.7.3 S7PMotSpdC block icons.....................................................................................................338
9.13 S7PPID - Operator panel interface for S7PIDCon...............................................................339
9.13.1 Function...............................................................................................................................339
9.13.2 Configuration notes..............................................................................................................339
9.13.3 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................339
9.13.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................340
9.13.7.1 S7PPID views......................................................................................................................342
9.13.7.2 S7PPID standard view.........................................................................................................342
9.13.7.3 S7PPID block icons..............................................................................................................343
9.14 S7PMV3P - Operator Panel Interface for S7MV3P..............................................................344

Table of contents
9.14.1 Function...............................................................................................................................344
9.14.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................344
9.14.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................344
9.14.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................345
9.14.7.1 S7PMV3P views...................................................................................................................347
9.14.7.2 S7PMV3P standard view.....................................................................................................347
9.14.7.3 S7PMV3P block icon............................................................................................................347
9.15 S7POpA - Operator panel interface for S7OpA...................................................................348
9.15.1 Function...............................................................................................................................348
9.15.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................348
9.15.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................349
9.15.6.1 S7POpA views.....................................................................................................................350
9.15.6.2 S7POpA standard view........................................................................................................350
9.15.6.3 S7POpA block icons............................................................................................................350
9.16 S7POpD - Operator panel interface for S7OpD...................................................................351
9.16.1 Function...............................................................................................................................351
9.16.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................351
9.16.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................352
9.16.6.1 S7POpD views.....................................................................................................................353
9.16.6.2 S7POpD standard view........................................................................................................353
9.16.6.3 S7POpD block icons............................................................................................................354
9.17 S7PUsrM - operator panel interface for S7UsrM.................................................................355
9.17.1 Function...............................................................................................................................355
9.17.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................355
9.17.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................356
9.17.5 Block parameter...................................................................................................................356
9.17.6.1 S7PUsrM views....................................................................................................................358
9.17.6.2 S7PUsrM standard view.......................................................................................................358
9.17.6.3 S7PUsrM block icons...........................................................................................................358
9.18 S7PVlv - Operator panel interface for S7Vlv........................................................................359
9.18.1 Function...............................................................................................................................359
9.18.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................359
9.18.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................359
9.18.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................360
9.18.7.1 S7PVlv views.......................................................................................................................362
9.18.7.2 S7PVlv standard view..........................................................................................................362

Table of contents
9.18.7.3 S7PVlv block icons...............................................................................................................362

9.19 S7PVlvMot - Operator panel interface for S7VlvMot............................................................363
9.19.1 Function...............................................................................................................................363
9.19.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................363
9.19.4 Called blocks........................................................................................................................363
9.19.5 Block parameter...................................................................................................................364
9.19.6.1 S7VlvMot views....................................................................................................................366
9.19.6.2 S7PVlvMot standard view....................................................................................................367
9.19.6.3 S7PVlvMot block icons.........................................................................................................367
10 Controller blocks.......................................................................................................................................369
10.1 S7PIDCon - Continuous PID controller................................................................................369
10.1.1 S7PIDCon description..........................................................................................................369
10.1.2 S7PIDCon operating modes................................................................................................372
10.1.3 Functions..............................................................................................................................372
10.1.4 Error handling.......................................................................................................................379
10.1.5 Messaging............................................................................................................................379
10.1.6 I/Os.......................................................................................................................................380
10.1.7.1 S7PIDCon views..................................................................................................................387
10.1.7.2 S7PIDCon standard view.....................................................................................................388
10.1.7.3 Limit view of S7PIDCon.......................................................................................................390
10.1.7.4 Ramp view of S7PIDCon.....................................................................................................392
10.1.7.5 S7PIDCon parameter view...................................................................................................393
10.1.7.6 S7PIDCon preview...............................................................................................................394
10.1.7.7 S7PIDCon block icons.........................................................................................................395
10.2 S7TiSwitch - Time switch with 8 switch points.....................................................................397
10.2.1 S7TiSwitch description.........................................................................................................397
10.2.2 S7TiSwitch operating modes...............................................................................................399
10.2.3 S7TiSwitch functions............................................................................................................399
10.2.4 S7TiSwitch error handling....................................................................................................403
10.2.5 S7TiSwitch messaging.........................................................................................................403
10.2.6 S7TiSwitch I/Os....................................................................................................................404
10.2.7.1 S7TiSwitch views.................................................................................................................406
10.2.7.2 S7TiSwitch standard view....................................................................................................406
10.2.7.3 S7TiSwitch parameter view..................................................................................................407
10.2.7.4 S7TiSwitch preview..............................................................................................................408
10.2.7.5 S7TiSwitch block icons........................................................................................................409
10.3 S7SplitRange - Split range for control..................................................................................410
10.3.1 Function...............................................................................................................................410
10.3.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................410
10.3.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................410
10.3.4 Interconnection in the CFC..................................................................................................411
10.3.5 Supplying the manipulated variables...................................................................................411
10.3.6 Adjusting the controller.........................................................................................................411
10.3.7 Error handling.......................................................................................................................412

Table of contents
10.3.10 Diagram of a split range control process..............................................................................412

10.3.11 Called blocks........................................................................................................................413
10.4 S7MVLd - Retrieving the manipulated variable for the controller.........................................418
10.4.1 Function...............................................................................................................................418
10.4.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................418
10.4.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................418
10.4.4 How it works / Startup characteristics..................................................................................418
10.4.5 Called blocks........................................................................................................................418
11 System blocks..........................................................................................................................................421
11.1 S7ASTimeBCD - Output the CPU time in BCD format........................................................421
11.1.1 Function...............................................................................................................................421
11.1.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................421
11.1.3 Called blocks........................................................................................................................421
12 Monitoring blocks......................................................................................................................................423
12.1 S7MonAn - Measured value monitoring...............................................................................423
12.1.1 Function...............................................................................................................................423
12.1.2 OBs to be called...................................................................................................................423
12.1.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................423
12.1.4 How it works.........................................................................................................................423
12.1.5 Output V...............................................................................................................................424
12.1.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................424
12.1.7 Error handling.......................................................................................................................424
12.1.10 Called blocks........................................................................................................................425
12.1.12.1 S7MonAn views...................................................................................................................427
12.1.12.2 S7MonAn standard view......................................................................................................428
12.1.12.3 Limit view of S7MonAn.........................................................................................................428
12.1.12.4 Maintenance view of S7MonAn............................................................................................429
12.1.12.5 Trend view of S7MonAn.......................................................................................................430
12.1.12.6 S7MonAn block icons...........................................................................................................430
12.2 S7MonAn08 - Measured value monitoring with 8 limits.......................................................431
12.2.1 Function...............................................................................................................................431
12.2.2 Calling organization blocks..................................................................................................431
12.2.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................431
12.2.5 Output V...............................................................................................................................431
12.2.6 Error handling.......................................................................................................................432
12.2.7 Measured value monitoring..................................................................................................432
12.2.8 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................432
12.2.11 Called blocks........................................................................................................................437

Table of contents
12.2.12.1 S7MonAn08 views...............................................................................................................437

12.2.12.2 Limit view of S7MonAn08.....................................................................................................438
12.2.12.3 S7MonAn08 block icons.......................................................................................................438
12.3 S7MonAnDi - Measured value monitoring for 4 analog and binary limits............................439
12.3.1 Function...............................................................................................................................439
12.3.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................439
12.3.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................439
12.3.4 How it works.........................................................................................................................439
12.3.5 Output V...............................................................................................................................439
12.3.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................440
12.3.7 Error handling.......................................................................................................................440
12.3.10 Called blocks........................................................................................................................441
12.3.12.1 S7MonAnDi views................................................................................................................443
12.3.12.2 S7MonAnDi standard view...................................................................................................444
12.3.12.3 Limit view of S7MonAnDi.....................................................................................................444
12.3.12.4 S7MonAnDi block icons.......................................................................................................445
12.4 S7MonAnGrad - Measured value monitoring with gradient function....................................446
12.4.1 Function...............................................................................................................................446
12.4.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................446
12.4.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................446
12.4.4 How it works.........................................................................................................................446
12.4.6 Error handling.......................................................................................................................447
12.4.7 Output V...............................................................................................................................447
12.4.9 Measured value monitoring..................................................................................................448
12.4.10 Gradient monitoring..............................................................................................................448
12.4.11 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................448
12.4.12 Called blocks........................................................................................................................448
12.4.14.1 S7MonAnGrad views...........................................................................................................451
12.4.14.2 S7MonAnGrad parameter view............................................................................................452
12.4.14.3 S7MonAnGrad block icons...................................................................................................452
12.5 S7MonDi - Monitoring of a binary process tag.....................................................................453
12.5.1 Function...............................................................................................................................453
12.5.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................453
12.5.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................453
12.5.4 Output Q...............................................................................................................................453
12.5.5 Monitoring the process tag...................................................................................................454
12.5.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................454
12.5.9 Called blocks........................................................................................................................455
12.5.11.1 S7MonDi views....................................................................................................................457

Table of contents
12.5.11.2 S7MonDi standard view.......................................................................................................457

12.5.11.3 Maintenance view of S7MonDi.............................................................................................458
12.5.11.4 S7MonDi block icons............................................................................................................458
12.6 S7MonDi08 - Monitoring of 8 binary process tags...............................................................459
12.6.1 Function...............................................................................................................................459
12.6.2 Calling OBs..........................................................................................................................459
12.6.3 Time behavior......................................................................................................................459
12.6.4 Outputs Qx...........................................................................................................................459
12.6.5 Monitoring the process tag...................................................................................................460
12.6.6 Operator panel.....................................................................................................................460
12.6.9 Called blocks........................................................................................................................461
12.6.11.1 S7MonDi08 views................................................................................................................465
12.6.11.2 S7MonDi08 standard view...................................................................................................466
12.6.11.3 Maintenance view of S7MonDi08.........................................................................................467
12.6.11.4 S7MonDi08 block icons........................................................................................................467
Index.........................................................................................................................................................469

Security information 1
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

Security information

Basics 2
2.1 About this document
This manual describes the functions of the blocks in the Industry Library for S7, hereafter
referred to as IL S7.
It describes the blocks contained in the IL S7 and the extension of the standard functionality.
This manual focuses on:
● Description of the contained blocks.
● "Multiple control room operation" operating concept including coupling blocks for panel
integration with WinCC Comfort

Basics
2.2 Overview of function blocks

The table below offers a list of the function blocks contained in the IL S7 with their essential
functions and features.
FB/FC name FB/FC Function OCM

number
S7Mot FB258 Single-stage motor Y
S7MotRev FB259 Reversing motor Y
S7MotSpd FB260 Two-stage motor Y
S7MotSpdC FB261 Frequency-controlled motor Y
S7MV3P FB262 3-point final controlling element Y
S7Vlv FB263 Valve control Y
S7CalcWatP FB264 Calculation of thermal power and emitted energy Y
S7PIDCon FB265 Continuous PID controller Y
S7HxFct FB267 Calculation of enthalpy, absolute humidity, and humidity at sat‐ Y
uration
S7AccuS FB269 Accumulated measured value with specific heat Y
S7Average FB270 Averaging with validation of measured values Y
S7MonAn FB271 Measured value monitoring Y
S7MonAn08 FB272 Measured value monitoring for 8 limits Y
S7MonAnDi FB273 Measured value monitoring for 4 analog and binary limits Y
S7MonAnGrad FB274 Measured value monitoring with gradient function Y
S7MonDi FB275 Monitoring of a binary process tag Y
S7MonDi08 FB276 Monitoring of 8 binary process tags Y
S7Aggr08 FB277 Switchover for max. 8 units Y
S7OpA FB278 Operator control of an analog measured value Y
S7OpD FB279 Operator control of a binary measured value Y
S7UsrM FB280 Selection of operation level out of 8 levels Y
S7PCalcWatP FB282 Operator panel interface for calculation of thermal power and Y
emitted energy (S7CalcWatP)
S7PPID FB283 Operator panel interface for controller block (S7PID) Y
S7PHxFct FB285 Operator panel interface for calculation of enthalpy, absolute Y
humidity, and humidity at saturation (S7HxFct)
S7PMonAn FB286 Operator panel interface for measured value monitoring (S7Mo‐ Y
nAn)
S7PMonAn08 FB287 Operator panel interface for measured value monitoring for 8 Y
limits (S7MonAn08)
S7PMonAnDi FB288 Operator panel interface for measured value monitoring for 8 Y
limits (S7MonAnDi)
S7PMonAnGrad FB289 Operator panel interface for measured value monitoring with Y
gradient function (S7MonAnGrad)
S7PMonDi FB290 Operator panel interface for monitoring of a binary process tag Y
(S7MonDi)
S7PMonDi08 FB291 Operator panel interface for monitoring of the 8 binary process Y
tags (S7MonDi08)
S7PMot FB292 Operator panel interface for single-stage motor (S7Mot) Y

Basics
FB/FC name FB/FC Function OCM

number
S7PMotRev FB293 Operator panel interface for reversing motor with 2 directions Y
of rotation (S7MotRev)
S7PMotSpd FB294 Operator panel interface for two-stage motor (S7MotSpd) Y
S7PMotSpdC FB295 Operator panel interface for frequency-controlled motor Y
(S7MotSpdC)
S7PMV3P FB296 Operator panel interface for 3-point final controlling element Y
(S7MV3P)
S7POpA FB297 Operator panel interface for manipulation of an analog value Y
(S7OpAn)
S7POpD FB298 Operator panel interface for manipulation of a binary value Y
(S7OpD)
S7PVlv FB301 Operator panel interface for a valve (S7Vlv) Y
S7MVLd FB302 Retrieving the manipulated variable for the controller N
S7SplitRange FB303 Split range for control N
S7VlvMot FB306 Motor valve control Y
S7PVlvMot FB307 Operator panel interface for motor valve (S7VlvMot) Y
S7TimeSwitch FB308 Time switch with 8 switch points Y
S7PUsrM FB309 Operator panel interface for selecting one of eight control levels Y
(S7UsrM)
S7SndDig FB330 Sending up to 128 digital structures from an S7-300 / S7-1500 N
to an S7-400
S7RcvDig FB331 Receiving up to 128 digital structures from an S7-400 by an N
S7-300 / S7-1500
S7SndAna FB332 Sending up to 32 analog structures from an S7-300 / S7-1500 N
to an S7-400
S7RcvAna FB333 Receiving up to 32 analog structures from an S7-400 by an N
S7-300 / S7-1500
S7SndHDig FB334 Sending up to 128 digital structures from an S7-300 / S7-1500 N
to an S7-400H
S7RcvHDig FB335 Receiving up to 128 digital structures from an S7-400H by an N
S7-300 / S7-1500
S7SndHAna FB336 Sending up to 32 analog structures from an S7-300 / S7-1500 N
to an S7-400H
S7RcvHAna FB337 Receiving up to 32 analog structures from an S7-400H by an N
S7-300 / S7-1500
S7Get FB1198 AS-AS communication, read data N
S7Put FB1199 AS-AS communication, write data N
S7ConvAbRe FC256 Conversion of humidity from absolute to relative or relative to N
absolute
S7ConvCF FC257 Conversion of unit of temperature from °C to °F or °F to °C N
S7SelB FC258 BOOL selector N
S7SelI FC259 INTEGER selector N
S7ASTimeBCD FC261 Output of CPU time in BCD format N
S7SelR FC262 REAL selector N

Basics
2.3 Operator control and monitoring in WinCC
2.3.1 Block icon
General information about block icons

The block icons are stored centrally as user-defined objects (UDO) in the WinCC screen
"@PCS7Typicals_IL_S7.pdl". They are copied to the process screens from this template and
linked to the process via a dynamic wizard (configuration aid).
Representation of a technological icon

The first line of the block icon displays the instance-specific name of the integrated block. You
can show or hide this line by setting the internal WinCC variable "View_Tag". The variable is
generated automatically in the OS project editor and located in the Split Screen Manager group.
Technological icons with process feedback are usually represented by colors showing their
states (active, not active, and malfunction).
Icons for operator control are identified by an additional green arrow appearing above the
cursor when the mouse points to the icon. The associated faceplate opens when the operator
clicks the icon with the mouse.
Table 2-1 Status table
Status of icon Color

On/open Green
Off/closed White
Alarm Red
Warning Yellow
Fault Black
Table 2-2 Status display
Status Status icon

Message lock enabled
Interlock enabled

Basics
Status Status icon

Interlock disabled
Local operating mode active

Automatic operating mode active
Manual operating mode active
Maintenance switch active
Maintenance switch inactive
Simulation active
Simulation inactive
Switching authority
Switching authority
The following switching authority are available:
● Operator panel: OP
● Control station OS (local control station): LCS
● Local OS: No icon
Tooltip text
The tooltip text contains text configured in the block comment of the associated AS block.
Referencing is in WinCC in the variable <instance>.#comment. The tooltip text is displayed
when the cursor is positioned on the icon.
2.3.2 Faceplate
Left-clicking on an icon in the WinCC graphic opens up an operator window (faceplate) for the
selected process tag.
Faceplate views
A faceplate usually offers a choice of several views.
The standard view provides a summary of the most important information. Additional views
contain detailed information and settings for the limits.
The button bar shows which view is currently active. The active button is colored green.
Table 2-3 Button mapping
Icon Stored faceplate view

Standard view
Maintenance view

Basics
Icon Stored faceplate view

Limit value view
Parameter view
Trend view
Message view
Batch view
Fix faceplate in the front at screen change
Operation within a faceplate

If an object within WinCC can be controlled by the operator, this is indicated by a green arrow
above the cursor as soon as the mouse hovers over the object.
Values in the faceplate can only be modified if operation is enabled. Buttons which cannot be
operated due to operating states are grayed out. A text box appears for every change to a
value/state made manually. Changes must be explicitly confirmed in this case.
Each change is logged by the system and can be called in the user list: user, process tag, old
value, and new value.
Analog text boxes
3
4
(1) Mouse click opens the operator window

(2) Text box for the desired value
(3) Confirm the value input
(4) Discard the value input

Basics
Binary text boxes
1
2
(1) Confirm the value input

(2) Discard the value input
Standard view
The standard view is different for each type of block, but the basic layout always remains the
same.
1
7
4 2
(1) Button bar to switch view

(2) Override (open = disabled, closed = enabled)
(3) Message lock enabled
(4) Status display in plain text
(5) Box for symbolic representation of the state
(6) Alarm view for the process tag
(7) Name of the process tag

Basics
Limit view
The limit view is different for each block type depending on the number of limits, but the basic
layout is always the same.
1
2
(1) Enable message lock

(2) Monitored limits
(3) Limit bar
Parameter view
The following control parameters can be set in the parameter view depending on block type:
● Monitoring,
● operating,
● and/or control parameters

Basics
(1) Setpoint
● High limit in %
● Low limit in %
(2) Slope in %
(3) Monitoring
● Run time in seconds
● Monitoring enabled
(4) Hysteresis
● Positioning in %
● Monitoring in %
Maintenance view
The maintenance view is different for each type of block, but the basic layout always remains
the same.
For motors, it contains counters for the operating hours and switching cycles; for monitoring
blocks it contains the simulation and substitute value.

Basics
(1) Current run time

● Run time in hours
● Stop time in hours
● since in hours
(2) Run time total
● Total days in days
● Startups
● since in hours
Message view
The message view is the same for all block types. This section is therefore referenced in the
following document. The alarm screen displays the following information:
● Date
● Time
● Origin (plant designation of the process tag)
● User name, as configured
● Event (e.g., motor protection)
● Status (incoming/outgoing)
● Type (danger/malfunction/warning)
● Info text (if configured)
When the message view is selected for the process tag, only the relevant messages for this
process tag are displayed.
The alarm window corresponds to the S7 standard and can be operated as follows:

Basics
1
2
3
(1) Message navigation

(2) Acknowledgment single
(3) Acknowledgment group
Trend view
The trend view is the same for all process tags. This section is therefore referenced in the
following document.
Only the number of trends may vary for different block types.
The trend view shows the analog values as a curve.
Example trend:
(1) Legend representation

Basics
Batch view
The batch view is the same for all block types.
You can activate or deactivate the batch view by setting the internal WinCC variable
""@IL_BatchView". The variable is generated automatically in the OS project editor and located
in the Split Screen Manager group.
(1) Batch allocation

● Release
● Allocated
● Batch name
● Batch ID
● Batch step

Basics
Integrating a trend in a faceplate

Proceed as follows to integrate a trend in a faceplate.
1. Create an archive for the variables of the trend display to be shown. This is done with the
assistance of the archive wizard in the Tag Logging Editor of WinCC.
2. Call the archive "Process Value Archive".
3. Set up the corresponding icon based on specific instances defining whether archive values
are retrieved and which values are used. To do this, change the "ReturnPath" and
"StandardTrend" properties.
(1) Object properties
Parameter Value Effect

ReturnPath .PV Structure element name beginning with a dot
: Separator
CO_GREEN Color for trend
(more color constants are listed in the "Color ta‐
ble" in the Appendix)
, Comma for next trend
Example: .PV_IN:CO_GREEN,.SP:CO_BLUE
Process value and setpoint for controller
StandardTrend 2 Online values with time axis of 5 minutes
>2 Archive values with time axis of the entered val‐

ue (in minutes)

Basics
The "@S7_Trend.pdl" screen [screen size = 700 x 450] is the trend master for all faceplates.
The default setting of the process values for the faceplates (see descriptions of faceplates)
results in a time axis of 5 minutes being displayed.
Note
When archive values are used, all measured values must also be set up in the Process Value
Archive. Process values which do not exist in the archive are not shown.
2.3.3 Notes on configuration
Interface between user-defined object and process

To connect the user-defined object to the process, some properties/events of the object have
to be provided with process variables/global scripts.
This interconnection is created by copying the icon from the "@Template_IL_S7" picture into
the process picture and then using the "Connect process tag with faceplate" dynamic wizard
to automatically link it to the corresponding object from the process.
User-specific formats for analog values in Runtime

The Industry Library for S7 enables you to adapt the format for displaying analog values in
block icons and faceplates. You can perform this at the attribute "Styles ->
AnalogValueFormat1/AnalogValueFormat2/AnalogValueFormat3" in the properties of the
block icon.
The three AnalogValueFormat attributes should be assigned to the various analog values of
the blocks as follows:
Block AnalogValueFormat1 AnalogValueFormat2 AnalogValueFormat3

S7AccuS ● Counter 1 Not used Not used
● Counter 2
S7Aggr08 - - -
S7Average ● Measured values Not used ● Suppression time
● Maximum value
● Mean value
● Minimum value
● Plausibility difference
S7CalcWatP ● Performance ● Energy ● Flow
● Performance limits ● Energy limits
S7HxFct ● Enthalpy ● Absolute humidity ● Relative humidity
● Saturated humidity

Basics

S7MonAn ● Process value & hysteresis Not used Not used
● Process value limits
● Simulation value
● Substitute value
S7MonAn08 ● Process value & hysteresis Not used Not used
S7MonAnDi ● Process value & hysteresis Not used Not used
S7MonAnGrad ● Process value & hysteresis Not used ● Time base
● Gradients and gradient
monitoring
S7MonDi - - -
S7MonDi08 - - -
S7Mot - - -
S7MotRev - - -
S7MotSpd - - -
S7MotSpdC ● Setpoint Not used ● Runtime monitoring
● Readback value
S7MV3P ● Manipulated variable Not used ● Runtime monitoring
● Readback value
● Setpoint limits
● Slope
● Hysteresis/gradient values
S7OpA ● Manual value Not used Not used

● Output value
S7OpD - - -

Basics

S7PIDCon ● Process value ● Manipulated variable ● Ramp duration
● Setpoint (internal/external) ● Readback value ● Integral time
● Process value limits ● Readback value limits ● Derivative time TD
● Control deviation limits ● Manipulated variable
● Setpoint operation range operating range
● Gradient limits ● Disturbance variable
● Ramp target setpoint ● Tracking value
● Deadband
● Control zone
● Control deviation
● Program value
S7UsrM - - -
S7Vlv - - -
S7VlvMot ● Manipulated variable (internal/ Not used ● Monitoring times
external/local)
● Readback value
● Manipulated variable
difference limits
● Readback value limits
● Manipulated variable
operating range
● Control deviation
● Tracking value
Attributes that do not exist on the block icon are marked with "-" in the table.
2.3.4 Setting of the standard server
Setting of the standard server

The Industry Library uses enumerations to display user-specific texts. To ensure that the texts
of the enumerations are displayed correctly on a client, a standard server has to be specified
for text libraries.

Basics
2.4 Hierarchical operating concept
2.4.1 Description of the concept

There may be some applications in which the required plants or units have to be operated from
several operating locations.
To avoid inconsistencies caused by the operation from different locations and control who is
responsible for operation, the IL S7 offers a concept for operation of multiple control rooms to
meet this requirement.
Determining the operator authorization

The multiple control room concept provided by the Industrial Library for S7 is based on the
APL function, "Local operator authorization".
The local operator authorization is an upstream operator authorization. It determines
independent of user management and authorizations, if a block may be operated from an
operating station (a specified place). If local operator authorization is missing, operation of a
block instance is usually blocked. Otherwise, when local operator authorization is allowed, the
operator authorization is normally determined through user management and the block-
specific release.
Local operator authorization can be set for each specific instance for each operator station
with its own variable management; in other words, block instances can be enabled or disabled
for use on an operator station independently of one another.
The concept integrated with the S7UsrM block consists of hierarchical operation and
monitoring of control rooms and panels for up to 8 levels.
Each of these 8 levels can be assigned the control rights over a Faceplate. In addition, an
operating level can be assigned a permission with highest priority (KeySwitch function) by
means of a technological I/O.
The names of the operating levels are defined for specific users by means of an enumeration
and are visualized on the OS.
Function and interaction of components

The S7UsrM is responsible for central management of the active operating level. The active
operating level is specified at this block by the faceplate or the interconnection. By
interconnecting the output S7UsrM.QPERMIS with the inputs <Technological
block>.PERMIS and <Panel block>.PERMIS, the active operating level is transferred to
the block instance.
The local operator authorization is checked on the OS by comparing the value of the internal
variable @Permission with the value at the PERMIS I/O of the block instance.
The local operator authorization on the panel is checked by comparing the values at the I/Os
OP_PERMIS and PERMIS.
If these values are identical, the station has the local operator authorization.

Basics
All relevant icons on the process control screen contain information that identifies the operator
station currently having switching authority. This information is also displayed in the faceplate.
See also
S7UsrM - Selection of operating level from 8 levels (Page 61)
2.4.2 Configuration of the multiple control room operation
Configuring operating levels on the OS station

To assign an operating level to an operator station (OS) you must perform the following steps:
1. Change the internal @Permission variable for the start value to the number of the
operating level for this station.
(The variable of the data type "unsigned 32-bit value" is automatically created using the
OS project editor and is located in the Split Screen Manager group).
2. Interconnect the <Technological block>.PERMIS input with the S7UsrM.QPERMIS
output of the user manager block.
If the internal @Permission variable matches the value at the input <Technological
block>.PERMIS, the operator station can be operated.
Configuring operating levels on the operator panel

You need to complete the following steps to assign a relevant operating level to an operator
panel (OP):
1. Configuration of the input <Panel block>.OP_PERMIS with the appropriate operating
level on the operator panel.
2. Interconnect the <Panel block>.PERMIS input with the S7UsrM.QPERMIS output of the
user manager block.
If the <Panel block>.PERMIS and <Panel block>.OP_PERMIS parameters match, the
operator panel can be operated.
Note
The enumeration linked to <Technological block>.PERMIS (default: OP_Conf1) is used
to display the current operator permission in the faceplate.

Basics
2.5 Panel integration
2.5.1 Interface to the operator panel
Function and interaction of components

If you wish to control and monitor the process from an operator panel as well as an OS (operator
station), you must use the operator panel blocks (S7Pxxx). These blocks form the OCM
interface with the operator panel.
For example, if you want to control and monitor a "MOTOR" via the OS and an operator panel,
it is necessary to implement the following blocks:
● Technological block "S7Mot" for controlling the equipment "MOTOR"
● Operator panel (OP) interface block "S7PMot" of the IL S7 for coupling/connecting the
technological block "S7Mot" with the panel (WinCC-Comfort)
The technological block and panel block communicate using various status words. This means
all status words of the panel block must be connected to the corresponding I/Os of the
technological block. All required values are read and written using these connections.

Basics
Instance data block as interface

The instance data blocks of the operator panel form the OCM interface with the operator panel.
They have an individually defined "structure", which is dependent on the type of equipment
concerned.
Create a data block which serves as "communication DB" in the S7 program. You can use DB
25 from the library as template. The instance data block numbers of the used panel blocks are
stored as integer in this block. Connect the "IDBNo" output of the panel interface block with
the DB parameter.
Note
You only need to use one DB for each controller that includes all IDB number entries of the
panel blocks used.

Basics
2.5.2 Description of the concept

In many plants, there is a requirement to operate and visualize units at the machine level in
addition to the control room.
For this requirement, IL S7 offers a concept for panel integration with WinCC Comfort.
The concept offers a uniform operating and display form on the operator station and operator
panel.
Core functionality
The S7 Industry Library of blocks contains matching interface blocks for some of your
technological blocks. The interface blocks are used to implement the data exchange between
the operator panel and operator station and to standardize the alarm logging. The interface
block also manages the operator authorization for the panel.
The interface blocks come with a library of preconfigured block icons and faceplates for
visualization on the operator panel.
Operating philosophy
All operator stations have two standard operating levels, 5 and 6.
An operator with operating level 5 "Process operations" can perform all switching operations,
which means all technological devices can be activated/deactivated or the operating mode
can be switched from manual to automatic and vice versa.
An operator with operating level 6 "Higher-level process operations" can change parameters
provided to the operator by a faceplate.
The operating philosophy implemented on the Operator Panel corresponds to operating level
5. Thus, it is not possible to change parameters on the OP or to set the equipment to "Out of
service".
Message behavior
The messages are generated by the technological block in the controller by calling the
Alarm_DQ and Alarm_SC functions. The operator station (OS) and operator panel (OP) receive
the messages and their states from the controller. The controller transmits the message
number and the corresponding message text to the HMI devices.
In addition, each panel block of the IL S7 has a WORD input as an alarm interface with which
bit messaging is implemented.

Basics
2SHUDWRU6WDWLRQ
$6
7HFKQRORJLFDO 3DQHOEORFN
EORFN
$ODUPB'46
2SHUDWRU3DQHO
In the message view of the operator panel, the message classes "S7 messages", "S7 controller
control system messages" and "S7 warning" are displayed. Note that messages of the
message class "S7 Process message" or "S7 Tolerance" are not displayed by the system
broken down by instances in the message view of the operator panel. Messages of these
message classes must be displayed by a separate message view in the operator panel project.
A filter is required to display messages broken down by instance in the message view of the
operator panel. The message is given a unique value to assign the messages on the panel to
an instance by means of filtering. This value consists of the instance DB number of the panel
function block and the value configured at the "AS_Nr" input of the panel block.

Basics
The filter value is written to the "Op_MsgFilter" I/O and transferred to the panel with the
message as message auxiliary value when the ALARM_DQ is generated. The message texts
are then filtered in the message view of the faceplate according to the value at the
"Op_MsgFilter" I/O of the associated panel block.
This means a value that is unique throughout the project must be configured at the input
"AS_Nr" for each AS in the project. Values between 1 and 999 are permitted at the "AS_Nr"
input.
2.5.3 Overview of the IL S7 Comfort types

The Industry Library for WinCC Comfort provides you with a collection of pre-configured
faceplates. The block icons and faceplates are preconfigured with the necessary variables and
functions. When items are inserted into the screen, the variables and connections are
generated in addition to the graphic objects. All you have to do is adapt them according to the
project-specific conditions. Please note: It is necessary to have a separate variable container
for every faceplate and every block icon.
You can display the process values of several technological blocks of the same type in one
display window. To define which process values are to be displayed on the faceplate, click the
relevant block icon.
Type IL S7 IL PCS 7 Comment

CalcWatP S7PCalcWatP PCalcWatP Faceplate for panel communication block for cal‐
culating the thermal power and emitted energy
HxFct S7PHxFct PHxFct Faceplate for panel communication block for cal‐
culating enthalpy, absolute humidity, and satura‐
ted humidity according to Mollier
MonAnL S7PMonAnL PMonAnL Faceplate for panel communication block for meas‐
ured value monitoring
Mo‐ - PMonAnL Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
nAnL_APMK sage classes" function for panel communication
block for measured value monitoring
MonAnGrad S7PMonAn‐ - Faceplate for panel communication block for meas‐
Grad ured value monitoring with gradients
MonAn08 S7PMonAn08 PMonAn08 Faceplate for panel communication block for meas‐
ured value monitoring with 8 limits
MoAn08_APM - PMonAn08 Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
K sage classes" function for panel communication
block for measured value monitoring with 8 limits
MonAnDi S7PMonAnDi PMonAnDi Faceplate for panel communication block for meas‐
ured value monitoring with 4 analog and binary
limits
MonAn‐ - PMonAnDi Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
Di_APMK sage classes" function for panel communication
block for measured value monitoring with 4 analog
and binary limits
MonDiL S7PMonDiL PMonDiL Faceplate for panel communication block for mon‐
itoring a digital process tag

Basics
Type IL S7 IL PCS 7 Comment

Mon‐ - PMonDiL Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
DiL_APMK sage classes" function for panel communication
block for monitoring a binary process tag
MonDi08 S7PMonDi08 PMonDi08 Faceplate for panel communication block for meas‐
ured value monitoring of 8 binary process tags
Mon‐ - PMonDi08 Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
Di08_APMK sage classes" function for panel communication
block for measured value monitoring of 8 binary
process tags
Mot S7PMot PMot Faceplate for panel communication block
for a single-stage motor
MotRevL S7PMotRevL PMotRevL Faceplate for panel communication block
for a motor with 2 directions of rotation
MotSpdL S7PMotSpdL PMotSpdL Faceplate for panel communication block for a two-
stage motor
MotSpdCL S7PMotSpdCL PMotSpdCL Faceplate for panel communication block for a fre‐
quency-controlled motor
MotSpdCL_AP - PMotSpdCL Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
MK sage classes" function for panel communication
block for a frequency-controlled motor
MV3P S7PMV3P - Faceplate for panel communication block for 3-
point final controlling element
OpA S7POpA POpA Faceplate for panel communication block of an an‐
alog measured value
OpD S7POpD POpD Faceplate for panel communication block
of a binary measured value
PID S7PPID PPID Faceplate for panel communication block for con‐
troller
PID_APMK - PPID Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
sage classes" function for panel communication
block for a controller
UsrM S7PUsrM PUsrM Faceplate for panel communication block for a
user administration block
VlvL S7PVlvL PVlvL Faceplate for panel communication block for a
valve
VlvMotL S7PVlvMotL PVlvMotL Faceplate for panel communication block for a mo‐
tor valve
VlvPosL - PVlvPosL Faceplate for panel communication block for a
valve positioner
VlvPosL_APM - PVlvPosL Faceplate with activated "User-configurable mes‐
K sage classes" function for panel communication
block for a valve positioner

Basics
2.5.4 Operator control and monitoring in WinCC Comfort
2.5.4.1 General view of the panel blocks
Panel block views

The blocks provide the following views:
● Standard view
● Message view (some blocks)
● Associated value view
Non-specific block views

These views are identical for all blocks which offer the respective view.
Associated value view
Note
You can enable the associated value view using the EN_AUX input of the panel block. If
EN_AUX = 0, the view cannot be opened.

Basics
Message view
Note
Colors for message classes in the message window
The representation of the messages in the message window is made centrally in the TIA Portal
in the message settings of the message classes of the Panel.
So that the message texts can be configured in a readable color based on the message color,
each faceplate has the Message -> Alarm_TextColor attribute. Project-specific templates with
an appropriate message text color can thus be created.
The color is set to gray by default so that the text is readable for warnings, which are usually
yellow in PCS 7, as well as for black faults.
NOTICE
Associated values in the message texts of the panel blocks
The accompanying values at the end of the message texts (for example: (PUsrM: #@3X
%3u@)) must not be deleted or changed. These are required to correctly display the
messages in the message view on the panel. If these texts are adapted, this can cause
messages not to be displayed in the message view on the panel.

Basics
2.5.4.2 Configuration of the panel interface
Configuring the panel interface

The panel interface is configured in WinCC Comfort. A description of the procedure and an
application example is available on the Online Support pages in entry "Integration of Comfort
Panels, Operator Panels and S7-300 Package Units in SIMATIC PCS 7 with PCS 7 Industry
Library"
Access options
You can access the documentation as follows:
● On the Internet
– http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50708061 (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50708061)

Basics

Operator control blocks 3
3.1 S7Aggr08 - Switchover for up to 8 units
3.1.1 Function
Object name (type + number) and family

Type + number: FB 277
Family: Operate
Number of process objects: 1 PO
Area of application for S7Aggr08

The block is used to switch over up to 8 units based on the criterion of runtime or master device.
The block switches a certain number of units (which can be specified) on/off and tries to keep
the desired number constant. If a unit is switched on or off manually, this is also taken into
consideration. When switchover dependent on operating hours is not activated, the master
unit is switched through to maintain a uniform load on the individual units. These specifications
can be implemented in automatic or manual mode. When switchover dependent on operating
hours is activated and a change in the requirements occurs or the unit states change, the units
with the fewest operating hours are switched on and the units with the most operating hours
are switched off.
3.1.2 Calling OBs

This is the cyclic interrupt OB in which you install the block (e.g. OB32). Additionally in OB100
(see Startup characteristics (Page 53)).
3.1.3 Setting the operating mode

The block supports manual (block switched on/off via OS) and automatic (block switched on/
off by the AS program) modes.
If the block is switched "OFF", all controls at the start outputs QSRT_A1 – QSRT_A8 are
removed.

Operator control blocks
3.1.4 Number of units

The "External" and "Internal" modes are available for setpoint specification for the number of
units. This setting is made by the AS program (N_LIOP_SEL = 1) or via the OS (N_LIOP_SEL
= 0).
In "External" mode, the number of units is specified using the interconnectable UNIT_REQ_AS
input. In "Internal" mode, it is specified using the UNIT_REQ_OP parameter (input via OS).
Only available units can be switched. The information on availability and the status of a unit is
supplied by the status byte. Only available units which are set to the OFF status can be
switched on. Only available units which are set to the ON status can be switched off. When a
unit is not available but is switched on, it is included in the required number and the start output
(QSRT_Ax) is adjusted accordingly.
If the required number of units cannot be started, the missing number is output at the QMISS
output parameter for further interconnection or evaluation. In addition, the QNOTACH error bit
is output in this case.
3.1.5 Master unit (OP_TIME_S parameter = 0)

The following modes are available within the context of setpoint specification for the master
unit: "External", "Internal", and "Time". This setting is made by the AS program (S_LIOP_SEL
= 1) or via the OS (S_LIOP_SEL = 0).
In "Internal" mode, the master unit is specified using the UNIT_MAS_OP in-out parameter
(input via OS).
In "External" mode, the master unit is determined in the block. When the block is started for
the first time, the first unit is the master unit. The master can be switched using the EXT_SW
input. (Since an edge evaluation of the EXT_SW input takes place in the block, the operator
has to ensure that the input is reset.)
In "Time" mode, the master unit is likewise determined in the block. The switchover is
performed automatically after a specified time (CHG_TIME). This time carries on running, even
if the block is in the "External" or "Internal" mode.
Under normal circumstances, the next unit is used as the master unit during continued
switching in the "External" and "Time" modes. However, when input COM_EN = 1, the unit
which was switched on first is used as the master. If no units are On, continued switching takes
place as normal.
3.1.6 Maximum units to be switched

The block can switch a maximum of 8 units. If a number greater than 8 is entered at input
parameter MAX_AGGR, this is limited to 8.

3.1.7 Activation/deactivation depending on operating hours / priorities (OP_TIME_S =

1 parameter)
Activation/deactivation depending on operating time

The user can configure activation/deactivation depending on operating hours using the
parameters OP_TIME_S and PREF_UNIT. If OP_TIME_S = 1 and PREF_UNIT = 1, the device
with the lowest number of operating hours is used when a unit is switched on. But when a unit
is switched off, the unit with the highest number of operating hours is used. Only the number
of required units can be set manually. The value 0 is always output as leading unit (master
unit) at the block. The display of the master unit is hidden in the faceplate. Step enabling only
takes place if the required number of units changes or if the status of a unit has changed. The
current operating hours of the units are configured at inputs H_RUN_1 to H_RUN_8. Because
there is no automatic step enabling, the value 0 is also output at the block as the remaining
time until the next switchover. The value disappears in the faceplate.
With this operating setting, all other functions and operator control and monitoring activities
remain exactly the same as described.
Activation/deactivation depending on priorities

The deactivation/activation depending on priorities can be activated during configuration by
the user with the parameters OP_TIME_S and PREF_UNIT. If the parameter OP_TIME_S =
1 and PREF_UNIT = 2, the unit with the lowest priority (smallest PRIO_XX value) is switched
in case of activation, and the unit with the lowest priority (largest PRIO_XX value) is switched
in case of deactivation. Only the number of required units can be set manually. The value 0 is
always output as leading unit (master unit) at the block. The display of the master unit is hidden
in the faceplate. Step enabling only takes place if the required number of units changes or if
the status of a unit has changed. The priority of the units is configured at the inputs PRIO_01
to PRIO_08. Priorities can be assigned from 1 to 99, with 1 being the highest and 99 being the
lowest priority. The parameter view displays an additional column with the configured priorities
in the Activation/deactivation depending on priorities mode. Because there is no automatic
step enabling, the value 0 is also output at the block as the remaining time until the next
switchover. The value is hidden on the faceplate.
With this operating setting, all other functions and operator control/monitoring activities remain
exactly the same as described.
3.1.8 Unit switch-on and switch-off delay

A delay can be configured for unit switch-on/switch-off when requirements change. The
DELAY_ON in-out parameter is used for switching on and the DELAY_OFF in-out parameter
is used for switching off. These delay times are only active subject to enabling via the
DELAY_EN parameter. Once this has been done, the delay times can be set via the OS using
the Parameter view.

3.1.9 Error handling

During its execution, the block monitors the correctness of the interconnected and configured
inputs, and the inputs received via faceplate.
Configuration error QPARAMF

Error bit when parameters in the block are not in the valid range.
Valid ranges:
● 0 < CHG_TIME <= 576 hours
● 0 < MAX_AGGR <= 8
Value for erroneous entry:
● MAX_AGGR > 8 ⇒ MAX_AGGR := 8
● MAX_AGGR <= 0 ⇒ MAX_AGGR := 0
● CHG_TIME > 576 ⇒ CHG_TIME:= 576h (24 days)
● CHG_TIME <= 0 ⇒ CHG_TIME:= 168h (7 days)
Operator error QOP_ERR

Error bit when the operator entered an invalid value in the faceplate.
Valid ranges:
● 0 <= UNIT_REQ_OP <= MAX_AGGR
● 0 < UNIT_MAS_OP <= MAX_AGGR
● UNIT_REQ_OP ⇒ Previous number is retained.
● UNIT_MAS_OP ⇒ Previous unit is retained.
Interconnection error QAS_ERR

Error bit when the interconnected UNIT_REQ_AS input is not in the valid range.
Valid range:
● 0 <= UNIT_REQ_AS <= MAX_AGGR
● UNIT_REQ_AS ⇒ Previous number is retained.
3.1.10 Cascading
QNOTACH info message:

Output bit when the required number of units could not be switched on. In addition, the missing
number is output at the QMISS output.
3.1.11 Message behavior

The "Automatic change not possible" message is generated when the time for the time-
triggered switch has elapsed, but the block is in "Internal" or "External" mode.
The message can be generated, but is not active by default.
Assignment of message text and message class to the block parameters
Message Block parame‐ Default message text Message class

number ter
1 OP_TIME_S = Time-triggered switch not possible <deactivated>
0
QTIME_S = 0
The messages can be locked centrally with MSG_LOCK (OS operation) or L_MSGLCK
(program).
3.1.12 Startup characteristics

Initialization of the block with the status data stored before the CPU entered the stop state.
3.1.13 Time behavior

The block processing delay is implemented via the RUNUPCY parameter (number of times
the block is executed).
The actual cyclic processing does not take place until all units to be switched have concluded
their startups (STAT_1 – STAT_8, Bit 4 = 1).
The block must be called using a cyclic interrupt OB. The sampling time of the block is set in
the SAMPLE_T parameter.
3.1.14 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC20 BLKMOV
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC

3.1.15 Block parameters
Block I/Os
Parameter Type IN/OUT OCM Description

EN BOOL IN 0
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles
RESTART BOOL IN 0 Manual startup
MAX_AGGR INT IN 1 Max. number of units [0...8]
UNIT_REQ_AS INT IN 0 Number of units required by AS
STAT_1 BYTE IN 0 Status byte unit 1
H_RUN_1 REAL IN 1 Operating time in [s] unit 1
PRIO_01 INT IN 0 Priority (1 – 99) unit 1
ON_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch 'on'
OFFOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch 'off'
MANOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter MANUAL
AUTOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter AUTO
MOD_LIOP_SEL BOOL IN 0 Select mode: 1=Linking , 0=Operation
AUT_L BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for MANUAL/AUTO mode
AUTO_ON BOOL IN 0 Automatic mode: 1=On, 0=Off


OP_TIME_S BOOL IN 0 0=Master unit switches mode active / 1=Operating
time switches mode active
PREF_UNIT INT IN 0 1 =Operating time / 2 =Priority switchover enabled
INTOP_EN_N BOOL IN 1 Enable: 1=Operator can enter number of units IN‐
TERNALLY
EXTOP_EN_N BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter number of units EX‐
TERNALLY
OP_EN_N BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter number of units
N_LIOP_SEL BOOL IN 0 Select number of units mode: 1=Linking , 0=Opera‐
tion
INTOP_EN_S BOOL IN 1 Enable: 1=Operator can enter switchover INTER‐
NALLY
EXTOP_EN_S BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter switchover EXTER‐
NALLY
TIMEOP_EN_S BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter switchover TIME
OP_EN_S BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter master unit
S_LIOP_SEL BOOL IN 0 Select switchover units mode: 1=Linking , 0=Oper‐
ation
EXT_L_N BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable Input for INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
mode number of units
INT_L_S BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for INTERNAL mode switch‐
over
EXT_L_S BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for EXTERNAL mode switch‐
over
TIME_L_S BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for TIME mode switchover
EXT_SW BOOL IN 0 1=External sequential switchover
CHG_TIME_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter change time
SAMPLE_T REAL IN 0 Sampling time in [s]
DELAY_ON REAL IN 0 ON delay in [s]
DELAY_OFF REAL IN 0 OFF delay in [s]
DELAY_EN BOOL IN 0 1=ON/OFF delay enabled
DELAY_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can enter delay time
COM_EN BOOL IN 0 1=Commutate enabled (1st unit as master)
MSG_EVID DWORD IN 0 Message ID
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN 1 1=Lock messages
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 1 Lock messages via interconnection
AUX REAL IN 1 Associated value
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 1=Batch enable
OCCUPIED BOOL IN 1 1 = In use by a batch
BA_ID DWORD IN 1 Batch ID
BA_NA STRING[32] IN 1 Batch name
STEP_NO DWORD IN 1 Batch step number
CMP_ID DWORD IN 0 Area code
PERMIS INT IN 1 Switching authority


AUT_ON_OP BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input operating mode: 1=AUTO, 0=MAN‐
UAL
MAN_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start motor
EXT_ON_OP_N BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input mode 1=EXTERNAL, 0=INTERNAL
number of units
INT_ON_OP_S BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input mode 1=INTERNAL switchover
EXT_ON_OP_S BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input mode 1=EXTERNAL switchover
TIME_ON_OP_S BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input mode 1=TIME switchover
UNIT_REQ_OP INT IN_OUT 1 Number of units required by OP
UNIT_MAS_OP INT IN_OUT 1 Master unit from OP
CHG_TIME INT IN_OUT 1 Time remaining until switchover of master unit in [h]
MASTER_OLD INT IN_OUT 0 Master unit restored from OP
REQ_OLD INT IN_OUT 0 Number of units restored from OP
QSRT_A1_OLD BOOL IN_OUT 0 1=Start unit 1 restored
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QON BOOL OUT 1 Control output 1=Block ON
QON_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for ON
QOFF_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for OFF
QMAN_AUT BOOL OUT 1 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL
QMANOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for MANUAL
QAUTOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for AUTO
QOP_TIME_S BOOL OUT 1 0 = Master unit switch mode active / 1 = Time-trig‐
gered switch mode active
QINT_EXT_N BOOL OUT 1 1=EXTERNAL, 0=INTERNAL number of units
QINT_S BOOL OUT 1 1=INTERNAL mode switchover
QEXT_S BOOL OUT 1 1=EXTERNAL mode switchover
QTIME_S BOOL OUT 1 1=TIME modes switchover
QINTOP_N BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for INTERNAL number
of units
QEXTOP_N BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for EXTERNAL number
of units
QOP_N BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for enter number of
units
QINTOP_S BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for INTERNAL switch‐
over


QEXTOP_S BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for EXTERNAL switch‐
over
QTIMEOP_S BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for TIME switchover
QOP_S BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1= Operator enabled for enter master unit
QCHG_TIME_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for enter change time
QDELAY_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1= Operator enabled for enter delay time
QOP_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Operator error
QAS_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Interconnection error
QPARAMF BOOL OUT 1 1=Parameter assignment error
QNOTACH BOOL OUT 0 1=Number of units not achieved
QSRT_A1 BOOL OUT 1 1=Start unit 1
QUNIT_ON BYTE OUT 1 Number of units switched on
QUNIT_AV BYTE OUT 1 Number of units available
QUNIT_REQ INT OUT 1 Number of units required
QCMP_RUN INT OUT 1 Compared number of units required/on
QAUTCT INT OUT 1 Number of units switched on and number of units
available
QUNIT_MAS INT OUT 1 Master unit
QMISS INT OUT 1 Units missing
QRESERVE INT OUT 1 Reserved units
QCHG_TIME TIME OUT 1 Time remaining until master unit switchover
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 1=Message suppression active
QMSG_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Message error
MSG_STAT WORD OUT 0 Message: STATUS output
MSG_ACK BOOL OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE output
Status word assignment for STAT_x parameter
Status bit Parameter

Bit 0 Available
Bit 1 -
Bit 2 Unit off
Bit 3 Unit on
Bit 4 Startup done
Bit 5 – Bit 7 -

3.1.16 Operator control and monitoring
3.1.16.1 S7Aggr08 views

The block provides the following views:
● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
3.1.16.2 S7Aggr08 standard view
2
9
8 3
6
5
(1) Mode
Display and switchover of the operating mode This area provides information on the currently
valid operating mode. The following operating modes can be shown here:
● On
● Out of service
(2) Command
(3) Number of units
● Setpoint
● Quantity
(4) Master unit
● Setpoint
● Interval no.
(6) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● Master unit
● LocalOS
(8)
● Units indicator:
– Green: Unit running + is available
– Dark green: Unit running + is not available
– White: Unit not running + is available
– Gray: Unit not running + is not available
● Time remaining until switchover of the master unit in the format dd hh:mm
– Gray characters: Time is running, but is not active (QTIME_S = 0)
– Black characters: Time is running + is active (QTIME_S = 1)
(9) Unit icon with number of active units:
● Green: Number of running units > 0
● Gray: Number of running units = 0
3.1.16.3 S7Aggr08 parameter view

(1) Switchover
● Time remaining
(2)
● Req. units
● Missing units
● Max. units
● Master units
(3)
● Units 1 to 8
● available 1 to 8
● On 1 to 8
● Runtime 1 to 8
3.1.16.4 S7Aggr08 block icon

3.2 S7UsrM - Selection of operating level from 8 levels
3.2.1 Function

Family: Operate
Area of application for S7UsrM

The S7UsrM block manages the operator control permission for a unit.
The block uses a "switch" to select one of 8 operating levels, sets this level at the output
[QPERMIS] and activates the output [QOPACT_n(QPERMIS)]. If no operating levels are
available, the output [QNOOP] is set and the output [QPERMIS] becomes inactive.
The values are selected either with an operator-control switch [KEYSWITCH] which switches
the operating level to the level defined with [KS_DEVICE] or with the [OP_S_DEV] which can
be controlled from the operator station. The keyswitch [KEYSWITCH] has a higher priority than
the input [OP_S_DEV].
If a selected operating level fails, the block will switch to the next available backup level
[BCKUPn_PL]. If both backup levels are unavailable, the first available operating level is
selected.
3.2.2 Calling OBs

S7UsrM error handling

The following error messages can be generated at this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers

The QRET_VAL I/O can be used to output various error numbers:
Error number Meaning of the error number

0 There is no error.
2 Parameter assignment error - BCKUP1_PL > MAXLEVEL or BCKUP1_PL < 1
3 Parameter assignment error - BCKUP2_PL > MAXLEVEL or BCKUP2_PL < 1
4 Parameter assignment error – MAXLEVEL < 1 or MAXLEVEL > 8
5 Parameter assignment error - KS_DEVICE > MAXLEVEL or KS_DEVICE < 1

The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RUNUPCYC.
3.2.5 Assignment of message text and message class to the block parameters

number ter
1 KEYSWITCH Keyswitch activated Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
2 QERR Parameter assignment error AS control system message -
fault
3 Operating level changed Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
4 Backup level 1 selected Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
5 Backup level 2 selected Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
6 Next available level selected Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
7 QNOOP No operating level available Process message – with ac‐
knowledgment
3.2.6 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
FC67 S7ASTIMEBCD


EN BOOL IN 0
OPDEAV_1 BOOL IN 1 Operating level 01 available
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 0 1=Interconnectable message suppression
KEYSWITCH BOOL IN 1 1=Enable keyswitch
KS_DEVICE INT IN 0 Operating level for keyswitch
BCKUP1_PL INT IN 0 1..8 first backup level
BCKUP2_PL INT IN 0 1..8 second backup level
MAXLEVEL INT IN 1 Highest number of operating levels
USTATUS BYTE IN 0 User status bits
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message suppres‐
sion
MSG_EVID1 DWORD IN 0 Message ID 1
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 Batch enable
OCCUPIED BOOL IN 1 Occupied by batch
BA_ID DWORD IN 1 Current batch ID (number)
OP_S_DEV INT IN_OUT 1 Associated value
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN_OUT 1 1=Message suppression
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Error
QNOOP BOOL OUT 0 No operating level available
QOS_STAT DWORD OUT 1 Status for WinCC


QOPACT_1 BOOL OUT 0 1=Activated as operating level
QPERMIS INT OUT 1
QRET_VAL INT OUT 0 Error code
QMSG_ERR BOOL OUT 0 Message error
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 Message suppression
MSG_STAT1 WORD OUT 0 Message: STATUS output 1
MSG_ACK1 BOOL OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE output 1
Status word allocation for the parameter QOS_STAT
Status bit Parameters

Bit 0 - 6 -
Bit 8 Keyswitch activated
Bit 9 Parameter assignment error
Bit 10 Operating level changed
Bit 11 Backup level 1 selected
Bit 12 Backup level 2 selected
Bit 13 Next available level selected
Bit 14 No operating level available
Bit 15 - 23 -
Bit 24 – 31 USTATUS

3.2.8.1 S7UsrM views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Batch view
3.2.8.2 S7UsrM standard view
6 5
(1) LocalOS
(2) ControlCenterOS
(3) Operator panels
● Operator panels 1 to 2
(4) Operation level
● Operation levels 5 to 8
This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block.
The currently selected operating level is defined for the entire project with an enumeration
type. The operating level determines which HMI devices can be used to control the unit. Levels
that are not available are grayed-out.

3.2.8.3 S7UsrM block icons

3.3 S7OpA - Operator control of an analog measured value
3.3.1 Function

Family: Operate
Area of application for S7OpA

The S7OpA block is used for operator control of an analog value of a block. Operator control
outside the operating limits is limited to the relevant violated limit value. Instead of the value
(U) set by the operator, an interconnected or configured value (LINK_U) can be checked
(LINK_ON=1). The functionality is taken from the technological S7 standard block OP_A_LIM
and expanded with the addition of the functionality of an operator panel and switch permission.
More detailed information about the function of the OP_A_LIM block can be found in the
function description of the OP_A_LIM.
3.3.2 Calling OBs

3.3.3 Time behavior


During startup, the counter states are saved via internal variables. Startup can be simulated
manually using the RESTART input.
3.3.5 Operator panel

So that various technological functions of the library can also be controlled and monitored from
an operator panel, the "S7POpA" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.

3.3.6 Switch permission

It is possible to control the technological block from different operating levels. If the input
[OP_ACTIVE] is set, the operator setpoint is specified via the input [OP_U]. If the local WinCC
variable "@Permission" matches the value set for the operating level at block parameter
[PERMIS], the operator station is given switch permission.
The different operating levels are indicated by a project-specific enumeration type.
For this purpose, enumerations with the corresponding switch permissions have to be added
to the “Global Declarations” folder in the SIMATIC Manager. The value range of the elements
of the enumeration can be defined from 0 (no operating level available) up to 8. Higher values
are not evaluated.
This type must be assigned to the "S7UsrM" blocks of the units and all [PERMIS] inputs of the
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7POpA".
Example
Select the units in the "process object view", filter by "I/O name" "*PERMIS" and assign the
corresponding type to all "enumerations".
3.3.7 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
FB46 OP_A_LIM
UDT76 UDT_S7POpA

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Operator enable
BTRACK BOOL IN 1 Bumpless switchover 1=On, 0=Off
LINK_ON BOOL IN 1 Selection: 1=Linking , 0=Operation
OP_ACTIVE BOOL IN 0 Operator panel control enabled
OP_U REAL IN 0 Operator panel input
LINK_U REAL IN 0 Interconnectable input: U
U_HL REAL IN 1 High limit U
U_LL REAL IN 1 Low limit U
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message suppression


U REAL IN_OUT 1 Operator input
ENO BOOL OUT 0
V REAL OUT 1 Output value
QOP_LIM BOOL OUT 0 1=Operator input has been limited
QOP_EN BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator can input
QVHL BOOL OUT 0 1=High limit of V active
QVLL BOOL OUT 0 1=Low limit of V active
QOP_STAT STRUCT OUT 0 Unit status for OP_A for panel
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7POpA
QOP_STAT.QOP_Link BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=LINK is active <=> "Automatic"
QOP_STAT.QOP_EN BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator may input
QOP_STAT.QOP_U REAL OUT 0 Operator Panel operator input
QOP_STAT.QOP_VHL REAL OUT 0 Operator panel high limit U
QOP_STAT.QOP_VLL REAL OUT 0 Operator panel low limit U
3.3.9.1 S7OpA views

● Standard view
● Batch view
3.3.9.2 S7OpA standard view
5 4
(1) Manual value in percent

(2) LINK_ON
● On
● Off
(3) Output value
(4) Bumpless enabled
● LocalOS
3.3.9.3 S7OpA block icons

3.4 S7OpD - Operator control of a binary measured value
3.4.1 Function

Family: Operate
Area of application for S7OpD

The S7OpD block is used for operator control of a digital value.
3.4.2 OBs to be called

3.4.3 Time behavior

3.4.4 Operating modes

There are two operator control modes: level and pulse manipulation. The appropriate mode
for level/pulse manipulation is set with the MODE parameter.
If LINK_ON = 0, then in level mode, the input I0 input is switched to the output Q0.
In pulse manipulation mode, the input I0 is applied to the output Q0 for the time PULSTIME.
Once this time has elapsed, I0 is reset.
The LINK_ON input is used to select whether the input I0 (LINK_ON = 0), which can be
controlled by the operator, or the interconnectable input LINK_I (LINK_ON = 1) is used.

an operator panel, the "S7POpD" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.


It is possible to control the technological block from different operating levels. If the input
[OP_ACTIVE] is set, manual control is via the input [OP_IO].
If the local WinCC variable "@Permission" matches the value set for the operating level at
block parameter [PERMIS], the operator station is given switch permission.
are not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7POpD".
Example:
Select the units in the "process object view", filter by "I/O name" "*PERMIS" and assign the

During startup, all internal parameters are reset.
3.4.8 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT75 UDT_S7POpD

EN BOOL IN 0
LINK_I BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input I
LINK_ON BOOL IN 0 Selection: 1=Linking , 0=Operation
OP_EN0 BOOL IN 0 1=Operator control enable for entering '0'
OP_EN1 BOOL IN 0 1=Operator control enable for entering '1'
MODE BOOL IN 0 Mode=0 pulse manipulation, Mode=1 level manip‐
ulation
OP_I0 BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input


TIME_PULS REAL IN 1 Pulse time
sion
I0 BOOL IN_OUT 1 Manipulated variable
ENO BOOL OUT 0
Q0 BOOL OUT 1 Output value
MODE_P BOOL OUT 1 Active: Level commands selected
MODE_I BOOL OUT 1 Active: Pulse commands selected
Q_OP_EN0 BOOL OUT 1 1=Operator control enable for entering '0'
Q_OP_EN1 BOOL OUT 1 1=Operator control enable for entering '1'
QOP_STAT STRUCT OUT 0 Unit status for OP_D for panel
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7POpD
QOP_STAT.QOP_Q BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
QOP_STAT.QOP_EN0 BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel can set 0
QOP_STAT.QOP_EN1 BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel can set 1
QOP_STAT.QOP_LINK BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=LINK is active <=> "Automatic"
3.4.10.1 S7OpD views

● Standard view
● Batch view
3.4.10.2 S7OpD standard view

Depending on which mode is set (pulse or level manipulation), two different faceplate views
appear.

Standard view for level manipulation
4 1
(1) Command
● On
● Off
● Off
● LocalOS
(4) Status display
Standard view for pulse manipulation
5 1
2
4
(1) On
(2) Pulse time in seconds
● Off
● LocalOS
(5) Status display

3.4.10.3 S7OpD block icons

There is no specific OS Typical for this block. Values are displayed via a command button, for
example.


HVAC blocks 4
4.1 S7CalcWatP - Calculation of thermal power and emitted energy
4.1.1 Function

Family: HVAC
Area of application for S7CalcWatP

The S7CalcWatP block uses the volume flow rate and the water supply and return
temperatures to determine the current emitted thermal power and the total emitted thermal
energy of the water.
The block requires the following input parameters:
● Instantaneous volume flow rate V_FL_RT [m³/h]
● Supply and return temperatures T_FORERN, T_RETURN in [°C]
● Information about whether volume is measured in supply (V_MEAS_F = TRUE) or return
(V_MEAS_F = FALSE).
The F_POWER and F_ENERGY inputs can be used to change the unit of the MIN_POW,
QTH_POW or QTH_ENGY and STH_ENGY parameters. By default, the power is indicated in
kW and the energy in kWh (F_POWER = 1, F_ENERGY = 1). For example: If F_POWER has
the value 1000, the unit for the power is F_POWER * kW = 1000 * kW = MW. If a factor has
the value 0, the value 1 is set in the program.
A thermal coefficient k [kWh/(m³/h/°C)] is determined from a table entered in the block based
on the supply and return temperatures. The table provides the thermal coefficients for supply
and return temperatures ranging from 10°C to 140°C in increments of 10°C. The block
calculates intermediate values by performing linear interpolation. Values outside this range
are calculated by means of linear extrapolation.
The current thermal power is provided at the QTH_POW output in the unit [F_POWER * kW].
The total emitted thermal energy is provided at the QTH_ENGY output in the unit [F_ENERGY
* kWh]. If the amount of thermal power is below the value of MIN_POW, a thermal power of
zero is used. The current thermal power is always output as a positive value. For heating
(supply temperature >= return temperature), the output is set to QHEATING = TRUE; for
cooling, it is set to FALSE.

HVAC blocks
A positive edge at the RESET or L_RESET input resets the value of QTH_ENGY to zero. On
restarting the CPU (in OB100), the value of STH_ENGY (Start Thermal Energy) is used as the
initial value to calculate the thermal energy QTH_ENGY.
Calculation of the thermal power
QTH_POW := ABS(V_FL_RT * KT * (T_FORERN – T_RETURN)).
Calculation of the emitted thermal energy (iteratively at the i-th block call after RESET or restart
of the CPU):
QTH_ENGY[i] := QTH_ENGY[i-1] + QTH_POW * (SAMPLE_T/3600.0).

This is the cyclic interrupt OB in which you install the block (OB32). Additionally in OB100 (see
Startup characteristics (Page 79)).
4.1.3 Time behavior


an operator panel, the "S7PCalcWatP" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.
A global data block containing the data structure (UDT) required for the technology function
used is needed for this operator panel block.
Example
"UDT_S7PCalcWatP" is needed in the data block for an instance of "S7CalcWatP" and
"S7PCalcWatP". This data block is the interface between the S7 and the operator panel.

If one of the inputs for measuring the volume flow or the supply or return temperature is faulty,
the corresponding input V_FL_CSF, T_F_CSF, or T_R_CSF must be reset or interconnected.
If one of the inputs is set, the last valid value is accepted and displayed at the QERR and
QCSF outputs.
If the input parameter LAST_ON = True, the last valid value is transmitted for calculation
(depending on the corresponding inputs V_FL_CSF, T_F_CSF and T_R_CSF).
For the input parameters LAST_ON = False and SUBS_ON = True, the corresponding
substitute values SUBS_V_F. SUBS_T_F, or SUBS_T_R are forwarded for calculation
depending on the associated inputs V_FL_CSF, T_F_CSF, or T_R_CSF.

HVAC blocks

The S7CalcWatP block uses the ALARM_DQ block for generating messages.
Message triggers are:
● The CSF signals of the measured values (QCSF)

number ter
1 V_FL_CSF External error volume flow rate S
2 T_F_CSF External error supply temperature S
3 T_R_CSF External error return temperature S
(program).
QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not finished running since the restart,
MSG_LOCK or L_MSGLCK = TRUE.

The RUNUPCYC parameter can be used to specify for how long (number of cycles) the
messages are to be suppressed.
4.1.8 Called blocks
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDTxx UDT_S7PCalcWatP

EN BOOL IN 0
ENABLE BOOL IN 0 Block enable
L_RESET BOOL IN 0 Central error reset
STH_ENGY REAL IN 1 Start value for calculating the thermal energy
T_FORERN REAL IN 0 Supply temperature in [°C]
T_RETURN REAL IN 0 Return temperature in [°C]

HVAC blocks

V_FL_RT REAL IN 0 Volume flow rate in [m³/h]
V_MEAS_F BOOL IN 1 Location of volume measurement (0=return, 1=supply)
V_FL_CSF BOOL IN 0 External error affecting volume flow rate measurement
T_F_CSF BOOL IN 0 External error affecting supply temperature
T_R_CSF BOOL IN 0 External error affecting return temperature
SUBS_ON BOOL IN 0 1=Enable use of substitute value
SUBS_V_F REAL IN 0 Substitute value for volume flow rate
SUBS_T_F REAL IN 0 Substitute value for supply temperature
SUBS_T_R REAL IN 0 Substitute value for return temperature
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 1 Central message suppression interconnectable
MSG_EVID_1 DWORD IN 0 ALARM_DQ Event ID
MSG_FILTER DINT IN 0 Message filter
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 BATCH enable
OCCUPIED BOOL IN 1 ID for occupied by BATCH
BA_ID DWORD IN 1 BATCH: Consecutive batch number
BA_NA STRING[3 IN 1 BATCH name
2]
STEP_NO DWORD IN 1 BATCH step number
CMP_ID DWORD IN 0 Area code, see ALARM_DQ doc.
MIN_POW REAL IN_OUT 1 Minimum power
F_POWER REAL IN_OUT 1 Factor for power unit
F_ENERGY REAL IN_OUT 1 Factor for energy unit
RESET BOOL IN_OUT 1 Controllable reset input for error
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN_OUT 1 Central message suppression, can be controlled
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QERR BOOL OUT 1 1=Group error
QTH_POW REAL OUT 1 Calculated thermal power in [factor * kW]
QTH_ENGY REAL OUT 1 Calculated thermal energy in [factor *kWh]
QHEATING BOOL OUT 1 0=cooling mode, 1=heating mode
QT_FORERN REAL OUT 1 Supply temperature in [°C]
QT_RETURN REAL OUT 1 Return temperature in [°C]
QV_FL_RT REAL OUT 1 Volume flow rate in [m³/h]
QCSF BOOL OUT 1 1=External error
QMSG_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Message error affecting ALARM_DQ
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 1=Message suppression
QLAST BOOL OUT 0 1=Enable last valid value active

HVAC blocks

QSUBS BOOL OUT 0 1=Enable use of substitute value active
MSG_STAT_1 WORD OUT 0 Message error information EVID_1
MSG_ACK_1 BOOL OUT 0 Message acknowledge EVID_1
QOP_STAT STRUCT OUT 0 Operator panel status
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PCalcWatP
QOP_STAT.QOP_T_FORER REAL OUT 0 Supply temperature status
N
QOP_STAT.QOP_T_RE‐ REAL OUT 0 Return temperature status
TURN
QOP_STAT.QOP_V_FL_RT REAL OUT 0 Volume flow rate status
QOP_STAT.QOP_QTH_PO REAL OUT 0 Thermal power status
W
QOP_STAT.QOP_QTH_EN‐ REAL OUT 0 Thermal energy status
GY
QOP_STAT.QOP_QHEAT‐ BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Heating, 0=Cooling
ING
QOP_STAT.QOP_QERR BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel error
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD OUT 0 Status panel messages
4.1.10.1 CalcWatP views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Trend view
● Parameter view
● Batch view

HVAC blocks
4.1.10.2 CalcWatP standard view
3
5
(1)
● Power
● Energy
(2) Start value energy
(3)
● Pre-run temp
● Return flow temp
● Flow
● Pre-run
● Heat
● LocalOS
4.1.10.3 CalcWatP parameter view

HVAC blocks
(1) Factor for unit

● Power
● Energy
(2) Power limit
● Minimum power
(3) Reset of energy
● Reset
4.1.10.4 CalcWatP block icons

HVAC blocks
4.2 S7ConvAbRe - Conversion of humidity from absolute to relative or relative to absolute
4.2 S7ConvAbRe - Conversion of humidity from absolute to relative or

relative to absolute
4.2.1 Function

Type + number: FC 256
Family: HVAC
Area of application for S7ConvAbRe

The S7ConvAbRe block converts absolute humidity to relative humidity, or vice versa.
The block requires the temperature in °C at the TEMP input and the atmospheric humidity in
g/kg or % at the HUMID input. The conversion direction can be set at the K input parameter
by selecting TRUE or FALSE.
The converted humidity is output in the relevant unit at the QHUMID output.

This is the cyclic interrupt OB in which you install the block (OB32).
4.2.3 Time behavior

This block has no time behavior.

There is no error handling for this block.
Parameter Type IN/ OCM Description

OUT
EN BOOL IN 0
K BOOL IN 0 1=Conversion 0=g/kg ->%, 1=%->g/kg
TEMP REAL IN 0 Temperature in [°C]

HVAC blocks
4.2 S7ConvAbRe - Conversion of humidity from absolute to relative or relative to absolute

OUT
HUMID REAL IN 0 Humidity in [g/kg or %]
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QHUMID REAL OUT 0 Result of selected conversion

HVAC blocks
4.3 S7ConvCF - Conversion of unit of temperature from °C to °F or from °F to °C
4.3 S7ConvCF - Conversion of unit of temperature from °C to °F or from

°F to °C
4.3.1 Function

Family: HVAC
Area of application for S7ConvCF

The S7OpD block is used for operator control of a digital value.

This is the cyclic interrupt OB in which you install the block (OB32).
4.3.3 Time behavior

This block has no time behavior.

There is no error handling for this block.

OUT
EN BOOL IN 0
K BOOL IN 0 1=Conversion 0=°C ->°F, 1=°F->°C
TEMP REAL IN 0 Temperature in [°C or °F]
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QTEMP REAL OUT 0 Result of selected conversion

HVAC blocks
4.4 S7HxFct - Calculation of enthalpy, absolute humidity, and saturated humidity according to Mollier
4.4 S7HxFct - Calculation of enthalpy, absolute humidity, and saturated

humidity according to Mollier
4.4.1 Function

Family: HVAC
Area of application for S7HxFct

The S7HxFct block uses the relative humidity and the temperature to determine the absolute
humidity, the enthalpy, and the saturated humidity.
As input parameters, the block requires the relative humidity H_REL [%] and the temperature
T_CENTC [°C].
The determined enthalpy is provided in the unit [kJ/kg] at the QENT output. The absolute
humidity is provided in the unit [g/kg] at the QH_ABS output. The saturated humidity is provided
in the unit [g/kg] at the QH_SAT output.
Wet bulb temperature

The block uses the relative humidity [%] and temperature [°C] to calculate the wet bulb
temperature in the physical unit [°C] or [°F]. The wet bulb temperature is provided at the
TempWeBu_Out output.
Figure 4-1 Formula_Wet_Bulb
= Wet bulb temperature (°C)

= Relative humidity (%)
= Air temperature (°C)


HVAC blocks
4.4.3 Time behavior


an operator panel, the "S7PHxFct" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.
A global data block is required for this operator panel block. The data block contains the data
structure (UDT) needed for the technology function used.
Example
"UDT_S7PHxFct" is needed in the data block for an instance of "S7HxFct" and "S7PHxFct".
This data block is the interface between the S7 and the operator panel.

If one of the inputs for the temperature or relative humidity is faulty, the T_CENTC_CSF or
H_REL_CSF input must be set or connected. If one of the inputs is set, the last valid value is
accepted and displayed at the QERR and QCSF outputs.
If the input parameter LAST_ON = True, the last valid value is transmitted for calculation
(depending on the corresponding inputs T_CENTC_CSF or H_REL_CSF).
For the input parameters LAST_ON = False and SUBS_ON = True, the corresponding
substitute values SUBS_T or SUBS_H are forwarded for calculation depending on the
associated inputs T_CENTC_CSF or H_REL_CSF.

The S7HxFct block uses the ALARM_DQ block for generating messages.
Messages are triggered by the CSF signals of the measured values (QCSF).

number ter
1 T_CENTC_CS External error temperature S
F
2 H_REL_CSF External error relative humidity S
(program).
QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not finished running since the restart or if

HVAC blocks

4.4.8 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDTxx UDT_S7PHxFct

EN BOOL IN 0
T_CENTC REAL IN 0 Temperature in [°C]
H_REL REAL IN 0 Relative humidity in [%]
T_CENTC_CSF BOOL IN 0 External error affecting temperature
H_REL_CSF BOOL IN 0 External error affecting relative humidity
SUBS_ON BOOL IN 0 1=Enable use of substitute value
SUBS_T REAL IN 0 Substitute value for temperature measurement
SUBS_H REAL IN 0 Substitute value for relative humidity
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 1 Central message suppression interconnectable
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 BATCH enable
OCCUPIED BOOL IN 1 ID for occupied by BATCH
BA_ID DWORD IN 1 BATCH: Consecutive batch number
BA_NA STRING[3 IN 1 BATCH name
2]
STEP_NO DWORD IN 1 BATCH step number
CMP_ID DWORD IN 0 Area code, see ALARM_DQ documentation

HVAC blocks

MSG_LOCK BOOL IN_OUT 1 Central message suppression, can be controlled
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QENT REAL OUT 1 Calculated enthalpy in [kJ/kg]
QH_ABS REAL OUT 1 Calculated absolute humidity in [g/kg]
QH_SAT REAL OUT 1 Calculated saturated humidity in [g/kg]
QT_CENTC REAL OUT 1 Temperature in [°C]
QH_REL REAL OUT 1 Relative humidity in [%]
QT_WEBU REAL OUT 0.0 Feuchtkugeltemperatur [°C]
QMSG_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Message error affecting ALARM_DQ
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 1=Message suppression
QLAST BOOL OUT 0 1=Enable last valid value active
QSUBS BOOL OUT 0 1=Enable use of substitute value active
QOP_STAT STRUCT OUT 0 Operator panel status
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PCalcWatP
QOP_STAT.QOP_T_CENTC REAL OUT 0 Status temperature
QOP_STAT.QOP_H_REL REAL OUT 0 Status relative humidity
QOP_STAT.QOP_QENT REAL OUT 0 Status enthalpy
QOP_STAT.QOP_QH_ABS REAL OUT 0 Status absolute humidity
QOP_STAT.QOP_QH_SAT REAL OUT 0 Status saturated humidity
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD OUT 0 Status panel messages
4.4.10.1 S7HxFct views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Trend view
● Batch view

HVAC blocks
4.4.10.2 S7HxFct standard view
4 3
(1)
● Enthalpy
● Absolute humidity
● Saturation humidity
● Wet bulb temperature
(2)
● Temperature
● Rel. humidity
(3) Message lock active
● LocalOS
4.4.10.3 S7HxFct block icons

HVAC blocks

Communication blocks 5
5.1 Application areas for the communication blocks
The Industry Library provides communication blocks for several application areas:
● Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-300
● Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-1500
● Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-300
● Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-1500
● Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-400 (single)
Note
The blocks for use in S7-300 and S7-1500 are identical in their function. The blocks are
supplied for CPU S7-300 for use in the SIMATIC Manager and for CPU S7-1500 for use in the
TIA Portal.
Note
Communication between redundant (S7-400H) and non-redundant (S7-300 / S7-1500 /
S7-400) stations
When communicating via the H blocks, the communication is only guaranteed for simple failure
(fault in Rack0 or Rack1) on the H system. If multiple failures occurs (fault in Rack0 and Rack1,
e.g. CPU in Rack0 is disturbed and CP in Rack1 is disrupted), communication is no longer
possible.
Used blocks
Application S7-400H S7-400 S7-300 S7-1500

- Snd_DigVal1 S7RcvDig2 S7RcvDig2
- Rcv_DigVal 1
S7SndDig 2
S7SndDig2
- Snd_AnaVal1 S7RcvAna2 S7RcvAna2
- Rcv_AnaVal 1
S7SndAna 2
S7SndAna2
Single communication

Application S7-400H S7-400 S7-300 S7-1500

RcvH_DigVal3 SndH_DigVal3 S7RcvHDig2 S7RcvHDig2
SndH_DigVal 3
RcvH_DigVal 3
S7SndHDig 2
S7SndHDig2
RcvH_AnaVal3 SndH_AnaVal3 S7RcvHAna2 S7RcvHAna2
SndH_AnaVal 3
RcvH_AnaVal 3
S7SndHAna 2
S7SndHAna2
ASSendH3 ASRcvH3 - -
ASRcvH3 ASSendH3 - -
H communication
1
Block is part of the APL
2
Block is part of the IL S7
3
Block is part of the IL PCS 7
Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-300

To realize coordinated communication between a non-redundant S7-400 and an S7-300, the
following blocks are used:
The blocks Snd_DigVal, Snd_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal and Rcv_AnaVal of the APL are used in the
S7-400.
The IL provides the following blocks for S7-300:
● S7SndDig: Change-triggered transmission of up to 128 analog structures.
● S7SndAna: Change-triggered transmission of up to 32 analog structures.
● S7RcvDig: Reception of up to 128 digital structures.
● S7RcvAna: Reception of up to 32 analog structures.
Both stations are configured in SIMATIC Manager and CFC.

Figure 5-1 Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-300
Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-1500

To realize coordinated communication between a non-redundant S7-400 and an S7-1500, the
The blocks Snd_DigVal, Snd_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal and Rcv_AnaVal of the APL are used in the
S7-400.
● S7SndDig: Change-triggered transmission of up to 128 analog structures.
● S7SndAna: Change-triggered transmission of up to 32 analog structures.
● S7RcvDig: Reception of up to 128 digital structures
● S7RcvAna: Reception of up to 32 analog structures.
S7-400 is configured in the SIMATIC Manager and CFC. S7-1500 is configured in the TIA
Portal. The blocks are optimized in the TIA Portal for the use of LAD, FBD or STL.

Figure 5-2 Communication between S7-400 (single) and S7-1500
Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-300

To realize coordinated communication between a redundant S7-400H and an S7-300, the
The IL provides the following blocks for S7-400H:
● SndH_DigVal: Change-triggered transmission of up to 128 analog structures.
● SndH_AnaVal: Change-triggered transmission of up to 32 analog structures.
● RcvH_DigVal: Reception of up to 128 digital structures
● RcvH_AnaVal: Reception of up to 32 analog structures.
● S7SndHDig: Change-triggered transmission of up to 128 analog structures.
● S7SndHAna: Change-triggered transmission of up to 32 analog structures.
● S7RcvHDig: Reception of up to 128 digital structures
● S7RcvHAna: Reception of up to 32 analog structures.
Both stations are configured in SIMATIC Manager and CFC.

Figure 5-3 Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-300
Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-1500

To realize coordinated communication between a redundant S7-400H and an S7-1500, the
The IL provides the following blocks for S7-400H:
● S7SndHDig: Change-triggered transmission of up to 128 analog structures.
● S7SndHAna: Change-triggered transmission of up to 32 analog structures.
● S7RcvHDig: Reception of up to 128 digital structures
● S7RcvHAna: Reception of up to 32 analog structures.
NOTICE
S7-400 is configured in the SIMATIC Manager and CFC. S7-1500 is configured in the TIA
Portal. The blocks are optimized in the TIA Portal for the use of LAD, FBD or STL.

Figure 5-4 Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-1500
Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-400 (single)

To realize coordinated communication between a redundant and a non-redundant S7-400, the
The RedCPU I/O is used in this application to define in which of the two communication partners
the block is used. (RedCPU: 1 = Red. Controller S7-41xH, 0 = Single controller S7-41x)
Alternatively, the existing communication blocks continue to be maintained for existing plants:
● ASSendH: Send up to 30 real and 30 binary values with QualityCode
● ASRcvH: Reception of up to 30 real and 30 binary values with QualityCode

Figure 5-5 Communication between S7-400H (redundant) and S7-400 (single)
Consumption of connection resources when using the communication blocks

The basis for the data transfer is a physical connection between two controllers via MPI,
PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet. Based on this connection, the S7 connections are
configured on both sides in PCS 7, STEP 7 or TIA Portal, depending on the CPU type. It is
important to ensure that a connection resource of the CPU is used for each S7 connection.
The following table shows an overview of the available connection resources of the respective
CPU types.
CPU type S7- Connection resources (minus PG and OP connections 2 / 10 \ [S7-1500])

Total MPI DP IE/PN
412-x 32 32 16 -
412-2 PN 48 32 16 48
414-x 32 32 16 -
414-3 PN/DP 414F-3 64 32 16 64
PN/DP
416-2 416F-2 416-3 64 44 32 -
416-3 PN/DP 416F3 PN/ 96 44 32 96
DP
417 120 44 32 -
410-5H 120 120 120 120
31x-y PN/DP 12 - 32 n n n
151x 64 – 192 n n n
For more details, refer to the manuals of the CPU types.

The data limit for the data exchange is 64 KB per block pair. The transmission of the data via
a communication processor (CP) of the S7-300 is an exception with 32 KB. A maximum of
eight jobs can be executed in parallel for each S7 connection.

5.2 S7SndDig - Sending digital values
5.2.1 S7SndDig description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7SndDig

The "S7SndDig" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BSEND". The "S7SndDig"
block sends 128 digital structures via an MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet connection to
another CPU. This CPU calls the function block "Rcv_DigVal" (FB 1892) of the PCS 7
Advanced Process Library to receive the data.
How it works
Sending is initiated by calling the block with the value 1 at the SendEn control input. During
the transmission of data, SendAct is set to 1.
If the job is completed without error, SendDone = 1 is set. SendErr is set to 1 is an error
occurs and new job is automatically triggered with the current data until all data have been
successfully sent.
If the input SendEn = 0, incomplete transmission is canceled. No further sending takes place
afterward (SendAct = 0).
The ID parameter is the connection number from the configuration of the S7 connection in
"NetPro" (PCS 7 / STEP 7) or "Devices and Networks" (TIA Portal).
The R_ID parameter is any number for each S7 connection (ID) that is unique and identical
at the corresponding send and receive blocks.
You can re-configure the addressing parameters ID and R_ID in runtime. The new
parameters take effect with each new job once the previous job is completed. You can find
additional information on these parameters in the system documentation for BSEND/BRCV.
Note
Error code or incorrect data at the data block
Only one Rcv block may be assigned to each Snd block. The combination of ID (connection
number) and R_ID (identification number) must be unique within the project for every block
pair.
Ensure that this assignment of the block pairs is correct, otherwise data will be sent to the
wrong blocks.

Configuration
Install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (such as OB32) in the CFC Editor.
Startup characteristics
The block has no startup characteristics.
Time behavior
The block does not have any timing behavior.
Status word assignment for the parameter Status

This block does not have the Status parameter
5.2.2 S7SndDig operating modes
This block has no operating mode.
5.2.3 Function of S7SndDig
The block does not have any configurable characteristics.
5.2.4 S7SndDig error handling
Troubleshooting the block is restricted to the error information of the lower-level SFB 12
"BSEND".
The SendErr(ERROR) and SendStat(STATUS) outputs show the specific error information
for the lower-level SFB 12 "BSEND".
You can find the error information for the ERROR and STATUS outputs of the SFB 12 in the
manual "System Software for S7-300/400 - System and Standard Functions".
If an error occurs, a new job is automatically triggered with the current data until all data have
been successfully transferred.
5.2.5 S7SndDig messaging
No message behavior is applicable to this block.

5.2.6 S7SndDig I/Os
Input parameters
Parameter Description Type Initial value

EN 1 = Called block is executed BOOL 1
ID ID of physical connection WORD 16#0000
R_ID ID of message frame connection DWORD 16#00000000
SndEn 1 = Activate continuous sending BOOL 1
PV_In00 ... PV_In127 Input_0 ... Input_127 BOOL 1
Output parameters

ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without er‐ BOOL 0
rors
SndAct 1 = Command is active BOOL 0
SndDone 1 = Command is executed BOOL 0
SndErr 1 = Command is executed with error BOOL 0
SndStat Type of error WORD 16#0000
5.2.7 S7SndDig block diagram
A block diagram is not provided for this block.

5.3 S7SndAna - Sending analog values
5.3.1 S7SndAna description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7SndAna

The "S7SndAna" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BSEND". The
"S7SndAna" block sends 32 analog structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet
connection to another CPU. This CPU calls the function block "Rcv_AnaVal" (FB 1894) of the
PCS 7 Advanced Process Library to receive the data.
How it works
Sending is initiated by calling the block with the value 1 at the SendEn control input. The data
are sent according to the settings of CycMin, CycMax or PV_In_HysXX. During the
transmission of data, SendAct is set to 1.
If the job is completed without error, SendDone = 1 is set. SendErr is set to 1 is an error
successfully sent.
afterward (SendAct = 0).
You can use CycMIN to set the number of cycles to wait before triggering the transfer of the
current input data, regardless of any changes to one or more values.
You can use CycMAX to specify how many cycles after the last valid data transfer to wait before
sending the current input data. Sending is executed even when no value has changed or when
the changes of a REAL value are within the hysteresis PV_In_HysXX.
The default value of the hysteresis is PV_In_HysXX = 0. If sending is not to be performed
after each value change, configure the PV_In_HysXX input accordingly. This involves an
absolute value.
When CycMax is reached, transfer is forced after the corresponding number of cycles.

Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
Configuration
Time behavior

5.3.2 S7SndAna operating modes
5.3.3 Function of S7SndAna
5.3.4 S7SndAna error handling
"BSEND".

5.3.5 S7SndAna messaging
5.3.6 S7SndAna I/Os
Input parameters

CylMin Minimum waiting cycle INT 1
CylMax Maximum waiting cycle INT 10
PV_In_Hys00 ... PV_In_Hys31 Hysteresis for PV_In_00 ... Hystere‐ REAL 0.0
sis for PV_In_31
PV_In00 ... PV_In31 Input_00 ... Input_31 REAL 0.0
Output parameters

rors
SndAct 1 = Command is active BOOL 0
SndDone 1 = Command is executed BOOL 0
SndErr 1 = Command is executed with error BOOL 0
SndStat Type of error WORD 16#00000
5.3.7 S7SndAna block diagram

5.4 S7RcvDig - Receiving digital values
5.4.1 S7RcvDig description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7RcvDig

The "S7RcvDig" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 13 "BRCV". The block
receives 128 digital structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet connection from
another CPU. This CPU must call the function block "Snd_DigVal" (FB 1891) of the PCS 7
Advanced Process Library to send the data.
In STEP 7, a uniform connection must be configured for both communication partners and
transferred to the AS.
How it works
Data are entered in the data block asynchronously to user-program execution. After
"S7RcvDig" has been called, instance DB data may not be processed as long as the job is in
progress (RcvNewData = 0). If the job is completed without errors, the RcvNewData output
is set to 1 for one cycle. In the next cycle, the receive enable is automatically sent by the FB
to the operating system of the CPU.
The receive enable can take effect prior to the arrival of the first receive job. In this case, the
receive enable is stored by the operating system.

Call the block pair consisting of the send (S7RcvDig) and receive block (Snd_DigVal) in each
program cycle (cyclically or also via timeout alarm).
Note
Only one Snd block may be assigned to each Rcv block. The combination of ID (connection
pair.
wrong blocks.
If you want to simulate the values, enable simulation via the SimOn input. In this case, the
values from the inputs SimPVX are written to the outputs PV_Outx. As long as simulation is
running, the data sent are not applied, since data reception is switched off.
Configuration
Time behavior

5.4.2 S7RcvDig operating modes
5.4.3 Function of S7RcvDig

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter
The following function is available at the Feature I/O for this block:
● Bit 29: Output substitute values if raw value is invalid

5.4.4 S7RcvDig error handling
"BRCV".
The SendErr (ERROR) and SendStat (STATUS) outputs show the specific error information
for the lower-level SFB 13 "BRCV".
You can find additional information in the manual System Software for S7-300/400 - System
and Standard Functions. There you can find a description for the RcvXErr (ERR) and
RcvXStat (STAT) outputs of SFB 13.
If Bit29 in the Feature structure is set, and no new data is received after the expiration of
RcvMonCyc (number of cycles), the substitute value is output and the RcvMonErr output is
set to 1. While RcvMonCyc cycles are running, the last received values are applied to the
output.
If Bit29 in the Feature structure is not set and an error occurs, the last valid values are always
applied to the output.
5.4.5 S7RcvDig messaging
5.4.6 S7RcvDig I/Os
Input parameters

RcvMonCyc Number of cycles for receiving monitoring er‐ INT 3
ror
SimOn 1= simulation active BOOL 0
SimPV0 ... SimPV127 Simulation value BOOL 0
SubsPV1 ... SubsPV127 Substitute value BOOL 0
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 108) STRUCT -
● Reserved ● Bit0 ... Bit28: BOOL ● 0
● 1 = substitute value ● Bit29: BOOL ● 0

Output parameters

ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
PV_Out0 ... PVOut127 Output_0 ... Output_1277 BOOL 0
SimAct 1= simulation active BOOL 0
RcvMonErr 1 = no data received BOOL 0
RcvNewData 1 = no data received BOOL 0
RcvErr 1 = Command is executed with error BOOL 0
RcvStat Type of error WORD 16#0000
5.4.7 S7RcvDig block diagram

5.5 S7RcvAna - Receiving analog values
5.5.1 S7RcvAna description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7RcvAna

The "S7RcvAna" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BRCV". The block sends
32 analog structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet connection to another CPU.
This CPU must call the function block "Snd_AnaVal" (FB 1893) of the PCS 7 Advanced Process
Library to send the data.
How it works
"S7RcvAna" has been called, instance DB data may not be processed as long as the job is in
progress (RcvNewData = 0). If the job is completed without errors, the RcvNewData output
is set to 1 for one cycle. In the next cycle, the receive enable is automatically sent by the FB
to the operating system of the CPU.

Call the block pair consisting of the send (S7RcvAna) and receive block (Snd_AnaVal) in each
program cycle (cyclically or also via timeout alarm).
Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
values from the inputs SimPVX are written to the outputs PV_Outx. As long as simulation is
Configuration
Time behavior

5.5.2 S7RcvAna operating modes
5.5.3 Function of S7RcvAna
Responses that can be configured with the "Feature" parameter


5.5.4 S7RcvAna error handling
"BRCV".
output.
5.5.5 S7RcvAna messaging
5.5.6 S7RcvAna I/Os
Input parameters

RcvMonCyc Number of cycles for receiving monitoring INT 3
error
SimOn 1 = Simulation active BOOL 0
SimPV0...SimPV31 Simulation value REAL 0.0
SubsPV0...SubsPV31 Substitute value REAL 0.0
● Reserved ● Bit30 ... 31: BOOL ● 0

Output parameters

rors
PV_Out0 ... PV_Out31 Output_0 ... Output_31 REAL 0.0
SimAct 1 = Simulation active REAL 0.0
RcvMonErr 1 = no data received BOOL 0
RcvNewData 1 = new data received BOOL 0
RcvErr 1 = Command is executed with error BOOL 0
RcvStat Type of error WORD 16#0000
5.5.7 S7RcvAna block diagram

5.6 S7SndHDig - Sending digital values
5.6.1 S7SndHDig description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7SndHDig

The "S7SndHDig" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BSEND". The
"S7SndHDig" block sends 128 digital structures via an MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet
connection to another CPU. This CPU calls the function block "RcvH_DigVal" (FB 1171) of the
PCS 7 Industry Library to receive the data.
The blocks are used to create a connection between a redundant and non-redundant
automation system.
How it works
Sending is initiated by calling the block with the value 1 at the SendEn control input. During
the transmission of data, SendXAct is set to 1.
If the job is completed without error, SendXDone = 1 is set. SendXErr is set to 1 is an error
successfully sent.
afterward (SendXAct = 0).
The IDX parameter is the connection number from the configuration of the S7 connection in
The R_IDX parameter is any number for each S7 connection (IDX) that is unique and identical

You can re-configure the addressing parameters IDX and R_IDX in runtime. The new
Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
Configuration
Time behavior

5.6.2 S7SndHDig operating modes
5.6.3 Function of S7SndHDig
5.6.4 S7SndHDig error handling
"BSEND".

5.6.5 S7SndHDig messaging
5.6.6 S7SndHDig I/Os
Input parameters

ID1 ID of physical connection 1 WORD 16#0000
R_ID1 Message frame connection ID 1 DWORD 16#00000000
PV_In00 ... PV_In127 Input_0 ... Input_127 BOOL 1
Output parameters

rors
Snd1Act 1 = Command is active for connection 1 BOOL 0
Snd1Done 1 = Command is executed for connection 1 BOOL 0
Snd1Err 1= Command is executed with error for BOOL 0
connection 1
Snd1Stat Type of error for connection 1 WORD 16#0000
connection 2

5.6.7 S7SndHDig block diagram

5.7 S7SndHAna - Sending analog values
5.7.1 S7SndHAna description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7SndHAna

The "S7SndHAna" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BSEND". The
"S7SndHAna" block sends 32 analog structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet
connection to another CPU. This CPU calls the function block "RcvH_AnaVal" (FB 1173) of
the PCS 7 Industry Library to receive the data.
automation system.
How it works
Sending is initiated by calling the block with the value 1 at the SendEn control input. The data
are sent according to the settings of CycMin, CycMax or PV_In_HysXX. During the
transmission of data, SendXAct is set to 1.
If the job is completed without error, SendXDone = 1 is set. SendXErr is set to 1 is an error
successfully sent.
afterward (SendXAct = 0).
You can use CycMIN to set the number of cycles to wait before triggering the transfer of the
current input data, regardless of any changes to one or more values.
You can use CycMAX to specify how many cycles after the last valid data transfer to wait before
sending the current input data. Sending is executed even when no value has changed or when
the changes of a REAL value are within the hysteresis PV_In_HysXX.
The default value of the hysteresis is PV_In_HysXX = 0. If sending is not to be performed
after each value change, configure the PV_In_HysXX input accordingly. This involves an
absolute value.
When CycMax is reached, transfer is forced after the corresponding number of cycles.

Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
Configuration
Time behavior

5.7.2 S7SndHAna operating modes
5.7.3 Function of S7SndHAna
5.7.4 S7SndHAna error handling
"BSEND".

5.7.5 S7SndHAna messaging
5.7.6 S7SndHAna I/Os
Input parameters

CylMin Minimum waiting cycle INT 1
CylMax Maximum waiting cycle INT 10
PV_In_Hys00 ... PV_In_Hys31 Hysteresis for PV_In_00 ... Hystere‐ REAL 0.0
sis for PV_In_31
PV_In00 ... PV_In31 Input_00 ... Input_31 REAL 0.0
Output parameters

rors
connection 1


connection 2
5.7.7 S7SndHAna block diagram

5.8 S7RcvHDig - Receiving digital values
5.8.1 S7RcvHDig description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7RcvHDig

The "S7RcvHDig" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 13 "BRCV". The block
receives 128 digital structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet connection from
another CPU. This CPU must call the function block "SndH_DigVal" (FB 1170) of the PCS 7
Advanced Process Library to send the data.
automation system.
How it works
"S7RcvHDig" has been called, instance DB data may not be processed as long as the job is
in progress (RcvXNewData = 0). If the job is completed without errors, the RcvXNewData
output is set to 1 for one cycle. In the next cycle, the receive enable is automatically sent by
the FB to the operating system of the CPU.

Call the block pair consisting of the send (S7RcvHDig) and receive block (SndH_DigVal) in
each program cycle (cyclically or also via timeout alarm).
Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
values from the inputs SimPVX are written to the outputs PV_OutX. As long as simulation is
Configuration
Time behavior

5.8.2 S7RcvHDig operating modes
5.8.3 Function of S7RcvHDig


5.8.4 S7RcvHDig error handling
"BRCV".
output.
5.8.5 S7RcvHDig messaging
5.8.6 S7RcvHDig I/Os
Input parameters

RcvMonCyc Number of cycles for receiving monitoring er‐ INT 3
ror
SimOn 1= simulation active BOOL 0
SimPV0 ... SimPV127 Simulation value BOOL 0
SubsPV1 ... SubsPV127 Substitute value BOOL 0

Output parameters

PV_Out0 ... PVOut127 Output_0 ... Output_1277 BOOL 0
SimAct 1= simulation active BOOL 0
RdSysStEnOut RdSysSt: 1 = RdSysSt active, 0 = RdSysSt not BOOL 0
active
RedCPUOut Controller: 1 = Red. Controller, 0 = Single con‐ BOOL 0
troller
Rcv1Mstr 1 = CPU rack 0 is master (red. CPU) BOOL 0
Rcv1Run 1 = CPU rack 0 in RUN (red. CPU) BOOL 0
Rcv1MonErr 1= No data received for connection 1 BOOL 0
Rcv1NewData 1= No data received for connection 1 BOOL 0
Rcv1Err 1= Command is executed with error for con‐ BOOL 0
nection 1
Rcv1Stat Type of error for connection 1 WORD 16#0000
Rcv2Err 1= Command is executed with error for con‐ BOOL 0
nection 2
SyncLink 1 = Synchronization possible (red. CPU) BOOL 0
ERR 1 = Internal error active (red. CPU) BOOL 0
5.8.7 S7RcvHDig block diagram

5.9 S7RcvHAna - Receiving analog values
5.9.1 S7RcvHAna description

Family: COMM
Application area for S7RcvHAna

The "S7RcvHAna" block represents a simple user interface to SFB 12 "BRCV". The block
sends 32 analog structures via MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet connection to another
CPU. This CPU must call the function block "SndH_AnaVal" (FB 1170) of the PCS 7 Advanced
Process Library to send the data.
automation system.
How it works
"S7RcvHAna" has been called, instance DB data may not be processed as long as the job is
in progress (RcvXNewData = 0). If the job is completed without errors, the RcvXNewData
output is set to 1 for one cycle. In the next cycle, the receive enable is automatically sent by
the FB to the operating system of the CPU.

Call the block pair consisting of the send (S7RcvHAna) and receive block (SndH_AnaVal) in
each program cycle (cyclically or also via timeout alarm).
Note
pair.
wrong blocks.
values from the inputs SimPVX are written to the outputs PV_OutX. As long as simulation is
Configuration
Time behavior

5.9.2 S7RcvHAna operating modes
5.9.3 Function of S7RcvHAna
Responses that can be configured with the "Feature" parameter


5.9.4 S7RcvHAna error handling
"BRCV".
output.
5.9.5 S7RcvHAna messaging
5.9.6 S7RcvHAna I/Os
Input parameters

RcvMonCyc Number of cycles for receiving monitoring INT 3
error
SimOn 1 = Simulation active BOOL 0
SimPV0...SimPV31 Simulation value REAL 0.0
SubsPV0...SubsPV31 Substitute value REAL 0.0
● Reserved ● Bit30 ... 31: BOOL ● 0

Output parameters

rors
PV_Out0 ... PV_Out31 Output_0 ... Output_31 REAL 0.0
SimAct 1 = Simulation active REAL 0.0
RdSysStEnOut RdSysSt: 1 = RdSysSt active, 0 = RdSysSt BOOL 0
not active
RedCPUOut Controller: 1 = Red. Controller, 0 = Single BOOL 0
controller
Rcv1Err 1= Command is executed with error for BOOL 0
connection 1
Rcv2Err 1= Command is executed with error for BOOL 0
connection 2
SyncLink 1 = Synchronization possible (red. CPU) BOOL 0
ERR 1 = Internal error active (red. CPU) BOOL 0
5.9.7 S7RcvHAna block diagram

5.10 ASRcvH - H-system communication receive block
5.10.1 Function

Family: Comm
Area of application for ASRcvH
The ASRcvH block coordinates the receipt of telegrams between a redundant and a non-
redundant automation station via S7 communication (BRECV). Up to 30 REAL values and 30
binary values are sent. Each value also has a binary quality code which specifies whether the
measured value is correct.

This is the cyclic interrupt organization block in which you install the block (e.g., OB32).
Additionally in OB100 (see Startup characteristics (Page 133)).

5.10.3 Monitoring the receiving procedure

There are two connections between sender and receiver. Both connections are monitored
separately. If an error occurs during monitoring, the data received by the first connection is
used. If one of the connections fails, the data of the connection that is still running is used. If
both connections fail, the associated value (quality flag) is sent to the OS.
If at least one error is detected, the OS will be sent a group message once the SupprTime
(configurable suppression time, can be set to any value) has expired.
The sending error is reset as soon as one or more telegrams have been successfully sent with
valid data. When SupprTime < SampleTime, the error message is generated immediately.

Message characteristics is controlled with the MsgLock and MsgSup parameters.
If the value of MsgLock is set to "TRUE", all messages are locked.
If the number of calls (RunUpCyc) after a restart have not yet been performed, the value of
MsgSup is set to "TRUE" automatically and no messages are sent.
Messages
Message Message ID Message class Event

instance
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Communication failure
conn. 1
SIG 2 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Communication failure
conn. 2
SIG 3 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Complete loss of commu‐
nication
SIG 4 - $$BlockComment$$ External message 1
Associated values for message instance MsgEvId
Associated value Block parameter

1 Status1
2 Status2
3 ExtVa103
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107


8 ExtVa108
9 ExtVa109
10 ExtVa110
The associated values (ExtVa1x) of the message block can be assigned freely.

Message behavior is controlled with the RunUpCyc parameter. The value (number of cycles)
indicates how long the messages are suppressed for. The Restart = TRUE parameter
simulates a restart.

Time behavior is controlled with the SampleTime parameter. The value (time in seconds)
indicates the length of the sampling time. The call is made via a cyclic interrupt organization
block.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFB35 ALARM_8P
FB1152 IL_BR
UDT1190 UDT_BoolSt
UDT1191 UDT_RealSt

SupprTime REAL IN 0 Suppression time [s]
RunUpCyc INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles
EN BOOL IN 0
FirstVar1 BOOL IN 0 Pointer initial value conn. #1
LastVar1 BOOL IN 0 End delimiter receive buffer
readback conn. #1
FirstVar2 BOOL IN 0 Pointer initial value conn. #2
LastVar2 BOOL IN 0 End delimiter receive buffer
readback conn. #2
SampleTime REAL IN 0 Sampling time in [s]


Real01_1In.Value REAL IN 0 Value


Real01.Value REAL OUT 0 Value


Restart BOOL IN 0 Value
MsgLock.Value BOOL IN 0 Value
MsgAckEn BOOL IN 0 Value
ExtMsg1.Value BOOL IN 0 Value
ResHist1 BOOL IN 0 Value
ResHist2 BOOL IN 0 Value
Bool01_1In.Value BOOL IN 0 Value


ENO BOOL OUT 0
Bool01.Value BOOL OUT 0 Value


IntCnt1 DINT OUT 0 Integration of DATE conn. #1
ErrCnt1 DINT OUT 0 Counter for errors conn. #1
Length1 INT OUT 0 Length of the receive area 1
Err1Out BOOL OUT 0 1:Error 0:No. Error (static)
Status1 INT OUT 0 Status 1 (static)
TrigReady1 BOOL OUT 0 0:Busy 1:New trigger possible
IntCnt2 DINT OUT 0 Integration of DATE conn. #2
ErrCnt2 DINT OUT 0 Counter for errors conn. #2
Length2 INT OUT 0 Length of the receive area 2
Err2Out BOOL OUT 0 1:Error 0:No. Error (static)
Status2 INT OUT 0 Status 2 (static)
TrigReady2 BOOL OUT 0 0:Busy 1:New trigger possible
MsgSup BOOL OUT 0 1=Message suppression active
MsgErr BOOL OUT 0 1=Message error


Hist1Ti1 DATE_AND_TIM OUT 0
E
E
E
E
HistLTi1 DATE_AND_TIM OUT 0
E
E
E
E
E
HistLTi2 DATE_AND_TIM OUT 0
E
MsgLock.ST BYTE IN 0 Signal status
ExtMsg1.ST BYTE IN 0 Signal status
Real01_1In.ST BYTE IN 0 Signal status


Bool01_1In.ST BYTE IN 0 Signal status




Real01.ST BYTE OUT 0 Signal status


Bool01.ST BYTE OUT 0 Signal status
MsgEvId DWORD IN 0 Message ID
R_ID_1 DWORD IN 0 R_ID for connection #1


R_ID_2 DWORD IN 0 R_ID for connection #2
ID_1 WORD IN 0 ID for connection #1
ID_2 WORD IN 0 ID for connection #2
Dummy WORD IN 0
Hist1St1 WORD OUT 0
Hist2St1 WORD OUT 0
Hist3St1 WORD OUT 0
Hist4St1 WORD OUT 0
HistLSt1 WORD OUT 0
Hist1St2 WORD OUT 0
Hist2St2 WORD OUT 0
Hist3St2 WORD OUT 0
Hist4St2 WORD OUT 0
HistLSt2 WORD OUT 0
MsgStat WORD OUT 0 Message: STATUS output
MsgAckn WORD OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE output
MsgLock STRUCT IN 0 1=Suppress messages
ExtMsg1 STRUCT IN 0 Digital input for freely selectable message 1
ExtVa103 ANY IN 0 Associated value 3 for messages
Real01_1In STRUCT IN 0


Bool01_1In STRUCT IN 0




Real01 STRUCT OUT 0
Real02 STRUCT OUT 0
Real03 STRUCT OUT 0
Real04 STRUCT OUT 0
Real05 STRUCT OUT 0
Real06 STRUCT OUT 0
Real07 STRUCT OUT 0
Real08 STRUCT OUT 0
Real09 STRUCT OUT 0
Real10 STRUCT OUT 0
Real11 STRUCT OUT 0
Real12 STRUCT OUT 0
Real13 STRUCT OUT 0
Real14 STRUCT OUT 0


Real15 STRUCT OUT 0
Real16 STRUCT OUT 0
Real17 STRUCT OUT 0
Real18 STRUCT OUT 0
Real19 STRUCT OUT 0
Real20 STRUCT OUT 0
Real21 STRUCT OUT 0
Real22 STRUCT OUT 0
Real23 STRUCT OUT 0
Real24 STRUCT OUT 0
Real25 STRUCT OUT 0
Real26 STRUCT OUT 0
Real27 STRUCT OUT 0
Real28 STRUCT OUT 0
Real29 STRUCT OUT 0
Real30 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool01 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool02 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool03 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool04 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool05 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool06 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool07 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool08 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool09 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool10 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool11 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool12 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool13 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool14 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool15 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool16 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool17 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool18 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool19 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool20 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool21 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool22 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool23 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool24 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool25 STRUCT OUT 0


Bool26 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool27 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool28 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool29 STRUCT OUT 0
Bool30 STRUCT OUT 0

5.11 ASSendH - H-system communication send block
5.11.1 Function

Family: Comm
Area of application for ASSendH

The block coordinates the sending of telegrams between a redundant and a non-redundant
automation station via S7 communication (BSEND). Up to 30 REAL values and 30 binary
values are sent. Each value also has a binary quality code which specifies whether the
measured value is correct.
5.11.2 Calling OBs


5.11.3 Monitoring the sending procedure

The two connections to the receiving partner are monitored separately. The block generally
sends simultaneously via both connections.
When an error is detected, a group message is sent to the OS. After a total failure of both
connections, the associated value (quality flag) which is supplied with each value is also
activated. A message is not generated until the SupprTime (suppression time) has expired.
This parameter can be set.
The sending error is reset as soon as one or more telegrams have been successfully sent with
valid data. When SupprTime < SampleTime, the error message is generated immediately.

All messages can be locked with MsgLock. When all messages are disabled (MsgLock =
TRUE) or if the number of calls due after a restart (RunUpCyc) have not yet been performed,
the MsgSup output is set to TRUE and no message is sent.
Messages
Message Message ID Message class Event

instance
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Communication failure
conn. 1
SIG 2 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Communication failure
conn. 2
SIG 3 AS control system Fault $$BlockComment$$ Complete loss of commu‐
nication
Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

1 Status1
2 Status2
3 ExtVa103
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108


9 ExtVa109
10 ExtVa110
The associated values (ExtVa1x) of the message block can be assigned freely.

The RunUpCyc parameter can be used to specify for how long (number of cycles) the
messages are to be suppressed. Restart = TRUE can be used to simulate a restart.

the SampleTime parameter.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFB35 ALARM_8P
FB1151 IL_BS
UDT1190 UDT_BoolSt
UDT1190 UDT_RealSt

OUT
SupprTime REAL IN Suppression time [s]
RunUpCyc INT IN Number of startup cycles
EN BOOL IN
SendEn BOOL IN 1:Send, 0:Don't send
FirstVar BOOL IN Pointer initial value send data
LastVar BOOL IN End delimiter of send data
SampleTime REAL IN Sampling time in [s]
Real01.Value REAL IN Value


OUT
Restart BOOL IN Value
Bool01.Value BOOL IN Value


OUT
MsgLock.Value BOOL IN Value
MsgAckEn BOOL IN 1=Evaluate message acknowledgment status
ExtMsg1.Value BOOL IN Value
ResHist1 BOOL IN Reset the history conn. #1
ResHist2 BOOL IN Reset the history conn. #2
ENO BOOL OUT
IntCnt1 DINT OUT Integration of sent data conn. #1
ErrCnt1 DINT OUT Counter for errors conn. #1
IntCnt2 DINT OUT Integration of sent data conn. #2
ErrCnt2 DINT OUT Counter for errors conn. #2
Length1 INT OUT Length of the sent data conn. #1
Length2 INT OUT Length of the sent data conn. #2
Err1Out BOOL OUT Error during data transmission (static) conn. #1
Err2Out BOOL OUT Error during data transmission (static) conn. #2
Status1 INT OUT Status (static) conn. #1
Status2 INT OUT Status (static) conn. #2
Ready1 BOOL OUT 0: Order not started or already running
1: Order completed successfully conn. #1
Ready2 BOOL OUT 0: Order not started or already running
1: Order completed successfully conn. #2


OUT
MsgSup BOOL OUT 1=Message suppression active
MsgErr BOOL OUT Message error (ERROR output of ALARM_8P)
Hist1Ti1 DATE_AND_TIM OUT
E
E
E
E
HistLTi1 DATE_AND_TIM OUT
E
E
E
E
E
HistLTi2 DATE_AND_TIM OUT
E
Real01.ST BYTE IN Signal status


OUT
Bool01.ST BYTE IN Signal status
MsgLock.ST BYTE IN Signal status


OUT
ExtMsg1.ST BYTE IN Signal status
SendMode BYTE IN 0=Send once (pos.edge), 1:Send cyclic, 2-255: Send
every nth cycle
MsgEvId DWORD IN Message ID
R_ID_1 DWORD IN R_ID for connection #1
R_ID_2 DWORD IN R_ID for connection #2
ID_1 WORD IN ID for connection #1
ID_2 WORD IN ID for connection #2
Hist1St1 WORD OUT
Hist2St1 WORD OUT
Hist3St1 WORD OUT
Hist4St1 WORD OUT
HistLSt1 WORD OUT
Hist1St2 WORD OUT
Hist2St2 WORD OUT
Hist3St2 WORD OUT
Hist4St2 WORD OUT
HistLSt2 WORD OUT
MsgStat WORD OUT Message: STATUS output
MsgAckn WORD OUT Message: ACK_STATE output
Real01 STRUCT IN
Real02 STRUCT IN
Real03 STRUCT IN
Real04 STRUCT IN
Real05 STRUCT IN
Real06 STRUCT IN
Real07 STRUCT IN
Real08 STRUCT IN
Real09 STRUCT IN
Real10 STRUCT IN
Real11 STRUCT IN
Real12 STRUCT IN
Real13 STRUCT IN
Real14 STRUCT IN
Real15 STRUCT IN
Real16 STRUCT IN
Real17 STRUCT IN


OUT
Real18 STRUCT IN
Real19 STRUCT IN
Real20 STRUCT IN
Real21 STRUCT IN
Real22 STRUCT IN
Real23 STRUCT IN
Real24 STRUCT IN
Real25 STRUCT IN
Real26 STRUCT IN
Real27 STRUCT IN
Real28 STRUCT IN
Real29 STRUCT IN
Real30 STRUCT IN
Bool01 STRUCT IN
Bool02 STRUCT IN
Bool03 STRUCT IN
Bool04 STRUCT IN
Bool05 STRUCT IN
Bool06 STRUCT IN
Bool07 STRUCT IN
Bool08 STRUCT IN
Bool09 STRUCT IN
Bool10 STRUCT IN
Bool11 STRUCT IN
Bool12 STRUCT IN
Bool13 STRUCT IN
Bool14 STRUCT IN
Bool15 STRUCT IN
Bool16 STRUCT IN
Bool17 STRUCT IN
Bool18 STRUCT IN
Bool19 STRUCT IN
Bool20 STRUCT IN
Bool21 STRUCT IN
Bool22 STRUCT IN
Bool23 STRUCT IN
Bool24 STRUCT IN
Bool25 STRUCT IN
Bool26 STRUCT IN
Bool27 STRUCT IN


OUT
Bool28 STRUCT IN
Bool29 STRUCT IN
Bool30 STRUCT IN
MsgLock STRUCT IN 1=Suppress messages
ExtMsg1 STRUCT IN Digital input for freely selectable message 1
ExtVa103 ANY IN Associated value 3 for messages

5.12 S7Get - AS-AS communication, read data
5.12.1 Function

Family: Comm
Area of application for S7Get

The S7Get block reads data via S7 communication (GET) from an additional S7 station.
Note
The block is designed for use in S7-4xx CPUs.
During communication between S7-4xx and S7-3xx, up to 222 bytes can be read from a DB.
During communication between S7-4xx and S7-15xx, up to 222 bytes can be read from a DB.

Configuration
The S7Get block requires the following information at its I/Os in order to read data from an S7
controller:
I/O Information
KOM_ID Local ID of the S7 connection from NetPro. This
ID is shown as HEX in NetPro. Note the following
when entering at the block:
DBNO_SRC DB number of the data block containing the data
to be read in S7-3xx/S7-15xx.
ADDR_SRC Start address of the area of the data to be read
within the data block in the S7-3xx/S7-15xx .
DBNO_DST DB number of the data block where the read data
is to be stored.
ADDR_DST Start address at which the read data is to be stored
in the data block.
LENGTH Length of data to be read in BYTES
The block starts writing the data as soon as the input is START = true.
It reads the data from the address defined at the I/Os DBNO_SRC.ADDR_SRC, for the area that
was set with the I/O LENGTH and writes it to the position that was defined with the I/Os
DBNO_DST.ADDR_DST.
As long as the input START = true, the read operation is performed at each block call.



5.12.4 Monitoring of the communication procedure

The connection to the partner station is monitored. Depending on the parameter, when an
error is detected, a group message is sent to the OS.
The following types of error can occur:
● SFC GET error
● LIFE_BIT monitoring input does not change state
Sign-of-life monitoring
● EN_LIFE = true
Sign-of-life monitoring is active.
A Lifebit is configured in the target station (S7-300/ S7-1500), which is interconnected to the
connector LIFE_BIT. If there is no status change within the time configured at the connector
MONITOR, the output QERR switches to true. When the suppression time configured at the
connector SUPPTIME expires, a message is triggered if it is not otherwise suppressed by
L_MSGLCK.
● EN_LIFE = false
Sign-of-life monitoring is not active
The monitoring to determine if communication with the target station is possible is done via
the functions of the SFC GET and the connection monitoring of the S7-400. The configuration
of the communications interface determines when the message is triggered.

All messages can be locked with L_MSGLCK. When all messages are locked (L_MSGLCK =
TRUE) or if the number of calls due after a restart (RUNUPCYC) have not yet been performed,
the QMSG_SUP output is set to TRUE and no message is sent.
The QERR output and the message are output delayed by the time "SUPPTIME". If
communication is "OK" and the time "SUPPTIME" has expired, the output and the message
change to the OK state.


number ter
1 QERR Communication disrupted AS control system Fault

RESTART = TRUE can be used to simulate a restart.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFB14 GET
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC

OUT
EN BOOL IN 0
RESTART BOOL IN 0 1=Manual startup
START BOOL IN 0 1=Start reading
KOM_ID INT IN 0 ID for connection
DBNO_SRC INT IN 0 No. of source data block
ADDR_SRC DWORD IN 0 Start address of source data
DBNO_DST INT IN 0 No. of destination data block
ADDR_DST DWORD IN 0 Start address of destination data
LENGTH INT IN 0 Length of data in BYTES
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for message suppression
1=active
MONITOR BOOL IN 0 1=Monitoring active
TIME_MON REAL IN 0 Monitoring time in [s]
LIFE_BIT BOOL IN 0 1=Communication failure
EN_LIFE BOOL IN 0 1=Enable LIFE_BIT
SUPPTIME REAL IN 0 Suppression time [s]


OUT
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QNDR BOOL OUT 0 1=New data received
QLIFE_BIT BOOL OUT 0 1=Communication failure
QSTATUS DWORD OUT 0 Status display
QMSGLCK BOOL OUT 1 1=Message locked

5.13 S7Put - AS-AS communication, write data
5.13.1 Function

Family: Comm
Area of application for S7Put

The S7Put block writes data via S7 communication (PUT) to an additional S7 station.
Note
The block is designed for use in S7-4xx CPUs.
During communication between S7-4xx and S7-3xx, up to 212 bytes can be written to a DB.
During communication between S7-4xx and S7-15xx, up to 212 bytes can be written to a DB.

Configuration
The S7Put block requires the following information at its I/Os in order to write data to an S7
controller:
I/O Information
KOM_ID Local ID of the S7 connection from NetPro. This
ID is shown as HEX in NetPro. Note the following
when entering at the block:
DBNO_SRC DB number of the data block containing the data
to be sent.
ADDR_SRC Start address of the area of the data to be sent
within the data block.
DBNO_DST DB number of the data block in which the data to
be sent should be stored in the S7-3xx/S7-15xx.
ADDR_DST Start address at which data to be sent should be
stored in the data block in the S7-3xx/S7-15xx.
LENGTH Length of data to be transferred in BYTES
The block starts writing the data as soon as the input is START = true.
The block then reads the data from the address defined at the I/Os DBNO_SRC.ADDR_SRC, for
which the area was set with the I/O LENGTH and writes it to the position that was defined with
the I/Os DBNO_DST.ADDR_DST target system was defined.
As long as the input START = true, the write operation is performed at each block call.

5.13.2 Calling OBs


5.13.4 Monitoring of the communication procedure

The connection to the partner station is monitored. Depending on the parameter, when an
error is detected, a group message is sent to the OS.
The following types of error can occur:
● SFC PUT error
● LIFE_BIT monitoring input does not change state
Sign-of-life monitoring
● EN_LIFE = true
Sign-of-life monitoring is active.
A Lifebit is configured in the target station (S7-300/ S7-1500), which is interconnected to the
connector LIFE_BIT. If there is no status change within the time configured at the connector
MONITOR, the output QERR switches to true. When the suppression time configured at the
connector SUPPTIME expires, a message is triggered if it is not otherwise suppressed by
L_MSGLCK.
● EN_LIFE = false
Sign-of-life monitoring is not active
The monitoring to determine if communication with the target station is possible is done via
the functions of the SFC PUT and the connection monitoring of the S7-400. The configuration
of the communications interface determines when the message is triggered.

All messages can be locked with L_MSGLCK.
If at least one of the following conditions is true, the QMSG_SUP output is set to TRUE and
no messages are sent.
● All messages are locked (L_MSGLCK = TRUE)
● The number of calls due after a restart (RUNUPCYC) have not yet been performed

The QERR output and the message are output delayed by the time "SUPPTIME". If
communication is "OK" and the time "SUPPTIME" has expired, the output and the message
change to the OK state.

number ter
1 QERR Communication disrupted AS control system Fault

SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFB15 PUT
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC

OUT
EN BOOL IN 0
START BOOL IN 0 1=Start writing
KOM_ID INT IN 0 ID for connection
DBNO_SRC INT IN 0 No. of source data block
ADDR_SRC DWORD IN 0 Start address of source data
DBNO_DST INT IN 0 No. of destination data block
ADDR_DST DWORD IN 0 Start address of destination data
LENGTH INT IN 0 Length of data in BYTES
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input for message suppression 1=active
MONITOR BOOL IN 0 1=Monitoring active


OUT
LIFE_BIT BOOL IN 0 1=Communication failure
EN_LIFE BOOL IN 0 1=Enable LIFE_BIT
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QDONE BOOL OUT 0 1=Job has been executed
QSTOERUNG BOOL OUT 1 1=Monitoring error
QLIFE_BIT BOOL OUT 0 1=Communication failure
QSTATUS DWORD OUT 0 Status display
QMSGLCK BOOL OUT 1 1=Message locked


Logic blocks 6
6.1 S7SelB - Select one of two BOOL values
6.1.1 Function

Family: Logic
Area of application for S7SelB

The block selects one of two BOOL values depending on an input.
6.1.2 Calling OBs

This is the cyclic interrupt OB in which you install the block (e.g. OB32).

EN BOOL IN 0
K BOOL IN 0 Selector: 0=IN0, 1=IN1
IN0 BOOL IN 0 Input 0
IN1 BOOL IN 0 Input 1
ENO BOOL OUT 0
OUT BOOL OUT 0 Output value

Logic blocks
6.2 S7SelI - Select one of two INTEGER values
6.2 S7SelI - Select one of two INTEGER values
6.2.1 Function

Family: Logic
Area of application for S7SelI

The block selects one of two integer values depending on an input.
6.2.2 Calling OBs


EN BOOL IN 0
IN0 INT IN 0 Input 0
IN1 INT IN 0 Input 1
ENO BOOL OUT 0
OUT INT OUT 0 Output value

Logic blocks
6.3 S7SelR - Select one of two REAL values
6.3.1 Function

Family: Logic
Area of application for S7SelR

The block selects one of two REAL values depending on an input.
6.3.2 Calling OBs


EN BOOL IN 0
IN0 REAL IN 0 Input 0
IN1 REAL IN 0 Input 1
ENO BOOL OUT 0
OUT REAL OUT 0 Output value

Logic blocks

Mathematical blocks 7
7.1 S7AccuS - Accumulated measured value with specific heat
7.1.1 Function

Family: Math
Area of application for S7AccuS

The block is used to integrate a measured value in two separate registers. A distinction can
be made between a counting pulse or a continuous value during accumulation. The measured
value can be multiplied with a specific factor (e.g. specific heat) for the purpose of accumulation.
7.1.2 Calling OBs

7.1.3 Time behavior


A distinction is made between two different operating modes at the MODE parameter:
● Mode = 0: Measured value as a continuous measured value
The PV input specifies the process value as a continuous quantity value. The process value
is recorded in the ACCU_T sampling time, weighted using the BASE_PV parameter, and
then accumulated.
● Mode = 1: Measured value as pulse input
The process value is transferred to the PULSE parameter as a pulse, weighted using the
BASE_PU parameter, and then accumulated.

Mathematical blocks

During startup, the counter states are saved via internal variables. Startup can be simulated
manually using the RESTART input.
7.1.6 Integrate
The measured value (MODE=0:=PV; MODE=1:=PULSE) is accumulated in two counter
registers:
● QACCU_1
● QACCU_2.
The following parameters must be configured for this:
MODE = 0
The measured value is transferred at the PV input. The ACCU_T parameter specifies the
integration sampling cycles in seconds.
The PV measured value is weighted at the BASE_PV parameter. It is essential to ensure that
the ACCU_T and BASE_PV parameters have the same unit (e.g., BASE_PV = 3600 must be
specified for a measured value with the unit m³/h and an ACCU_T of 1 second).
A deadband can be configured at the DEADB parameter. When PV < DEADB, the deadband
is not included in the integration. In this case, the BASE_PU parameter is not relevant. The
measured value is calculated with the following formula:
QACCU_1 := QACCU_1 + PV*SW*ACCU_T/BASE_PV
MODE = 1
The measured value is transferred to the PULSE input as a pulse.
The pulse is weighted at the BASE_PU parameter. In this case, the BASE_PV, ACCU_T
parameter is not relevant.
Reset counter
The counter states are reset via the faceplate and via the interconnectable inputs L_RESET1/
L_RESET2.
The DATE_AC1/DATE_AC2 parameters each specify the time stamp for the reset operations
in the format [yy/mm/dd_hh].
7.1.7 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC67 S7ASTIMEBCD

Mathematical blocks

EN BOOL IN 0
L_RESET1 BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input reset counter #1
L_RESET2 BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input reset counter #2
ACCU_T REAL IN 0 Sample time for accumulation [s]
MODE BOOL IN 0 Integration mode - 0:Level,;1:Pulse
PULSE BOOL IN 0 Pulse input process value
PV REAL IN 0 Integration input level
SW REAL IN 1 Specific heat
DEADB REAL IN 0 Deadband for accumulating
BASE_PV REAL IN 0 Factor for PV
BASE_PU REAL IN 0 Value/Pulse
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 Operator enable
BA_NA STRING[3 IN 1 Current batch name
2]
PERMIS INT IN 1 I/O for operator authorizations
ACCU_1 REAL IN_OUT 0 Accumulated counter #1
ACCU_2 REAL IN_OUT 0 Accumulated counter #2
RESET_1 BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input reset counter #1
RESET_2 BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input reset counter #2
DATE_AC1 DWORD IN_OUT 1 Date counter #1 last reset [yy/mm/dd_hh]
DATE_AC2 DWORD IN_OUT 1 Date counter #2 last reset [yy/mm/dd_hh]
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QACCU_1 REAL OUT 1 Interconnectable accum. counter #1
QACCU_2 REAL OUT 1 Interconnectable accum. counter #2
QACCU_DI1 DINT OUT 1 Interconnectable accum. counter #1 (DINT)
QACCU_DI2 DINT OUT 1 Interconnectable accum. counter #2 (DINT)
QPAR_ERR BOOL OUT 0 Error: BASE_PV parameter = 0
QSW_ERR BOOL OUT 0 Error: SW parameter <= 0

Mathematical blocks
7.1.9.1 S7AccuS views

● Standard view
● Batch view
7.1.9.2 S7AccuS standard view
5 4
(1) Counter 1
● Total 1
(2) Reset
(3) Counter 2
● Total 2
(4) Reset
(5) LocalOS
7.1.9.3 S7AccuS block icons

Mathematical blocks
7.2 S7Average - Generation of mean/minimum/maximum value
7.2.1 Function

Family: Math
Area of application for S7Average

The block determines the mean value of up to 8 REAL type measured values. The Ux_USED
inputs are used to configure which of the 8 measured Ux values are connected.

7.2.3 Time behavior

7.2.4 How it works

Under the following conditions, a measured value Ux is not used to generate the mean value.
● Measured value Ux is identified as unused with the input Ux_USED = FALSE.
● Measured value Ux is not enabled with the input Ux_EN = FALSE
● Measured value Ux is identified as faulty with the input Ux_CSF = TRUE
● Measured value Ux deviates from the mean value calculated by more than the value
configured at the PL_DIFF output and a plausibility check has been selected with
PL_CH_EN = TRUE

Mathematical blocks
7.2.5 Plausibility check

Hereinafter, a measured value Ux is considered valid if:
● It is used (Ux_USED = TRUE)
● It is enabled (Ux_EN = TRUE)
● It is not faulty (Ux_CSF = FALSE)
● It is plausible
Only the values which are used, enabled, and not faulty are checked for plausibility. Values
that are not used or have not been enabled are always identified as plausible. All measured
values are also marked as plausible if the plausibility check has been deselected with
PL_CH_EN = FALSE.
If one or several measured values are not plausible following generation of the mean value,
the value which deviates the most is initially marked as implausible. A new mean value is
determined without the implausible values and the plausibility of the remaining measured
values is checked again. When only two measured values are left to generate the mean value,
they are only considered plausible if the difference between both measured values is less than
the plausibility difference (PL_DIFF). If both values are implausible, mean value, minimum
value, and maximum value are generated from the two (implausible) values and output until
the message has been sent to WinCC. The values which were valid last are then output.
The maximum (QMAX) and the minimum (QMIN) are determined from all valid (used, enabled,
not faulty, and plausible) values.
If no used, enabled, and intact measured values are available or the two remaining values are
implausible, the values which were valid last are output at outputs V, QMIN, and QMAX. The
QERR output is also set.
If only one measured value is used, enabled, and intact, the value is considered plausible and
generates the mean, maximum, and minimum values.

A value must be implausible at least for the time PL_MSG before the message is sent to
WinCC. Time measurement begins again if the value has been recognized as plausible during
a block call.

number ter
1 - Value x not plausible AS control system Fault
(program).

Mathematical blocks

During startup, the following initializations are performed.
Initialization Meaning
V=0 Mean value = 0
QERR = 0 At least one measured value is used, enabled, and not faulty.
QUx_STAT = 0 All values connected, enabled, correct, and plausible
A manual new start is triggered as long as the RESTART input is set to TRUE.
7.2.8 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
U0_USED BOOL IN 0 Process value 0 used
U0 REAL IN 1 Process value 0

Mathematical blocks

U0_CSF BOOL IN 0 1= Process value 0 faulty
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN 1 1=Lock messages
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 1 Interconnectable Lock messages
BA_EN BOOL IN 1 1=Batch enable
BA_ID DWORD IN 1 Batch ID
U0_EN BOOL IN_OUT 1 Enable process value 0
PL_CH_EN BOOL IN_OUT 1 Enable plausibility check
PL_DIFF REAL IN_OUT 1 Difference for value not plausible
PL_MSG REAL IN_OUT 1 Delay time in sec for messages
ENO BOOL OUT 0
V REAL OUT 1 Mean value
QMAX REAL OUT 1 Maximum
QMIN REAL OUT 1 Minimum
QERR BOOL OUT 1 All process values not used, not enabled, or faulty
QU0_STAT BYTE OUT 1 Status of U0

Mathematical blocks

Status word assignment for QUx_STAT parameter

Bit 0 Measured value is not plausible
Bit 1 Measured value is faulty due to external error (CSF)
Bit 2 Measured value is not enabled
Bit 3 Measured value is not connected
Bit 4 – Bit 7 -
7.2.10.1 S7Average views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view

Mathematical blocks
7.2.10.2 S7Average standard view
(1) LocalOS
(2) Displays for activity, measured values, units, and temperatures
● You can enable or disable the activity of each line by selecting or deselecting the check
box.
● The colored lines indicate the following states:
– Green = OK
– Red = Faulty
– Gray = Disabled
7.2.10.3 S7Average parameter view
(1) Plausibility
● Plausibility difference
● Suppression time
● Plausibility check

Mathematical blocks
7.2.10.4 S7Average block icon

Mathematical blocks

Motor and valve blocks 8
8.1 General information about motor blocks - Description of the general
functions of all motor blocks
8.1.1 General information about motor blocks

The following description applies to the motor blocks S7MotSpdC, S7Mot, S7MotSpd, and
S7MotRev. The individual descriptions outline exactly how inputs and outputs function.
The inputs for switching the motor on and off in manual operating mode are called manual
control inputs. These inputs are listed below.
Block Parameter Description

S7MotSpdC, S7Mot MAN_ON 0 = Switch off motor
1 = Switch on motor
S7MotSpd SP1_ON Switch on motor at speed 1
SP2_ON Switch on motor at speed 2
MOT_OFF Switch off motor
S7MotRev REV_ON Switch on motor in reverse
FORW_SON Switch on motor in forward
MOT_OFF Switch off motor
The inputs for switching the motor on and off in local mode with LOCAL_S = 1 are called local
control inputs. These inputs are listed below.

S7MotSpdC, S7Mot LOCAL_ON Switch on motor
LOCAL_OF Switch off motor
S7MotSpd LOCAL_S1 Switch on motor at speed 1
LOCAL_S2 Switch on motor at speed 2
S7MotRev LOCAL_RE Switch on motor in reverse
LOCAL_FW Switch on motor in forward

Motor and valve blocks
8.1 General information about motor blocks - Description of the general functions of all motor blocks
The outputs for controlling the motor are called control outputs. These outputs are listed below:

S7MotSpdC, S7Mot QON Switch on motor
QOFF Switch off motor
S7MotSpd QS1 Switch on motor at speed 1
QS2 Switch on motor at speed 2
S7MotRev QREV Switch on motor in reverse
QFORW Switch on motor in forward
The inputs which report the current motor state to the block are called response message
inputs. These inputs are listed below.

S7MotSpdC, S7Mot FB_ON = 0 Motor stopped
= 1 Motor running
S7MotSpd FB_ON_1 Motor running at speed 1
FB_ON_2 Motor running at speed 2
S7MotRev FB_ON_REV Motor in reverse
FB_ON_FORW Motor in forward
The motor blocks have the following inputs for parameterization of the monitoring times:

S7MotSpdC STIME_MON Runtime monitoring for motor stop
RTIME_MON Runtime monitoring for motor start
S7Mot, S7MotSpd, TIME_MON Runtime monitoring for motor start and stop
S7MotRev
8.1.2 Function
The function of the blocks is similar to that of the S7 standard block MOTOR. The S7 standard
block has been expanded with the addition of a number of functions for water and wastewater
applications. Functions that are not required have been removed.
The motor is controlled by the block with the control outputs. One or more run feedback
messages (for ON, OFF, or the current speed) can be monitored if desired. The feedback
messages are provided by an auxiliary contactor.

Each motor block provides the following functions:

● Static inputs
– Repair switch (forced OFF)
– Switchover between local operation and control station operation
● Different status variables for visualization in WinCC and subsequent unit blocks.
● Number of operating hours since the last motor start
● Number of operating days since the last reset
● Number of hours in standstill since the last motor stop
● Number of start cycles since the last reset
● Output of a bit for preventive maintenance when the operating days (item 4) or start cycles
(item 6) exceed a parameterized value.
● Start the motor for a specified short time when the number of hours in standstill (item 5)
exceeds a parameterized time.
● Output of a bit for message suppression when the motor is in stop status or within a
parameterizable time after the last start.
These functions are not included in the S7 standard motor block. Further expansions (not the
same for all blocks) are listed in the block descriptions.
Note
Most of the functions described above can be enabled and disabled using inputs.
8.1.3 Calling OBs

8.1.4 Time behavior

8.1.5 How it works

Various inputs are available for controlling the motor. They are implemented with hierarchical
interdependence in relation to one another and the states of the motor. Locking, feedback
monitoring, and the motor circuit breaker in particular affect the control signals for the activation
of the motor.

The allocation of priorities to individual input variables and influence on the control signals is
shown in the following table. The sections following provide further details.
Priority: Influence:
High REMOTE = 0
Motor protection error, if MSS_OFF = 1
LOCK = 1 / REPAIR = 1
LOCK_ON = 1
Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 1
Low Automatic/Manual mode
No effect Motor protection error, if MSS_OFF = 0
Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 0
Control system fault, operator error

The REMOTE input is used to select whether the motor is controlled locally (REMOTE = 0) or
from the control station (REMOTE = 1).
In remote operation, the operating modes manual (control of the motor via the OS) or automatic
(control of the motor via the AS program) can be selected.
In local operation, the operating modes manual or automatic can be selected. However, the
motor can only be controlled in remote operation.
Local mode
You can enable local operation by setting the REMOTE input to "0". You can set the mode for
local operation with the LOCAL_S mode variable (BOOL type).
The current manual or automatic command is output on switching back from local operation
to remote operation.
LOCAL_S = 0 1
Enable local operation CFC/SFC CFC/SFC
Operation in the faceplate Not possible Not possible
Tracking via an external input No Yes
Reaction of the block Adjustment of the feed‐ Monitoring of the feed‐
back value back value
Interlock activated No Yes
Behavior at LOCAL_S = 0
● The control settings for the block are made based on internal adjustment of the feedback
value.
● The configured runtime monitoring of the block is deactivated.
● The configured interlock functions of the block are disabled.
In local operation and with MONITOR = 0, QRUN and QSTOP are set to 0.

● The control of the block is tracked by a connected input parameter (LOCAL_ON, for
example). The interconnected input parameter includes the control signal for the local
operator station on the system.
● The runtime monitoring of the block is effective in accordance with your configuration.
● The parameterized locking functionalities of the block are activated.
Control room mode

Switching between the two operating modes manual and automatic is performed either by OS
operator control via AUT_ON_OP (LIOP_SEL = 0) or via the connection of input AUT_L
(LIOP_SEL = 1). When the OS system is used to make the selection, the applicable enables
AUT_OP_EN and MANOP_EN are required. The set operating mode is indicated at the output
QMAN_AUT (1: automatic, 0: manual).
Manual mode
Operator control is performed with the manual control inputs MAN_ON (S7MotSpd: S1_ON,
S2_O) and MOT_OFF via the OS system if the applicable enables ON_OP_EN and
OFF_OP_EN (S7MotSpd: S1_OP_EN, S2_OP_EN and OFF_OP_EN) exist.
Automatic mode
An automatic unit outputs the control commands via the interconnected input AUTO_ON.
The following flowchart illustrates the various operating modes. The block inputs via which the
block receives its control commands in the particular operating mode are shown in
parentheses.

8.1.7 Interlock
The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors - with the exception
of the motor circuit breaker when the corresponding enable signal is set (MSS_OFF = 1).
When LOCK or LOCK_ON is set, the motor is switched on and off directly (without considering
the time MIN_CMD). LOCK has the higher priority.
When the repair switch is off (REPAIR = 1), the motor is also switched off directly.
8.1.8 Control
The motor is activated with the applicable control outputs (S7MotSpdC and S7Mot: QON,
QOFF or S7MotSpd: QS1, QS2 and QOFF or S7MotRev: QREV, QFORW and QOFF). The
control output remains set until a new command is output.
During the switching time (setting of the control output until the required state of the response
message inputs is reported), the QRUN and QSTOP outputs are set to 0. When runtime
monitoring (MONITOR = 0) is deselected, the QRUN and QSTOP outputs are set together
with the control outputs. There are exceptions here for S7MotSpd and S7MotRev.
The input MIN_CMD contains the minimum time which must pass before the control outputs
output another command to the motor.
Example
When the motor is switched on with the control outputs, the time MIN_CMD must pass
measured starting from the feedback indicating that the motor is running (QRUN = 1) before
a command is output to switch off the motor. The same applies to the switching off or switching
over of the motor S7MotSpd from speed 1 to speed 2 and switching S7MotRev from motor on
in reverse to motor on in forward. The operator control enable is disabled for the manual inputs
until the MIN_CMD time has expired.
When MSUP_TMR <> 0, the output QM_SUP is set to 1 for motor off. When the motor is
switched on, QM_SUP is not reset to 0 until the time MSUP_TMR expires. When MSUP_TMR
= 0, QM_SUP always remains set to 0.
The output QM_SUP can be used to hide runtime monitoring. If, for example, a 'Flow-Switch’
reports flow while the pump is running, the output QM_SUP can be used to prevent this
message from being generated when the motor is at standstill.
8.1.9 Runtime monitoring

The monitoring logic observes the correspondence between the control outputs and the
response message inputs and outputs the actual state via QRUN and QSTOP. The monitoring
logic sets a monitoring error (QMON_ERR = 1) in the absence of feedback corresponding to
the control outputs once the configured monitoring time has elapsed. A monitoring error is also
set if the feedback changes without a request from the control outputs (a runtime error is also
generated after a wait time). The feedback inputs from the motor must be unique so that it can
be recognized whether the motor is running or at standstill.

If there is no feedback, monitoring must be deactivated with MONITOR = 0. When MONITOR

= 0, the feedback inputs have no effect. When the control outputs are set, the desired feedback
is accepted.
The feedback input for the actual speed of S7MotSpdC (SPEED_FB) is always evaluated
regardless of the MONITOR input. Monitoring of the speed is not performed, however.
The FAULT_OFF parameter defines the relevance of the monitoring error. If FAULT_OFF =
1, the motor is switched off in the event of an error. If FAULT_OFF = 0, the error has no effect
on the control outputs.
8.1.10 Motor protection

At the falling edge of the motor circuit breaker signal MSS, the motor circuit breaker error
QMSS_ST is set and stored. The parameter MSS_OFF is used to specify whether only an
indication takes place (MSS_OFF = 0) or whether the motor should be switched off (MSS_OFF
= 1). When the motor is switched off, the minimum time between two commands (MIN_CMD)
is not considered.

The motor circuit breaker error (QMSS_ST = 1) and the monitoring error (QMON_ERR = 1)
are reported to the OS and influence how the block functions. They can be reset either manually
via OS operation with RESET or automatically on a positive edge of L_RESET. The output
QRESET is set here for one cycle to acknowledge any additional devices. The process control
error QCSF is merely reported to the OS and applied to the group error QGR_ERR along with
the motor circuit breaker and monitoring errors. The process control error QCSF has no effect
on the block algorithm.
When an operator error occurs, the output QOP_ERR is set for one cycle without a message.
Startup after STOP in error status

The action taken depends on the operating mode which was set when the error was reset.
● The motor can restart after a reset in automatic mode if a corresponding start signal is
provided by the automatic system.
● In manual mode, the motor must be explicitly switched on, because manual operation was
adjusted to "OFF".
8.1.12 Bumpless switchover

To ensure bumpless switchover to manual operation, the manual control inputs (MAN_ON or
S1_ON, S2_ON, and MOT_OFF or REV_ON, FORW_SON, and MOT_OFF) are tracked in
automatic operation to the current automatic command.


No block processing takes place for the number of cycles parameterized on the input
RUNUPCYC.
At startup, the values of the inputs RUNTIME, RUNTOTAL, STOPTIME, and STARTCYC are
written to the outputs QRUNTIME, QRUNTOTAL, QSTOPTIME, and QSTARTCYC.
Operating mode, control inputs, and control outputs are not changed during startup. After
expiration of RUNUPCYC, processing starts with the available values. Whether the minimum
switching duration (MIN_CMD) must expire before a necessary switching procedure after
startup is determined by the current values of the RUNTIME and STOPTIME parameters.
Example
If the motor is to be switched on, a waiting period occurs until STOPTIME has reached at least
the value MIN_CMD. The same applies to switching off.

The blocks S7MotSpdC, S7Mot, S7MotSpd, and S7MotRev use the ALARM_DQ block to
generate messages.
The message is triggered by:
● Group error (QERR)

number ter
1 QMON_ERR Motor feedback error AS control system message -
fault
2 QMSS_ST Motor protection triggered AS control system message -
fault
3 QREPAIR Repair active AS control system message -
fault
4 QCSF External error occurred AS control system message -
fault
(program).
QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not finished running since the restart, or if

8.1.15 Availability
When motor control is possible in automatic mode, the output QAVAIL is set to TRUE. This is
the case under the following conditions.
● No local mode (QLOCAL = FALSE)
● No wait mode (QREPAIR = FALSE)
● Automatic mode (QMAN_AUT = TRUE)
● No interlock (LOCK = FALSE, LOCK_ON = FALSE)
● No external faults (QCSF = FALSE)
● Motor circuit breaker not tripped (QMST_ST = FALSE
● No runtime monitoring errors (QMON_ERR = FALSE)
8.1.16 Maintenance information

The blocks S7MotSpdC, S7Mot, S7MotSpd, and S7MotRev have the following inputs and
outputs for the operating hour counters and one output for preventive maintenance. The input
and the corresponding output always have the same value after startup.
Parameter Meaning
RUNTIME/QRUNTIME Number of operating hours since the last motor start
RUNTOTAL/QRUNTOTAL Number of operating days since the last total reset
STOPTIME/QSTOPTIME Number of hours in standstill since the last motor stop
STARTCYC/QSTARTCYC Number of start cycles since the last total reset
QPM_MSG = 1, if
RUNTOTAL/QRUNTOTAL > MAX_RUNTIME or
STARTCYC/QSTARTCYC > MAX_STARTCYC
The parameters can be reset with edge-triggered reset of the inputs to zero. The AS time is
written to the relevant input (DATE_TMR and DATE_TOT) as the time stamp for the reset.
Note
The AS time can differ from the OS- time.
Reset input Reset parameter

L_RESETMR, RESETMR RUNTIME/QRUNTIME
STOPTIME/QSTOPTIME
L_RESETOT, RESETOT RUNTOTAL/QRUNTOTAL
STARTCYC/QSTARTCYC

8.1.17 Anti-blocking function (ABS)

As one installation can include a number of motors but only one of these motors usually has
a standby function, this motor can be started periodically. The cycle time is parameterized in
days with the input ABS_PER. The runtime is specified in seconds with ABS_DUR on starting
up.
Once STOPTIME/QSTOPTIME reaches the value of ABS_PER, the motor is available
(QAVAIL = 1) and ABS_EN = 1, the following happens:
1. Motor is started.
2. Motor runs for the time ABS_DUR.
3. Motor is stopped.
During manual operation or in local mode, the motor is not started.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
FC67 S7ASTimeBCD
8.1.19.1 Views of motor blocks in general

All motor blocks have the views of runtime monitoring parameters and runtime parameters.
8.1.19.2 Motor blocks parameter view
(1) Run time monitoring

● Monitoring

8.1.19.3 Maintenance view of motor blocks in general
(1) Current run time

● Run time in hours
● Stop time in hours
● since in hours
● Reset
(2) Run time total
● Total days in days
● Startups
● since in hours
● Reset

8.2 S7Vlv - Valve control
8.2.1 Function

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7Vlv

The block is used to activate control valves (open/close fittings) with two control signals (open/
close). The neutral position of the valve can be the closed or open state. The two position
feedback signals (open/closed) can be monitored if required. The position feedback signals
are generated by limit switches.
8.2.2 Calling OBs

8.2.3 Time behavior

8.2.4 How it works

Various inputs are available for controlling the valve. They are implemented with hierarchical
interdependence in relation to one another and the states of the valve. Locking and feedback
monitoring in particular affect the control signals QOPEN and QCLOSE.
The allocation of priorities to the individual input variables and events with regard to their
influence on the control signal is shown in the following table. The sections following provide
further details.
Priority: Event:
High V_LOCK = 1
VL_CLOSE = 1
c VL_OPEN = 1
Monitoring error, if FAULT_SS = 1

Priority: Event:
Low Automatic/Manual mode
No effect Monitoring error, if FAULT_SS = 0
Control system fault, operator error
8.2.5 Neutral position

The position of rest of the controlled valve is signaled at input SS_POS (1: open, 0: closed).

The REMOTE input is used to select whether the valve is controlled locally (REMOTE = 0) or
from the control station (REMOTE = 1). In remote operation, the operating modes manual
(control of the valve via the OS) or automatic (control of the valve via the AS program) can be
selected. During local operation, the operating modes manual or automatic can be changed,
but valve control is only performed in remote operation as specified by the selected operating
mode.
Local operation
You can enable local operation by setting the REMOTE input to "0". You can set the mode for
local operation with the LOCAL_S mode variable (BOOL type).
The current manual or automatic command is output on switching back from local operation
to remote operation.
LOCAL_S = 0 1
Enable local operation CFC/SFC CFC/SFC
Operation in the faceplate Not possible Not possible
Tracking via an external input No Yes
Reaction of the block Adjustment of the feedback Monitoring of the feedback
value value
Interlock activated No Yes
● The control settings for the block are made based on internal adjustment of the feedback
value.
● The configured runtime monitoring of the block is deactivated.
● The configured interlock functions of the block are disabled.
In local mode with LOCAL_S=0, the current status of the valve is displayed on the OS if
feedback is available (MONITOR = TRUE; NO_FB_xx, NOMON_xx = FALSE).

● The control of the block is tracked by a connected input parameter (LOCAL_OP, for
example). The interconnected input parameter includes the control signal for the local
operator station on the system.
● The runtime monitoring of the block is effective in accordance with your configuration.
● The parameterized locking functionalities of the block are activated.
Control room mode

Switchover takes place either via OS operator control of AUT_ON_OP or via the
interconnection at the AUT_L input if the necessary enables are available. The set operating
mode is indicated at output QMAN_AUT (1: automatic, 0: manual).
Manual mode
Input MAN_OC is controlled via the OS. Enables (OP_OP_EN or CL_OP_EN) must be
available in order for operation to proceed.
Automatic mode
The control command is obtained via the input AUTO_OC (1: open, 0: close).
The connection must be made by means of interconnection to an automatic system.
8.2.7 Interlock
The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors. When V_LOCK
is set, the valve is placed in its neutral position. If V_LOCK is not set, a locking state (open/
closed) can also be selected directly via the inputs VL_OPEN and VL_CLOSE. The VL_CLOSE
signal locks VL_OPEN.

8.2.8 Monitoring
Monitoring logic is used to check correspondence between the control command output
QOPEN or QCLOSE and the feedback of the actual state of the valve (FB_OPEN, FB_CLOSE).
If the end position has not been reached after the monitoring time TIME_MON has expired or
if the feedback changes without reason, the output QMON_ERR is set. Setting the FAULT_SS
input restores the valve to the zero energy neutral position. If the FAULT_SS command is not
set, the command predefined by AUTO_OC or MAN_OC remains pending at outputs QOPEN /
QCLOSE. If no limit feedback signal is connected, a MONITOR = 0 signal must be output to
the monitoring function, which then assumes that the limit of the valve has been reached within
the time TIME_MON. Until the time TIME_MON has expired, QOPENING or QCLOSING is
displayed. In error-free monitoring mode, the outputs QOPENING or QCLOSING show the
valve opening/closing. The outputs QCLOSED and QOPENED show whether or not the valve
has reached the end position.
The inputs NO_FB_xx and NOMON_xx are used to parameterize whether no feedback is
available for the states "open" or "closed" (NO_FB_xx=1) or the available feedback (e.g., due
to failure of the end position switch) is not to be evaluated (NOMON_xx=1).
The FAULT_SS parameter defines the relevance of the monitoring error. If FAULT_SS = 1,
the valve is set to its neutral position (defined by SS_POS) in the event of an error.
FAULT_SS = 0 has no effect on the control outputs.
8.2.9 Bumpless switchover

In order to ensure bumpless switchover to manual mode, the manual value MAN_OC is always
tracked to the current value of AUTO_OC.
To ensure bumpless switchover when switching back from manual mode to remote mode,
MAN_OC is tracked on switchover to local mode.

an operator panel, the "S7PVlv" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.

It is possible to control the technological block from different operating levels. If the
[OP_ACTIVE] input is set, manual/automatic switchover is performed via the [OP_AUT_OC]
input, faults are reset via [OP_RESET], and manual control is via the [OP_MAN_OC]input.
The different operating levels are indicated by a project-specific enumeration type. For this
purpose, enumerations with the corresponding switch permissions have to be added to the
“Global Declarations” folder in the SIMATIC Manager. The value range of the elements of the
enumeration can be defined from 0 (no operating level available) up to 8. Higher values are
not evaluated.

technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PVlv".
Example
Select the units within the "Process object view", filter by "I/O Name" "*PERMIS" and assign
the corresponding type to all "enumerations".

The monitoring error (QMON_ERR = 1) is reported to the OS. It can be reset either by operator
control of RESET or automatically via a connection with the rising edge of L_RESET. The
process control error CSF is merely reported to the OS and applied to the group errors
QGR_ERR and QERR along with monitoring. If the message lock (MSG_LOCK or L_MSGLCK
= 1) is active, QERR is suppressed. The outputs have no further influence on the block
algorithm. Operator errors are indicated at output QOP_ERR without a message.

Following startup, the messages are suppressed (specified in the RUNUPCYC value for the
configured Zyklen).
Startup commences with the operating mode that was active prior to the stop state.
The input START_SS can be used to determine whether the valve assumes the safety position
during CPU startup (START_SS=1) and is thus switched to manual operation, or if the selected
command is to be executed.
8.2.14 Availability
When valve control is possible in automatic mode, the output QAVAIL is set to TRUE. This is
the case under the following conditions:
● No startup
● No interlock (V_LOCK = FALSE, VL_OPEN = FALSE, VL_CLOSE=FALSE)
● No runtime monitoring errors (QMON_ERR = FALSE)

The input for process control error CSF can be interconnected with an external error output.
The error is not evaluated. A group message is generated at the ALARM_DQ block. The QERR
output links all error outputs. If the message is locked, the QERR output is not set.


number ter
1 QMON_ERR Valve feedback error AS control system message -
fault
fault
The message can be locked centrally by means of:

● MSG_LOCK (OS operation)
● L_MSGLCK (program)
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT64 UDT_S7PVlv (UDT_OP_SVALVE)
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
V_LOCK BOOL IN 0 1=Lock to SAVE position
VL_OPEN BOOL IN 0 1=Lock to OPEN
VL_CLOSE BOOL IN 0 1=Lock to CLOSE
AUTO_OC BOOL IN 0 AUTO mode: 1=open, 0=close
SS_POS BOOL IN 0 Safe position. 1=open, 0=close
START_SS BOOL IN 0 1=Start with safe state position and manual mode
FAULT_SS BOOL IN 0 1=In case of fault: safe position
L_RESET BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input RESET
REMOTE BOOL IN 0 1=remote, 0=local
LOCAL_OP BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Open
LOCAL_CL BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Close
LOCAL_S BOOL IN 0 Local mode: 0=Track feedback, 1=Control


CSF BOOL IN 0 Control system fault 1=External error
FB_OPEN BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Open
FB_CLOSE BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Close
NO_FB_OP BOOL IN 0 1=No feedback OPEN present
NO_FB_CL BOOL IN 0 1=No feedback CLOSE present
MONITOR BOOL IN 1 Selection: 1=Monitoring ON, 0=Monitoring OFF
NOMON_OP BOOL IN 0 1=No monitoring OPEN
NOMON_CL BOOL IN 0 1=No monitoring CLOSE
OP_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Operator max input OPEN
CL_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Operator max input CLOSE
MANOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Operator max input MANUAL
AUTOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Operator max input AUTO
LIOP_SEL BOOL IN 0 Selection: 1=Linking , 0=Operation
L_MSGLCK BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable message lock
OP_RESET BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input reset error
OP_AUT_OC BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input mode 1=AUTO, 0=OP MAN‐
UAL
OP_MAN_OC BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Open valve
CMP_ID DWORD IN 0 Area code:BYTE:=16
RESET BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input error reset
MAN_OC BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Open, 0=Close
AUT_ON_OP BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input mode 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN_OUT 1 Enable 1=Messages locked
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 1=Alarm suppression


MSG_STAT1 WORD OUT 0 Message: Status output 1
MSG_STAT2 WORD OUT 0 Message: Status output 2
MSG_ACK1 BOOL OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE – output 1
MSG_ACK2 BOOL OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE – output 2
QMON_ERR BOOL OUT 1 1=Monitoring error
QGR_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1=Group error
QAVAIL BOOL OUT 0 1=Valve is available
QOPEN BOOL OUT 0 Control output: Open
QCLOSE BOOL OUT 0 Control output: Close
QMAN_AUT BOOL OUT 1 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for "OPEN"
QCL_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for "CLOSE"
QAUTOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for "AUTO"
QMANOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enabled for "MANUAL"
QOPENING BOOL OUT 0 1=Valve is opening
QOPENED BOOL OUT 0 1=Valve is open
QCLOSING BOOL OUT 0 1=Valve is closing
QCLOSED BOOL OUT 0 1=Valve is closed
QLOCAL BOOL OUT 1 1=Local, 0=Remote
QLOCAL_S BOOL OUT 0 Local mode
QSTATUS BYTE OUT 0 Status of valve
QOP_STAT STRUCT OUT 0 Panel status
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT Identifier for UDT_S7PVlv
QOP_STAT.QOP_RESET BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel reset
QOP_STAT.QOP_AUT_OC BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_STAT.QOP_MAN_OC BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Valve opening
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD OUT 0 Status for panel messages
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT DWORD OUT 0 Status for WinCC
Status word assignment for QOS_STAT parameter

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 2 -
Bit 3 Operator panel mode


Bit 4 Automatic mode
Bit 5 LIOP_SEL state
Bit 6 CSF
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Valve open
Bit 9 Valve closed
Bit 10 - Bit 11 -
Bit 12 Valve is opening
Bit 13 Valve is closing
Bit 14 Forced open
Bit 15 Forced close
Bit 16 SS_POS
Bit 16 - 22 -
Bit 23 Monitoring error (QMON_ERR)
Status word allocation for QSTATUS parameter

Bit 0 Available
Bit 1 -
Bit 2 Closed
Bit 3 Open
Bit 4 Startup done
Bit 5 – Bit 7 -
8.2.18.1 S7Vlv views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view

8.2.18.2 S7Vlv standard view
9 2
7 4
(1) Display and switching the operating mode

This area provides information on the operating mode currently in effect. The following
operating modes can be shown here:
● Manual
● Automatic
You can find additional information on the operating modes of the block in the section Operating
modes (Page 199)
(2) Open and close valve
This area shows you the default operating state for the motor. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● Open
● Closed
(3) Reset the block
Click "Reset" in the event of errors that require a reset.
● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● Open
● Closed

● Open -> Close

● Close - > Open
● Forced open
● Forced close
This area displays the active operating level of the block.
(9) Status display of valve
The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here:
● Green: Valve is open
● Gray: Valve is closed
● Red: A fault has occurred
8.2.18.3 S7Vlv parameter view
(1) Run time monitoring

● Monitoring
8.2.18.4 S7Vlv block icons

8.3 S7Mot - Single-stage motor
8.3.1 Function

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7Mot

S7Mot is used to control a single-stage motor.
8.3.2 Control outputs

The motor is started with the control outputs QON and stopped with QOFF.
8.3.3 Feedback
S7Mot has the feedback input FB_ON.
Parameter Effect
FB_ON = 1 Motor running
FB_ON = 0 Motor stopped
8.3.4 Monitoring times

The runtime monitoring time for switching on and off is specified in seconds at the TIME_MON
input.

an operator panel, the "S7PMot" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.


[OP_ACTIVE] input is set, manual/automatic switchover is performed via the [OP_AUTO_OC]
input, faults are reset via [OP_RESET], and manual control is via the [OP_SP]input.
If the local WinCC-Variable variable "@Permission" matches the value set for the operating
level at block parameter [PERMIS], the operator station is given switch permission.
are not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PMot".
Example
Select the units in the "process object view", filter by "I/O Name" "*PERMIS" and assign the
8.3.7 Called blocks
UDT62 UDT_S7PMot
8.3.8 Special block parameters

Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
LOCK BOOL IN 0 1=Lock to OFF
LOCK_ON BOOL IN 0 1=Lock to ON
AUTO_ON BOOL IN 0 Auto mode: 1=On, 0=Off
L_RESET BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input reset
L_RESETMR BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input reset counter
L_RESETOT BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input reset RUNTOTAL
MSS BOOL IN 0 Motor circuit breaker: 0=Active
FB_ON BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Motor running
REMOTE BOOL IN 0 1=Remote, 0=Local
LOCAL_ON BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=On
LOCAL_OF BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Off


REPAIR BOOL IN 0 1=Repair switch in maintenance position
ON_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch on
OFFOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch off
MANOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch to manual mode
AUTOP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch to automatic mode
MONITOR BOOL IN 1 1=MONITORING ON, 0=MONITORING OFF
FAULT_OFF BOOL IN 0 1=In case of fault: Motor OFF
MSS_OFF BOOL IN 0 1=In case of MCB fault: Motor OFF
MSG_LOCK BOOL IN 1 Message lock
ABS_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable anti-blocking system
ABS_PER REAL IN 0 Anti-blocking system activation period (days)
ABS_DUR REAL IN 0 Anti-blocking system activation duration (sec)
MAX_RUNT REAL IN 0 Maximum total run time before next preventive mainte‐
nance
MAX_STRT REAL IN 0 Maximum start cycles before next preventive maintenance
MIN_CMD REAL IN 0 Minimum time between start and stop
MSUP_TMR REAL IN 0 Number of seconds for which messages are suppressed
following startup
OP_AUT_ON BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input mode 1=AUTO, 0=OP MANUAL
OP_MAN_ON BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Start motor
BA_NA STRING[3 IN 1 Batch name
2]


STARTCYC REAL IN_OUT 1 Switching authority
RUNTIME REAL IN_OUT 1 Run time counter in hours
RUNTOTAL REAL IN_OUT 1 Cumulated run time counter in days
STOPTIME REAL IN_OUT 1 Stop time counter in hours
RESETMR BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input error reset counter
RESETOT BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input error reset RUNTOTAL
MAN_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start motor
DATE_TMR DWORD IN_OUT 1 Date of last counter reset
DATE_TOT DWORD IN_OUT 1 Date of last total reset
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QMSS_ST BOOL OUT 0 Unacknowledged motor circuit breaker
QRUN BOOL OUT 0 1=Motor running
QSTOP BOOL OUT 0 1=Motor stop
QON_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for ON
QOFF_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for OFF
QMAN_AUT BOOL OUT 1 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL mode
QMANOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for MANUAL
QAUTOP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for AUTO
QAVAIL BOOL OUT 0 1=Motor available
QREPAIR BOOL OUT 0 1=Repair switch in maintenance position


QABS_ON BOOL OUT 0 Anti-blocking system is enabled
QPM_MSG BOOL OUT 0 1=Preventive maintenance required
QM_SUP BOOL OUT 0 1=Message suppression after switchover
QON BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start motor
QOFF BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Stop motor
QRESET BOOL OUT 0 Reset motor
QSTATUS BYTE OUT 0 Status of control element
QSTARTCYC REAL OUT 0 Interconnectable: start cycles
QRUNTIME REAL OUT 0 Interconnectable run time counter in hours
QRUNTOTAL REAL OUT 0 Interconnectable cumulated run time counter in days
QSTOPTIME REAL OUT 0 Interconnectable stop time counter in hours
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMot
QOP_STAT.QOP_RESET BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel reset
QOP_STAT.QOP_AUT_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel: 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_STAT.QOP_MAN_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 2 Motor in maintenance
Bit 6 CSF
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Motor running
Bit 9 Motor idle
Bit 10 - Bit 11 -
Bit 12 Motor starting
Bit 13 Motor stopping
Bit 14 Forced on
Bit 15 Forced off
Bit 16 - Bit 21 -
Bit 22 Motor protection active (MSS)

8.3.9.1 S7Mot views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Maintenance view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
8.3.9.2 S7Mot standard view
6
2
5
(1) Display and switch the status

● Display and switchover of operating mode:
This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following
– Manual
– Automatic
● Starting and stopping the motor.
– Start
– Stop
● Reset the block
modes (Page 190)

● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● No connection
● Stop
● Start
● -> Start (Motor starting)
● -> Stop (Motor stopping)
● Forced start
● Forced stop
(7) Status display of motor
● Green: Motor running
● Gray: Motor idle
8.3.9.3 S7Mot block icons


8.4 S7MotRev - Reversing motor
8.4.1 Function

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7MotRev

Block S7MotRev is used to control a motor which can run in two different directions.

The motor is started with the control outputs QREV, QFORW with reverse and forward
directions. It is stopped with the control output QOFF.
8.4.3 Feedback
S7MotRev has the feedback inputs FB_ON_REV and FB_ON_FORW. When the motor is
running in reverse, FB_ON_REV = 1 is set; when the motor is running in forward,
FB_ON_FORW = 1 is set. If no feedback inputs are set, the motor will be at standstill. If both
feedback inputs are set, there will be no valid feedback.

input.
8.4.5 Control
The motor can be started in forward or reverse. When the motor is started in one direction,
changing direction is only possible once the time (MIN_CMD) has expired. Changing direction
is only possible via stop.
During the transition from forward to reverse, the QRUN output remains set to 1. The QRUN
output also remains set to 1 during the transition from reverse to forward (including when the
motor is switched off).

Manual mode
In manual mode, the block is started in reverse and forward with the REV_ON or FORW_SON
input; it is switched off with MOT_OFF. If one input is set, the other two are automatically reset
by the block.
Automatic mode
Starting and stopping the motor takes place in automatic mode with the AUTO_ON input. If
input AUTO_SPD = 0, the motor starts in forward. If AUTO_SPD = 1, the motor also starts in
forward and then switches to reverse once forward operation has been established.
Forced ON (LOCK_ON)
The direction is specified via the LOCK_SPD input.

an operator panel, the "S7PMotRev" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

[OP_ACTIVE] input is set, manual/automatic switchover is performed via the [OP_AUT_ON]
input, faults are reset via [OP_RESET], and manual control is via the [OP_MOT_OFF],
[OP_MANFORW], and [OP_MANREV] inputs.
are not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PMotRev".
Example
Select the units in the "process object view", filter by "I/O Name" "PERMIS" and assign the
8.4.8 Called blocks
UDT74 UDT_S7PMotRev

Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
LOCK_FORWREV BOOL IN 0 1=Left, 0=Right / Direction with LOCK_ON
AUTO_ON BOOL IN 0 Auto mode: 1=On, 0=Off
AUTO_FORWREV BOOL IN 0 1=Left, 0=Right / Auto mode
CSF BOOL IN 0 Control system error 1=External error
FB_ON_FORW BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Motor running in forward
FB_ON_REV BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Motor running in reverse
LOCAL_FW BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Forward
LOCAL_RE BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Reverse
LOCAL_OF BOOL IN 0 Local operation with LOCAL_S=1: 1=Off
FORW_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can start the motor in forward
REV_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can start the motor in reverse


nance
following startup
OP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Stop motor
OP_MANFORW BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Start motor in forward
OP_MANREV BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Start motor in reverse
2]
STARTCYC REAL IN_OUT 1 Start cycles
MOT_OFF BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Motor off
FORW_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start forward
REV_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start reverse
ENO BOOL OUT 0


QFORWREV BOOL OUT 1 1=forward 0=reverse
QFORW_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for forward
QREV_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for reverse
QFORW BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start forward
QC_QFORW BYTE OUT 0 Quality code control output start forward
QREV BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start reverse
QC_QREV BYTE OUT 0 Quality code control output start reverse
QC_QOFF BYTE OUT 0 Quality code control output stop motor


QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotRev
QOP_STAT.QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Motor stopped
QOP_STAT.QOP_FORW BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running forward
QOP_STAT.QOP_REV BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running reverse
QOP_STAT.QOP_RES_1 BOOL OUT 0 Reserve for external use

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 6 CSF
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Motor running in forward direction
Bit 9 Motor running in reverse direction
Bit 10 Motor idle
Bit 11 Motor starting in forward direction
Bit 12 Motor starting in reverse direction
Bit 14 Forced on
Bit 15 Forced off
Bit 16 - Bit 21 -

8.4.10.1 S7MotRev views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
8.4.10.2 S7MotRev standard view
6
2
5

– Manual
– Automatic
– Forward (Start >)
– Reverse (Start <)
– Stop
● Reset the block
modes (Page 190)


● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● No connection
● Start >
● Start <
● Stop
● -> Start > (Motor starting forwards)
● -> Start < (Motor starting in reverse)
● Forced start
● Forced stop
8.4.10.3 S7MotRev block icons

8.5 S7MotSpd - Two-stage motor
8.5.1 Function

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7MotSpd

Block S7MotSpd is used to control a motor which can run at two different speeds.

The motor starts with the control outputs QS1 and QS2 at speeds 1 and 2 and stops with
control ouput QOFF.
8.5.3 Feedback
S7MotSpd has the feedback inputs FB_ON_1 and FB_ON_2. When the motor is running at
speed 1, FB_ON_1 is set to 1. When the motor is running at speed 2, FB_ON_2 is set to 1. If
no feedback inputs are set, the motor will be at standstill. If both feedback inputs are set, there
will be no valid feedback.

input.
8.5.5 Control
The motor can be started at the speeds 1 and 2. For starting at speed 2, the motor is first
started at speed 1. The motor is not started at speed 2 until speed 1 has been reached and
the time between two control commands (MIN_CMD) has elapsed. It is possible to switch a
motor running at speed 1 directly to speed 2. If a motor running at speed 2 is to be decelerated
to speed 1, the motor is first switched off and then started again at speed 1.

During the transition from speed 1 to speed 2, the output QRUN remains set to 1. During the
transition from speed 2 to speed 1, QRUN also remains set to 1 (including when the motor is
switched off).
Manual mode
In manual mode, the block is started and switched off at speeds 1 and 2 with the SP1_ON,
SP2_ON, and MOT_OFF inputs. When one input is set, the other two are automatically reset
by the block.
Automatic mode
Starting and stopping the motor takes place in automatic mode with the AUTO_ON input. If
input AUTO_SPD = 0, the motor starts at speed 1. If input AUTO_SPD = 1, the motor also
starts at speed 1 and increases to speed 2 once this has been reached.
Forced on (LOCK_ON):
The speed is specified via the LOCK_SPD input.

an operator panel, the "S7PMotSpd" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

input, faults are reset via [OP_RESET], and manual control is via the [OP_MOT_OFF],
[OP_MANS1], and [OP_MANS2] inputs.
are not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PMotSpd".
Example
Select the units in the "process object view", filter by "I/O Name" "PERMIS" and assign the

8.5.8 Called blocks
UDT63 UDT_S7PMotSpd
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
LOCK_SPD BOOL IN 0 1=Fast, 0=Slow / Speed at LOCK_ON
AUTO_SPD BOOL IN 0 1=Fast, 0=Slow / Automatic mode
FB_ON_1 BOOL IN 0 Speed feedback: 1=Slow
FB_ON_2 BOOL IN 0 Speed feedback: 1=Fast
LOCAL_S1 BOOL IN 0 Local mode when LOCAL_S=1: 1=Slow
LOCAL_S2 BOOL IN 0 Local mode when LOCAL_S=1: 1=Fast
LOCAL_OF BOOL IN 0 Local mode when LOCAL_S=1: 1=Off
S1_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can input speed 1
S2_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can input speed 2


nance
following startup
OP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Stop motor
OP_MANS1 BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Start motor Speed1
OP_MANS2 BOOL IN 0 Panel input: 1=Start motor Speed2
2]


MOT_OFF BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Motor off
SP1_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start Speed1
SP2_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Start Speed2
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QSPEED BOOL OUT 1 1=Speed1 0=Speed2
QS1_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for Speed1
QS2_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator enable for Speed2
QS1 BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start speed 1
QS2 BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start speed 2


QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotSpd
QOP_STAT.QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Motor stopped
QOP_STAT.QOP_MANS1 BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running Speed1
QOP_STAT.QOP_MANS2 BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running Speed2

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 6 CSF
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Motor running at speed 1
Bit 9 Motor running at speed 2
Bit 10 Motor idle
Bit 11 Motor starting at speed 1
Bit 12 Motor starting at speed 2
Bit 14 Forced on
Bit 15 Forced off
Bit 16 - Bit 21 -


8.5.10.1 S7MotSpd views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
8.5.10.2 S7MotSpd standard view
6
2
5


– Manual
– Automatic
– Slow (Start >)
– Fast (Start >>)
– Stop
● Reset the block
modes (Page 190)
● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● No connection
● Start >
● Start >>
● Stop
● -> Start > (Motor starting speed slow)
● -> Start >> (Motor starting speed fast)
● Forced start
● Forced stop


8.5.10.3 S7MotSpd block icons

8.6 S7MotSpdC - Frequency-controlled motor
8.6.1 Function

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7MotSpdC

S7MotSpdC is used to switch a motor on and off and to specify its speed.

The motor is started with the control outputs QON and stopped with QOFF.
8.6.3 Feedback
S7MotSpdC has two separate inputs for the evaluation of feedback from the motor. When the
motor is running, FB_ON is set to 1. When the motor is at standstill, FB_ON is set to 0. If neither
of the two inputs or both inputs are set, valid feedback will not be recognized.
The feedback input for the actual speed of S7MotSpdC (SPEED_FB) is always evaluated
regardless of the MONITOR input. The speed is not monitored.

S7MotSpdC has a monitoring time for switching on (RTIME_MON) and for switching off
(STIME_MON).
8.6.5 Speed specification

Parallel to the staring of the motor with output QON, the speed setpoint value SPEED_SP is
written as a command to the QSPD_CMD output.
When the motor is to be switched off, QOFF is set and QSPD_CMD = 0.0 is output.
The actual speed of the motor is measured with input SPEED_FB and used to monitor the
limits MAX_SPD and MIN_SPD. If the actual value for the configured time MAX_SPD_TMR or
MIN_SPD_TMR is outside the associated limits MAX_SPD or MIN_SPD, the

QSPD_MAX_TMR or QSPD_MIN_TMR output is set at the block so that a downstream

automatic system can respond.
[SPEED_FB > MAX_SPD] ( for 0< t > MAX_SPD_TMR) = QSPD_MAX_TMR
[SPEED_FB < MIN_SPD] ( for 0< t > MIN_SPD_TMR) = QSPD_MIN_TMR
The motor block does not submit a message about this to the OS.
When SP_TrkFB is active, the SPEED_FB feedback is tracked as a setpoint in local mode.
When SP_TrkEx is active, the external setpoint is applied on switchover to an internal setpoint
in order to guarantee a bumpless switchover.

an operator panel, the "S7PMotSpdC _OP" block is installed in the CFC for the actual
technology block.

input, faults are reset via [OP_RESET], and manual control is via the [OP_MAN_ON]input.
block parameter [PERMIS], the operator station is given switch permission. The different
operating levels are indicated by a project-specific enumeration type. For this purpose,
enumerations with the corresponding switch permissions have to be added to the “Global
Declarations” folder in the SIMATIC Manager. The value range of the elements of the
not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PMotSpdC".
Example
8.6.8 Called blocks
UDT66 UDT_S7PmotSpdC

Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QC_MSS BYTE IN 0 Quality code motor circuit breaker
FB_ON BOOL IN 0 Feedback: 1=Motor running
QC_REMOTE BYTE IN 0 Quality code REMOTE
LOCAL_ON BOOL IN 0 Local mode when LOCAL_S=1: 1=On
LOCAL_OF BOOL IN 0 Local mode when LOCAL_S=1: 1=Off
ON_OP_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator can switch on
SPEED_FB REAL IN 0 Feedback speed


SPEED_SP REAL IN 0 Speed setpoint
SP_LiOp BOOL IN 0 Select setpoint source via 1 = interconnection, 0 = operator
SP_ExtOp BOOL IN 1 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator)
SP_IntOp BOOL IN 1 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator)
SP_ExtLi BOOL IN 0 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnection)
SP_IntLi BOOL IN 0 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnection)
SP_Int REAL IN 1 Internal setpoint for operation
SP_TrkFB BOOL IN 0 1 = Setpoint follows SPEED_FB in local mode
SP_TrkExt BOOL IN 0 1 = Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint
HYS REAL IN 0 Hysteresis for speed
RTIME_MON REAL IN 1 Monitoring time for ON [s]
STIME_MON REAL IN 1 Monitoring time for OFF [s]
nance
following startup
MAX_SPD REAL IN 0 Maximum speed
MIN_SPD REAL IN 0 Minimum speed
SPD_MIN_TMR REAL IN 0 Seconds before warning if running at minimum speed
SPD_MAX_TMR REAL IN 0 Seconds before warning if running at maximum speed
2]


MAN_ON BOOL IN_OUT 1 Operator input: 1=Motor on
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QON_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator is permitted to switch on
QOFF_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator is permitted to switch off
QON BOOL OUT 0 Control output 1=Start motor


QSPD_MIN_TMR BOOL OUT 0 1=Running at minimum speed for x hours >
MIN_SPD_TMR
QSPD_MAX_TMR BOOL OUT 0 1=Running at maximum speed for x hours >
MAX_SPD_TMR
OS_PermOut DWORD OUT 0 Display of operator permissions OS_Perm
OS_PermLog DWORD OUT 0 Operator permissions with settings changed by the block
algorithm
LocAuthAct BOOL OUT 0 Local authorization active
QSPD_CMD REAL OUT 0 Speed command
SP REAL OUT 0 Active setpoint as calculated and used by controller
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotSpdC
QOP_STAT.QOP_MAN_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running
Status1 DWORD OUT 0 Status word 1, defined in the online help
Status2 DWORD OUT 0 Reserved
Status3 DWORD OUT 0 Reserved

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 6 CSF
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Motor running
Bit 9 Motor idle
Bit 10 - Bit 11 -


Bit 12 Motor starting
Bit 14 Forced on
Bit 15 Forced off
Bit 16 - Bit 21 -
8.6.10.1 S7MotSpdC views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
8.6.10.2 S7MotSpdC standard view
9
1
3
8
7
4
6


– Manual
– Automatic
– Start
– Stop
modes (Page 190)
(2) Display and switch the setpoint
● Switch the setpoint internal/external
This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
– Using the application (“Automatic”)
– By the user directly in the faceplate (“Manual").
● Display and change the setpoint
This area shows the current setpoint. To change the setpoint, the setpoint specification for
this block needs to be set to “Manual".
● Display the readback value
This area shows you the currently valid readback value.
(3) Reset the block
● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● Maintenance
● Start

● Stop
● -> Start (Motor starting)
● Forced start
● Forced stop
8.6.10.3 S7MotSpdC block icons
Multi-instance block icons for use with the S7MV3P block

Some user-defined objects of the S7MotSpdC block are 1 – 4 multi-instances when called via
the block icons, which means that objects in a CFC can be operated simultaneously from a
multi-instance faceplate. The advantage is that it is not necessary to configure an OS user
object for every operator-controlled object in a CFC. To interconnect these objects
automatically using the Dynamic Wizard, the following condition must be met: The block name
in the CFC must match the configured name of the user object.
This condition applies for the following blocks:
Multi-instance user object for Basic block in CFC Operator panel block in CFC
S7MV3P LMN3P LMN3P_OP
S7MotSpdC VSD VSD_OP

Changing the block name causes the faceplate to malfunction.

The standard view of the S7MotSpdC block shows the values SP and MV of the S7MV3P block
in the multi-instance faceplate version.
Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special characteristics

1
2 Reverse direction indicator for

icon 1

icon 3
Separate block icons for detached usage

The S7MotSpdC block can also be used without a connection to the S7MV3P block. Block
icons 5 to 8 are provided for this purpose.
Faceplates that are called with the block icons 5 to 8, show the values SPEED_SP and
SPEED_FB of the S7MotSpdC block in the standard view.
Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special characteristics

5

icon 5

icon 7

8.7 S7MV3P -3-point final controlling element
8.7.1 Function
Area of application for S7MV3P

The block controls a final controlling element via the inputs "Up" (QCTRL_UP) and "Down"
(QCTRL_DN).

Family: Drives
8.7.2 Calling OBs

8.7.3 Time behavior


Two different modes are supported: remote (REMOTE = 1, QLOCAL = 0) and local (REMOTE
= 0, QLOCAL = 1).
During remote operation, the block can be switched between manual operating mode
(QMAN_AUT = 0) and automatic operating mode (QMAN_AUT = 1). Switchover can be locked
separately (MANOP_EN = 0 or AUTOP_EN = 0).
During local operation, no operator control is possible. When switching from local operation to
remote operation, the previous operating mode then becomes active.
8.7.5 Neutral position

The idle position of the controlled valve is signaled to the block at input SS_POS (1: open / SP
= 100%, 0: Closed / SP = 0%).


The final controlling element is to traverse towards the setpoint when enabled (EN_LMN =
TRUE). The position feedback PV is compared with the active setpoint SP.
If the absolute value of the control deviation (PV - SP) is greater than or equal to the LIMPULSE
parameter, the corresponding control output is set statically. If the deviation is less than
LIMPULSE, pulses with a pulse duration for ON = PULSE_ON and OFF= PULSEOFF are
output until the setpoint +/- hysteresis for positioning (HYS_POS) is reached. When the setpoint
+/- hysteresis for runtime monitoring (HYS) is reached, the Q_SP_OK output is set.
Runtime monitoring is performed when input MONITOR = TRUE.
If the LOCK input is set, the final controlling element is moved to the safe position (SS_POS),
regardless of operating mode.
8.7.7 Setpoint
In manual operating mode, the operator setpoint SP_OP is active. If SP_OP_ON = 1, the
setpoint can be controlled. In automatic operating mode, the SPEXON_L input is used to select
whether the internal setpoint SP_INT (SPEXON_L = 0) or the external setpoint SP_EXT
(SPEXON_L = 1) is to be used. The operator setpoint is updated.
The setpoint is limited by an upper limit (QSP_HLM) and a lower limit (QSP_LLM). The limits
can be manipulated. QSP_HLM is specified with SP_HLM. If final controlling element is not
enabled, QSP_LLM (EN_LMN = FALSE) = 0. Otherwise, it is equal to the low limit SP_LLM.
In LOCK status, the operator setpoint is not updated unless the input TRK_LOCK is set.

an operator panel, another "S7PMV3P" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

input and the setpoint is specified with the OP_SP input.
block parameter [PERMIS], the operator station is given switch permission. The different
operating levels are indicated by a project-specific enumeration type. For this purpose,
enumerations with the corresponding switch permissions have to be added to the “Global
Declarations” folder in the SIMATIC Manager. The value range of the elements of the
not evaluated.
technological blocks, as well as to the OP interface block "S7PMV3P".

Example
8.7.10 Error handling / Message behavior

The error is not evaluated.
The QERR output links all error outputs. If the message is locked, it is not set.

number ter
1 QMON_ERR Feedback error AS control system message -
fault
fault
(program).

The RUNUPCYC parameter can be used to set how long (number of cycles) the control outputs
are to remain disabled and the messages are to be suppressed.
Startup is not concluded until the SP_RSTRT input, which is supplied by the SplitRange block,
is also reset.
Startup can be simulated with input RESTART.
8.7.12 Availability
When control of the control command is possible in automatic mode, the output QAVAIL is set
to TRUE. This is the case under the following conditions.
● No interlock (LOCK = FALSE)

Availability / Setpoint limits for S7SPLITRANGE

Contrary to the conditions described above, availability is always given for controlled operation.
In manual mode, local mode, interlock, or in the event of an external error, the setpoint limits
are adjusted to the current setpoint.
The value of the GRAD input is transferred to the S7Splitrange via the output structure QSPLIT
(QSPLIT.GRAD). The value has no effect on the operation of the S7MV3P block.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT52 UDT_S7SPLITRANGE
UDT65 UDT_S7PMV3P
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
EN_LMN BOOL IN 1 1=Enable LMN
SP_RSTRT BOOL IN 0 Split range in restart
LOCK BOOL IN 1 1=Locked
SS_POS BOOL IN 0 Safe position: 1=Open, 0=Close
SP_OP_ON BOOL IN 0 Enable: 1=Operator: setpoint input
SPEXON_L BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input to select SP_EXT
INV BOOL IN 0 1=LMN inverted
TRK_LOCK BOOL IN 0 1=Let SP_OP equal PV_IN, if locked
LIMIT_OP BOOL IN 1 1=Limits enabled for operator


PV_IN REAL IN 0 Process value
SP_EXT REAL IN 0 External setpoint
SP_INT REAL IN 0 Internal setpoint
LIMPULSE REAL IN 0 Limit for small pulses
PULSE_ON REAL IN 0 Time for pulse on in [s]
PULSEOFF REAL IN 0 Time for pulse off in [s]
FU BOOL IN 1 Symbol in faceplate 1=FU, 0=MV3P
OP_SP REAL IN 0 Operator panel input setpoint
2]
SP_OP REAL IN_OUT 1 Operator input setpoint
SP_HLM REAL IN_OUT 1 Setpoint high limit
SP_LLM REAL IN_OUT 1 Setpoint low limit
HYS REAL IN_OUT 1 Hysteresis
HYS_POS REAL IN_OUT 1 Hysteresis for positioning
GRAD REAL IN_OUT 1 Gradient
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QCTRL_UP BOOL OUT 0 Control output: 1=Up
QCTRL_DN BOOL OUT 0 Control output: 1=Down
QINV BOOL OUT 0 1=LMN inverted
Q_SP_OK BOOL OUT 0 1=Setpoint reached


QSPEXTON BOOL OUT 1 AUTO setpoint: 1=External, 0=Internal mode
Q_SP_OP BOOL OUT 1 Status: 1=Operator can enter manual setpoint
QAVAIL BOOL OUT 0 1=LMN available
PV REAL OUT 1 Process value
SP REAL OUT 1 Setpoint
QSP_HLM REAL OUT 1 Active setpoint high limit
QSP_LLM REAL OUT 1 Active setpoint low limit
QGRAD REAL OUT 1 Gradient
QSPLIT STRUCT OUT 0 Status for split range
QSPLIT.SP_HLM REAL OUT 0
QSPLIT.SP_LLM REAL OUT 0
QSPLIT.GRAD REAL OUT 0
QSPLIT.STATUS BYTE OUT 0
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMV3P
QOP_STAT.QOP_AUT_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_STAT.QOP_SP REAL OUT 0 Status panel setpoint
QOP_STAT.QSP_HLM REAL OUT 0 Active setpoint high limit
QOP_STAT.QSP_LLM REAL OUT 0 Active setpoint low limit
Status word assignment for the QSTATUS parameter

Bit 0 Available
Bit 1 Inverted


Bit 2 Closed (PV <= QSP_LLM + HYS)
Bit 3 Open (PV > QSP_LLM + HYS)
Bit 4 Startup done
Bit 5 – Bit 7 -
Status word assignment for the QOS_STAT parameter

Bit 0 Local mode
Bit 1 Manual mode
Bit 2 -
Bit 6 FU
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 Open (PV >= QSP_HLM - HYS)
Bit 9 Closed (PV <= QSP_LLM + HYS)
Bit 10 - > Opening
Bit 11 -> Closing
Bit 12 Control + (describes the behavior of the block and refers to the INV input)
Bit 13 Control - (describes the behavior of the block and refers to the INV input)
Bit 14 Forced open
Bit 15 Forced close
Bit 16 Stop
Bit 17 - Bit 22 -
Status word assignment for the QSPLIT.STATUS (partial) parameter

Bit 2 Closed (SP <= HYS_POS)
Bit 3 Open (SP > HYS_POS)

8.7.15.1 S7MV3P views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Trend view
● Parameter view
● Batch view
8.7.15.2 S7MV3P standard view
MV3P (FU = 0) view
1
8
2
7
4 3
(1) Display and switch the operating mode and manipulated variable
● Display and switch the operating mode:
– Manual
– Automatic
● Display the manipulated variable:
This area shows how to specify the manipulated variable. The setpoint can be specified as
follows:
– Auto external
– Auto internal
– Internal
modes (Page 190)

(2) Manipulated variable and readback value

● Display and change the manipulated variable
This area shows the current manipulated variable. To change the manipulated variable,
the operating mode for this block needs to be set to “Manual".
● Fault
● Remote
● Local
● Fault
● Open
● Closed
● Open -> Close
● Close - > Open
● Forced open
● Forced close
(8) Status display of valve
The current status of the valve is graphically displayed here:
● Green: Valve is open
● Gray: Valve is closed
● Green/white: Valve stopped

FU (FU = 1) view
1
11
2
4
10
9
5
8
7 6
● Display and switch the operating mode:

– Manual
– Automatic
● Switch the manipulated variable
This area shows how to specify the manipulated variable. The setpoint can be specified as
follows:
– Auto external
– Auto internal
– Internal
(2) Manipulated variable and manipulated variable
● Display and change the manipulated variable
This area shows the current manipulated variable. To change the manipulated variable,
the operating mode for this block needs to be set to “Manual".
● Fault
● Remote
● Local


● Fault
● Open
● Closed
● Open -> Close
● Close - > Open
● Forced open
● Forced close
(8) Status display of frequency converter
● Green: Frequency converter started
● Gray: Frequency converter stopped
8.7.15.3 S7MV3P parameter view
(1) Setpoint
● High limit in percent
● Low limit in percent
(2) Slope
● Slope in percent

(3) Monitoring
● Monitoring enabled
(4) Hysteresis
● Positioning in percent
● Monitoring in percent
8.7.15.4 S7MV3P block icons

The OS Typicals are represented by an appropriately assigned technological icon (flap, motor,
valve, etc.) and an analog indicator for the current manipulated variable.

8.8 S7VlvMot - Control of motor valve
8.8.1 S7VlvMot description

Family: Drives
Area of application for S7VlvMot

The block is used for the following applications:
● Motor valve control
How it works
Various operating modes are available for controlling the motor-driven valve. This functionality
allows you to set specific valve states. All changes of modes or states and faults occurring in
this context are monitored, visualized in the faceplate and reported to the operator. Operators
with suitable permissions can use the block icon and the faceplate to view the current states
and operate the motorized valve.
Configuration
Install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (such as OB32) in the CFC Editor. The block is also
installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
Use the Feature Bit startup characteristics to define the startup characteristics of this block.
Following startup, the messages are suppressed for the number of cycles configured in the
RunUpCyc parameter.
After a startup without control (Open, Close = 0)", no monitoring of the feedback signals
FbkOpen and FbkClose takes places during the V_MonTiStatic time. Changes to
FbkOpen and FbkClose are applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again even
in the stop state.
Status word assignment for the Status1 parameter

0 Occupied
1 BatchEn


2 Vibrate enabled
3 OosAct
4 OosLi
5 AutoAct
6 LocalAct
7 0: Open padlock in block icon
1: Closed padlock in block icon
8 Open
9 Motor is stopped
10 Close
11 Torque shutoff enabled (TorqOpen or TorqClose = 1)
12 WarnAct or
IdleTimeactive
13 Feedback error without control change
14 Feedback error due to control change
15 Mode Switch Fail
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip
20 OpenForce
21 StopForce
22 CloseForce
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 0 = Display neutral position "Closed"
1 = Display neutral position "Closed"
25 1 = Display neutral position "Stop"
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Bypass enabled (BypProt = 1) and Local.Act = 1
28 Invalid signal status
29 0 = Closed
1 = Open
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

0 MsgLock
1 Vibrate successfully completed – Reset required
2 MonStaErr or MonDynErr
3-9 Not used


10 MV_TrkOn
11 Torque shutoff open enabled
12 Torque shutoff closed enabled
13 - 18 Not used
19 1 = Input signals have no impact on "Local" mode when LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 1 = Valve closes
21 1 = Valve closed
22 1 = Valve stopped
23 1 = Valve opens
24 1 = Valve open
25 For the status display error in Valve closed
26 For the status display error in Valve open
27 Automatic preview for "Open"
28 Automatic preview for "Close"
29 Automatic preview for "Stop"
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 Motor in maintenance

0 M_MonStaErr
1 M_MonDynErr
2 V_MonStaErr
3 V_MonDynErr
4 MonStaErr
5 MonDynErr
6 ER_AH_Act
7 ER_AH_Act
8 Reset request in automatic
9 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature bit 18 Error status enabled by external process control error CSF
10 RbkWH_Act
11 RbkWH_Act
12 RbkWL_Act
13 RbkWH_En
14 ER_AH_En
15 ER_AL_En
16 ER_AH_MsgEn
17 - 18 Not used
19 1 = Enable for "Rapid stop" (Feature Bit Enable rapid stop via faceplate)
20 RbkWL_En


21 RbkWH_MsgEn
22 RbkWL_MsgEn
23 Command for "rapid stop"
24 "Open" command output
25 "Close" command output
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 1 = Analog operating mode enabled (Feature bit 13 set)
28 GrpErr
29 RdyToStart
30 - 31 Not used
8.8.2 S7VlvMot operating modes
S7VlvMotL operating modes

The block supports all standard operating modes:
● Local mode
● Automatic mode
● Manual mode
● Out of service
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.
"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and bumpless switchover
in the Local mode section. For more information see the APL Function Manual.
You can control the following motor valve actions in "Local mode"
● "Open" (OpenLocal = 1)
● "Close" (CloseLocal = 1)
● "Stop" (StopLocal = 1).
A block operated in "Local mode" is controlled either by "Local" signals or by feedback signals
(input parameters FbkOpen and FbkClose; if no position can be assigned, the last valid
position is applied). You can configure the LocalSetting input parameter accordingly.
"Automatic" mode
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers. For more
information see the APL Function Manual.

You can control the following motor valve actions in "Automatic" mode:
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)
● "Stop" (StopAut = 1)
"Manual" mode
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers. For more
You can control the following motor valve actions in "Manual" mode:
With Feature.Bit13 = 0:
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)
● "Stop" (StopMan = 1)
With Feature.Bit13 = 1:
● Open / Close or Stop via the MV_Int input
"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service section.
For more information see the APL Function Manual.
8.8.3 S7VlvMot functions
S7VlvMot functions
The functions for this block are listed below.
Operator authorizations
This block provides the standard function, operator authorizations. For more information, refer
to the APL Function Manual.
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:
Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "Automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "Manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode

Bit Function
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can open the valve
6 1 = Operator can close the valve
7 1 = Operator can reset the valve
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the valve startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the valve run time
10 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time of the valve (Bit 8 - 9)
11 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the motor startup
12 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the motor run time
13 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring time function for the motor (bits 11 - 12)
14 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
15 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the run time
16 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (bits 14 - 15)
17 - 18 Not used
19 1 = Operator can change the limit for the hysteresis
20 - 23 Not used
24 1 = Operator can activate the message lock
25 1 = Operator can reset the current run time
26 1 = Operator can reset the total run time
27 - 30 Not used
31 Reserved
The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:
Bit Function
0-6 Not used
7 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
8-9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can change the high operating limit of the manipulated variable MV_HiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the low operating limit of the manipulated variable MV_LoLim
12 - 19 Not used
20 1 = Operator can enable manipulated variable tracking in "Manual mode" MV_TrkRbk
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal MV_TrkExt
22 - 25 Not used
26 1 = Operator can change the limit (control error) for the high alarm ER_AH_Lim
27 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (control error) ER_Hyst
28 1 = Operator can change the limit (control error) for the low alarm ER_AL_Lim
29 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) for the high warning RbkWH_Lim
30 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
31 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) for the low warning RbkWL_Lim

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm or OS1Perm as a parameter,
you have to reset the corresponding OS_Perm or OS1Perm bit.
Analog or binary operation

The block offers two operating modes. Binary and analog. You can set the operating mode
using Feature.Bit13 analog signal input. If the bit is not set, binary operating mode is
enabled.
● Binary mode:
In binary mode, the motor valve can be operated with the Open, Close, Stop and Rapid stop
keys.
● Analog mode:
In analog mode, the motor can be set to the desired position using the manipulated variable
(MV). The valve opens or closes pulsating (outputs P_Open, P_Close and P_Stop) until MV
is equal to Rbk (+ / - RbkHyst). The pulse / pause ratio can be adjusted in seconds using the
PulseWidth and PauseWidth inputs.
In manual mode, the block can also be controlled in analog mode via keys. In this case, clicking
Open sets MV = MV_HiLim, clicking Close sets MV = Lo_Lim, and clicking Stop sets MV =
Rbk.
The control deviation (MV – RbkOut) is made available at the ER output. If ER is <= ER_Hyst,
ER = 0.0 is set.
The manipulated variable can be read in from various inputs. In automatic mode, the external
manipulated variable (MV_Ext) is used, in manual mode the internal manipulated variable
(MV_Int) is used, and in local mode (with LocalSetting = 1 or LocalSetting = 3), the
local manipulated variable (MV_Local) is used. The manipulated variable currently in use is
displayed at the MV output. The manipulated variable is limited by the limit pair MV_HiLim
and MV_LoLim.
The MV_TrkOn input enables tracking of the manipulated variable MV. If MV_TrkRbk = 1,
RbkOut is tracked to MV. If MV_TrkRbk = 0, MV_Trk is tracked to MV and MV_Int.
The input MV_TrkExt = 1 is used to write back the external manipulated variable (MV_Ext)
to the internal manipulated variable (MV_Int) and thereby enables bumpless switchover from
automatic mode to manual mode.
Restart lock after changing direction of rotation or switching off the motor
Use the input parameter IdleTime to enter a restart lock for changing the direction of rotation
or restarting the motor. When the "Stop" command is given, the motor goes immediately into
"Stop" mode and IdleTime starts after the feedback (FbkOpening and FbkClosing = 0).
The motor cannot be started again (open or close) until the IdleTime has expired.

Suppress messages using the MsgLock parameter

This block includes the standard function Suppress messages using the MsgLock parameter.
For more information, refer to the APL Function Manual.
Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the Interlocks section for more information. For more information, refer to the APL
Function Manual.
Motor protection function

This block provides the standard function, Motor protection function. For more information,
refer to the APL Function Manual.
Rapid stop for motors

This block provides the standard function, Rapid stop for motors. For more information, refer
Torque monitoring
The block provides torque monitoring.
The signals of the torque monitoring switches are interconnected to input parameters
TorqOpen for opening and TorqClose for closing the motor valve.
The Good state is indicated with the value 1 for this parameter .
Using Feature.Bit23 (Vibrate), you can define how to proceed in automatic mode when
the torque has been reached.
Vibration disabled or not automatic mode:

If the torque monitoring is enabled, the motor is stopped. You then have the option of moving
the valve in the opposite direction.
If, for example, the torque shutoff is enabled when the valve opens, you can still close the
valve.
Active torque shutoff appears in the standard view of the display area for block states.
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled via Feature.Bit8 , the torque shutoff for the
closing TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Seal valve).
Vibration enabled and automatic mode:

If torque monitoring is enabled, the motor runs in the opposite direction. After travelling
VibrWidth seconds or VibrPerc %, the motor runs in the opposite direction again to solve

the cause of the torque shutoff by means of vibration. This procedure is repeated a maximum
of VibrNo times.
In analog mode (Feature.Bit13 = 1), the motor runs VibrPerc % in the opposite
direction. In binary mode (Feature.Bit13 = 0) VibrWidth seconds.
If torque shutoff is enabled for opening the valve in analog mode, for example, the motor valve
returns to a value of
RbkOut - ((MV_HiLim - MV_LoLim) / 100.0 x VibrPerc)
. When this point is reached, the motor attempts to open to the previously set manipulated
variable once again.
During reversing, the display area of the standard view "Vibrate enabled" is displayed.
After attempting to overcome the cause of the torque VibrNo times, the motor is stopped. The
block must be reset before vibrating can be enabled again.
Seal valve
This function is enabled using Featurebit 8 Seal valve. The seal valve function combines
the query of the end position CLOSED via the input parameter FbkClose with the limit violation
of the configured torque via the input parameter TorqClose. This ensures that the valve is
sealed absolutely tight.
The valve is only considered completely sealed when the feedback of the end position
CLOSED (0->1) and the torque shutoff for closed are enabled. The torque shutoff should not
come before the feedback in this case. The FbkCloseOut output shows whether the valve is
sealed tight:
FbkCloseOut := FbkClose.Value comes in (0->1)

And "Torque shutoff closed is enabled"
And "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" did not come before FbkClose (0->1)
"Torque shutoff closed is enabled" means TorqClose = 0.
When "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" comes before the end position feedback closed, this
is displayed in the faceplate in the standard view and the motor stops. Opening the valve is
still possible.
Anti-blocking system enabled (ABS)

Since more than one motor valve can run in the system and one of these only has a standby
function, it is possible to start the standby motor valve periodically. The time period is set in
days with the ABS_Per input.
Requirements:
● Feature.Bit7 Enable anti-blocking system is set
● S7VlvMot is in automatic mode
● NoFbkOpen = 0 and NoFbkClose = 0
● FbkOpen = 1 or FbkClose = 1
If Stoptime / StoptimeOut has reached the value of ABS_Per and the requirements are
met, the following happens.

If S7VlvMot is closed (FbkClose = 1):

● Motor is started to open the motor valve
● Motor runs until FbkOpen = 1
● Motor is stopped
● Motor is started to close the motor valve
● Motor runs until FbkClose = 1
● Motor is stopped
If S7VlvMot is open (FbkOpen = 1) and ABS_Per is reached, the same happens in reverse
direction.
Maintenance information
The S7VlvMot block has the following inputs and outputs for the operating hour counter and
an output for preventive maintenance. The input and the corresponding output always have
the same value after startup.
Parameter Meaning
Runtime / RuntimeOut Number of operating hours since the last motor start
Runtotal / RuntotalOut Number of operating days since the last total reset
Stoptime / StoptimeOut Number of hours in standstill since the last motor stop
Startcyc / StartcycOut Number of start cycles since the last total reset
PM_Msg = 1, if
Runtotal / RuntotalOut > MaxRunt or
Startcyc / StartcycOut > MaxStart
The parameters can be reset with edge-triggered reset of the inputs to zero. The AS time at
the respective DateTmr and DateTot input is entered as the time stamp for the reset.
Note
The AS time can deviate from the OS time.
Reset input Reset parameter

RstTmrOp, RstTmrLi Runtime / RuntimeOut
Stoptime / StoptimeOut
RstTotOp, RstTotLi Runtotal / RuntotalOut
Startcyc / StartcycOut
Disable interlocks
This block provides the standard function, Disable interlocks. For more information, refer to
the APL Function Manual.

Reset the block in case of interlocks

This block provides the standard function, Reset the block with interlocks or errors. For more
information, refer to the APL Function Manual.
Group error
This block includes the standard function, Group error. For more information, refer to the APL
Function Manual.
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● V_MonDynErr
● V_MonStaErr
● M_MonDynErr
● M_MonStaErr
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
Output a signal for ready to start

This block provides the standard function, Output a signal for ready to start. For more
Form the group status for interlocks

This block provides the standard function, Form group status for interlock information. For
more information, refer to the APL Function Manual.
Force operating states

This block provides the standard function, Force operating modes. For more information, refer
to the APL Function Manual. The inputs OpenForce, CloseForce and StopForce force the
block to open, close or stop.
Monitor the feedback signals

This block provides the standard function, Feedback monitoring. For more information, refer
The FbkOpen and FbkClose feedback signals are monitored for the valve; the
FbKOpening and FbkClosing feedback signals are monitored for the motor.
The monitoring of the feedback for the valve is not enabled if it was stopped during opening
or closing.

Monitor valve feedback

The monitoring of valve feedback is set using the V_Monitor parameter.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting the V_MonTiDynamic parameter; the
V_MonTiStatic parameter monitors compliance with the position.
Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters, V_MonDynErr or
V_MonStaErr.
Note
After the motor valve stops in the intermediate position or end position or after a startup without
control (Open, Close = 0), no monitoring of the feedback signals FbkOpen and FbkClose
takes place during the time V_MonTiStatic. Changes to FbkOpen and FbkClose are
applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again even in stop state.
Note
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled by means of Feature bit 8, the torque shutoff for the
closing TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Seal valve).
Monitor the motor feedback

The monitoring of motor feedback is set using the M_Monitor parameter.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting the M_MonTiDynamic parameter; the
M_MonTiStatic parameter monitors compliance with the position.
Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters, M_MonDynErr or
M_MonStaErr.
Specify warning times for control functions

This block provides the standard function, Specify warning times for motors and valves.
You can generate warning signals when, for example, valves open. Warning signals can be
generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (WarnTiMan input parameter)
● Automatic mode (WarnTiAut input parameter)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a valve opens, this is displayed at the output parameter with
WarnAct = 1. The valve then opens after the set warning time has expired and WarnAct then
returns to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the values specified for the warning times
(WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are lower than the SampleTime parameter.
Note
The warning is activated for each actuation that causes the motor to start, even if this means
that the valve is moved to the neutral position.

Select a unit of measure

This block provides the standard function, Select a unit of measure. For more information, refer
Neutral position
This block provides the standard function, Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers.
For more information, refer to the APL Function Manual.
Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal

This block provides the standard function, Output signal as static signal or pulse signal. For
more information, refer to the APL Function Manual. In addition to the static control outputs
Open and Close the block also has pulse outputs P_Open, P_Close and P_Stop, which are
dependent on the static control output.
Generate instance-specific messages

This block provides the standard function, Generate instance-specific messages. For more

The following characteristics are available for this block at the relevant bits:
Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics
1 Characteristics for the out of service mode
2 Reset the commands for switching the operating mode
3 Enable reset of commands for control
4 Set switch or button mode
7 Anti-blocking system enabled (ABS)
8 Seal valve
9 Reset via input signals in the event of interlocking (protection) or errors
10 Exit local mode
11 Enable run time for feedback signals
12 Motor feedback is not available
13 Enable analog operating mode
14 Enable rapid stop via faceplate
15 - 16 Not assigned
17 Enable bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors and dosers
18 Enable error status for external process control error CSF
19 Reset even with locked state
20 Not assigned
21 Enable bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors and dosers
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call

Bit Function
23 Enable vibrate function
24 Enable local operator authorization
25 Suppress all messages
26 Characteristics of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4
28 Disabling switching points
29 Signal at limit violation
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter
31 Enable reset of interlocks in manual mode
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals OpenAut and
CloseAut. If the OpenAut and CloseAut inputs are not set, the motor is stopped. Control
via StopAut is not required. If the "Enable command reset for control" function is also enabled
(Bit 3 = 1), the OpenAut and CloseAut inputs are reset to 0 after evaluation in the block.
SIMATIC BATCH functionality

This block provides the standard function, SIMATIC BATCH functionality. For more
Disable feedback
This block provides the standard function, Disable feedback for valves. For more information,
refer to the APL Function Manual. Feedback monitoring can be disabled separately for each
feedback with NoFbkOpen or NoFbkClose as required.
Repair switch
This block has the repair switch function. When the repair switch is enabled (Repair = 1), the
valve is forced into the neutral position.
8.8.4 S7VlvMot error handling
S7VlvMot error handling

Refer to the Troubleshooting section in the basic instructions to learn how to handle errors for
all blocks. For more information, refer to the APL Function Manual.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit from 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 OpenLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
CloseLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
OpenAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
CloseAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
CloseForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
Mode switchover error

This error can be output by the block, see the Troubleshooting section. For more information,
Invalid input signals

This error can be output by the block, see the Troubleshooting section. For more information,
8.8.5 S7VlvMot messaging
Message characteristics
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Control system fault
● Instance-specific messages

Control system fault

The following control system fault messages can be output:
Message ID Message class Event

MsgEvId01 AS process control message - Failure Motor feedback error
MsgEvId02 AS process control message - Failure Motor protection triggered
MsgEvId03 AS process control message - Failure Valve feedback error
MsgEvId04 AS process control message - Failure External error occurred
MsgEvId09 AS process control message - Failure Torque shutoff open enabled
MsgEvId10 AS process control message - Failure Torque shutoff closed enabled
MsgEvId11 AS process control message - Failure Feedback error
MsgEvId12 AS process control message - Failure Repair active
Explanation:
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to the input parameter CSF. If this signal changes
to CSF = 1, a control system fault is triggered ((MsgEvId4)).
Process messages
Message ID Message class Event

MsgEvId05 Alarm - high ER - Alarm high limit violated
MsgEvId06 Alarm - low ER - Alarm low limit violated
MsgEvId07 Warning - high Rbk - Warning high limit violated
MsgEvId08 Warning - low Rbk - Warning low limit violated
Associated values for the message instance
Data type Block parameter

REAL Aux
DWORD BatchID
DINT MsgFilter
8.8.6 S7VlvMot I/Os

S7VlvMot I/Os
Input parameters
Parameter Description Type Default

EN 1 = Called block is processed BOOL 1
OpenAut 1 = Select Open valve in "Automatic BOOL 0
mode"


CloseAut 1 = Select Close valve in "Automatic BOOL 0
mode"
StopAut 1 = Stop the motor in "Automatic mode" BOOL 0
OpenMan 1 = Select Open valve in "Manual mode" BOOL 0
CloseMan 1 = Select Close valve in "Manual mode" BOOL 0
StopMan 1 = Stop the motor in "Manual mode" BOOL 0
ModLiOp Toggle operation between: 0 = Operator, BOOL 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC
AutModOp 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 1)
ManModOp 1= "Manual mode" via: OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled via ModLiOp = 0)
AutModLi 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ BOOL 0
tion or SFC (controlled via ModLiOp = 1)
ManModLi 1 = Manual mode via interconnection or BOOL 0
SFC (controlled via ModLiOp = 1)
LocalLi 1 = Activate "Local mode" via plant signal BOOL 0
LocalOp 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
OosOp 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator input BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection BOOL 0
or SFC
OpenLocal 1 = Open the valve in "Local mode" BOOL 0
CloseLocal 1 = Close the valve in "Local mode" BOOL 0
StopLocal 1 = Stop the valve in "Local mode" BOOL 0
MV_Local "Local" manipulate variable REAL 0.0
LocalSetting Properties for local mode INT 0
MV_Int Internal manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_Ext External manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV REAL 100.0
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV REAL 0.0
MV_OpScaleH OS display area for manipulated variable REAL 100.0
MV High
MV_OpScaleL OS display area for manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV Low
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV BOOL 0
MV_Trk Tracking value for manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV
MV_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal manipulated variable active
MV_TrkRbk 1 = Setpoint follows Rbk in "Manual BOOL 0
mode" and with tracking
Rbk Position feedback for display on OS REAL 0.0


RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 100.0
(high)
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 0.0
(low)
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for control error moni‐ REAL 100.0
toring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for control error moni‐ REAL -100.0
toring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for control error REAL 1.0
ER_AH_En 1 = Enable alarm (high) for control error BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Enable alarm (low) for control error BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (high) for BOOL 1
control error monitoring
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (low) for BOOL 1
control error monitoring
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal BOOL 0
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal BOOL 0
FbkOpening 1 = Valve opening feedback signal BOOL 0
FbkClosing 1 = Valve closing feedback signal BOOL 0
NoFbkOpen 1 = No feedback for "Valve open" BOOL 0
NoFbkClose 1 = No feedback for "Valve closed" BOOL 0
Monitor 1 = Monitoring of feedback signals BOOL 1
MonTiStatic Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out performed operation in [s]
MonTiDynamic Monitoring time for feedback errors after REAL 3.0
performed operation in [s]
V_Monitor 1 = Monitoring valve feedback signals BOOL 1
V_MonTiStatic Monitoring time for feedback errors of REAL 5.0
the valve without performed operation in
[s]
V_MonTiDynamic Monitoring time of the valve after per‐ REAL 5.0
formed operation in [s]
M_Monitor 1 = Monitoring motor feedback signals BOOL 1
M_MonTiStatic Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out performed operation in [s]


M_MonTiDynamic Monitoring time of the motor after per‐ REAL 3.0
formed operation in [s]
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
SafePos Neutral position for valve: 0 = Closed, 1 INT 2
= Open, 2 = Stop
IdleTime Waiting for direction change or restart in REAL 5.0
[s]
PulseWidth Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
PauseWidth Pause width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
VibrWidth Vibration width [s] in binary mode REAL 3
VibrPerc Vibration width [%] in analog mode REAL 5
VibrNo Number vibration attempts INT 3
WarnTiMan Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "Manual mode" in [s]
WarnTiAut Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "Automatic mode" in
[s]
RapidStp Rapid stop for the motor 0 = Motor On, BOOL 0
1 = Motor Off
RstOp 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection BOOL 0
ABS_Per Anti-blocking system activation period REAL 7
(days)
RstTmrOp 1 = Reset run time via operator BOOL 0
RstTmrLi 1 = Reset run time via interconnection BOOL 0
RstTotOp 1 = Reset total run time via operator BOOL 0
RstTotLi 1 = Reset total run time via interconnec‐ BOOL 0
tion
Startcyc Start counter REAL 0
Runtime Run time counter in hours REAL 0.0
Runtotal Cumulated run time counter in days REAL 0.0
Stoptime Stop time counter in hours REAL 0.0
DateTmr Date of last counter reset DWORD 0
DateTot Date of last total reset DWORD 0
MaxRunt Maximum total run time before next pre‐ REAL 365
ventive maintenance
MaxStart Maximum start cycles before next pre‐ REAL 3000
ventive maintenance
BypProt 1 = Bypass interlock is enabled in "Local BOOL 0
mode"
Trip 1 = Motor is in good state BOOL 1
Permit 1 = Enable for Open / Close from the BOOL 1
neutral position, 0 = No OS activation
enable for the valve


Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is enabled
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset in effect; BOOL 1
you can operate the block without reset
once the interlocking condition has
cleared, 1 = Interlock not in effect
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is enabled
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking in effect; once BOOL 1
the interlocking condition has cleared,
you have to reset the block, 1 = Protec‐
tive interlock not in effect
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is enabled
OpenForce 1 = Force Open valve BOOL 0
CloseForce 1 = Force Close valve BOOL 0
StopForce 1 = Force Stop motor BOOL 0
TorqOpen 0 = Torque off enabled when opening, 1 BOOL 1
= Good state
TorqClose 0 = Torque off enabled when closing, 1 BOOL 1
= Good state
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. BOOL 0
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
MsgEvId01 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)
ly)


ly)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch number DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
MsgFilter Message filter DINT 0
CmpID Area code DWORD 0
Permis Switching authority INT 2
FaultExt 1 = External error For more information BOOL 0
on this, see the APL Function Manual.
CSF 1 = External error (process control error) BOOL 0
For more information on this, see the
APL Function Manual.
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in WinCC BYTE 16#00
SCADA
OS_Perm I/O for operator authorizations STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● … ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator authorizations STRUCT -
● … ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Feature I/O for additional functions STRUCT -
● … ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Feature2 I/O for additional functions STRUCT -
● … ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Repair 1=Repair switch in maintenance position BOOL 0
* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
MV Manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_ExtOut External manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 0
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error due to control change BOOL 0
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected BOOL 0
feedback change
V_MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error of the value due to BOOL 0
control change
V_MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error of the valve due to BOOL 0
unexpected feedback change
M_MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error of the motor due to BOOL 0
control change
M_MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error of the motor due to BOOL 0
unexpected feedback change
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of motor enabled BOOL 0
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, BOOL 0
Protect) or Trip is enabled
Reserved Reserved BOOL 0
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending BOOL 0
RdyToStart 1 = Ready to start pending BOOL 0
RdyToReset 1 = Ready to reset via RstLi input or BOOL 0
commands in "Automatic mode"
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for valve movement from BOOL 0
neutral position active (WarnTiAut and
WarnTiMan parameters)
Open Control output: 1 = Open valve BOOL 0
Close Control output 1 = Close valve BOOL 0
P_Open 1 = Pulse signal to open the valve BOOL 0
P_Close 1 = Pulse signal to close the valve BOOL 0
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal to stop the valve BOOL 1
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset. The parameter BOOL 0
is pending for one cycle after a reset.
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled BOOL 0
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" is enabled, 0 = BOOL 0
"Manual mode" is enabled
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" is enabled BOOL 1
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" BOOL 0
CascaCut Cascade connection: 1 = Control chain BOOL 0
from master controller to secondary
valve is interrupted
FbkOpenOut Feedback Valve open BOOL 0


FbkCloseOut Feedback Valve closed BOOL 0
FbkOpngOut Feedback Valve opening BOOL 0
FbkClsgOut Feedback Valve closing BOOL 0
Opened 1 = Valve is open BOOL 0
Closed 1 = Valve is closed BOOL 0
Opening 1 = Valve is opening BOOL 0
Closing 1 = Valve is closing BOOL 0
Stop 1 = Motor stops and the valve is in inter‐ BOOL 0
mediate position
RbkOut Output for position feedback REAL 0.0
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback BOOL 0
enabled.
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback BOOL 0
enabled.
PosReached 1 = Control valve has reached specified BOOL 0
position
ER Control deviation REAL 0.0
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation BOOL 0
violated.
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation BOOL 0
violated.
ABS_On Anti-blocking system is enabled BOOL 0
PM_Msg 1=Preventive maintenance required BOOL 0
StartcycOut Interconnectable: Start cycles counter REAL 0.0
RuntimeOut Interconnectable run time counter in REAL 0.0
hours
RuntotalOut Interconnectable cumulated run time REAL 0.0
counter in days
StoptimeOut Interconnectable stop time counter in REAL 0.0
hours
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
LocAuthAct Local operator authorization enabled BOOL 0
Status1 Status word 1 DWORD 16#00000000
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see the error handling of S7VlvMot.
QMsgErr 1 = Message error BOOL 0


MsgStat01 Message status 1 WORD 16#0000
MsgAck08 Message acknowledgment status 8 WORD 16#0000
RepairAct 1=Repair switch in maintenance position BOOL 0
8.8.7.1 S7VlvMot views
S7VlvMot block views

The S7VlvMot block provides the following views:
● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Parameter view
● Preview
● Batch view
● Block icon
Not all fields are displayed with Feature.Bit13 = 0.

8.8.7.2 S7VlvMot standard view
S7VlvMot standard view
2
14
6
7
13
12
11 8
10
(1) Display and switchover the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode
● Automatic mode
● Local mode
● Out of service
You can find additional information on the operating modes of the block in the section S7VlvMot
operating modes (Page 259)
(2) Open, close and stop the motor valve

This area shows you the default operating state for the motor valve. The following states can
be shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"

● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
(3) Reset the block

Click "Reset" in the event of interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in
the section Reset the block for interlocks or errors.
(4) Display and change the manipulated variable

This area shows the currently manipulated variable. You can only change the manipulated
variable via the faceplate in manual mode. In preset automatic mode, the manipulated variable
from the CFC block is applied and processed.
(5) Display for position feedback

This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable.
(6) Bar display for manipulated variable

This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The external manipulated variable is identified with the letter "E".
(7) Bar display for position feedback

This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES). The limits for the
"Open" and "Closed" positions are also indicated by two green lines.
(8) Operating area for the interlock functions of the block

The following interlock types are available:
When the motor slider is stopped, the de-energized state is considered the neutral position.
The neutral position is also reached by reaching one of the end positions, by activating a torque
shutoff after several approaches, by the response to the run time monitoring, by activating the
protection or interlock function.
● Activation enable ("Enable"): The activation enable makes it possible to leave the neutral
position of the block in response to operator input or a command from the program (CFC).
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock"): An pending interlock condition brings the block to the
neutral position. Once the interlock condition has cleared, the currently pending control
becomes active again in automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the faceplate can be
operated again once the interlocking condition is cleared.
● Option: Interlock with reset ("Protection"): An pending interlock condition brings the
block to the neutral position. Once the interlock conditions are cleared, the operator or an

activation sequence must perform a reset to once again enable activation of the control
according to the input parameters.
(9) Activation/deactivation of message lock

The message lock can be enabled / disabled in this area.

● "Delay"

● "Motor protection"
● "Runtime error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Switchover error"
● "Torque switch enabled"
● "Vibrate enabled"

● "Forced open"
● "Forced close"
● "Forced stop"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "Automatic mode" is expected.
(13) Display area for operating levels

This area shows the current operating level of the block.
(14) Status display of the motor valve

The current status of the motor valve is graphically displayed here.
For additional information on this topic, refer to the section Block icon for S7VlvMot.

8.8.7.3 Limit view of S7VlvMot
Limit view of S7VlvMot

You can set several values in this view by default:
● Control deviation limits
● Manipulated variable operating range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.
4
2
(1) Control deviation limits (ER)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low
(2) Readback value limits (RBK)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value.


● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low
(3) Manipulated variable operating range (MV)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operating range.
● "H range": Range high limit
● "L range": Range low limit
(4) Operator control enable

This area shows all operations for which special operator authorizations are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for operator control enable:
● Green check mark: The OS operator may access this parameter
● Gray check mark: Access to this parameter is temporarily disabled for the OS operator due
to process conditions
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator authorizations (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

8.8.7.4 S7VlvMot parameter view
S7VlvMotL parameter view
(1) Settings
You can enable the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "MV := Rbk in manual mode": Bumpless switchover from manual mode to automatic mode
● "MV := MV external": Bumpless switchover of the manipulated variable for manipulated
variable switchover from "external" to "internal". The internal manipulated variable is tracked
to the external one.
(2) Monitor valve

In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the valve.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control": Monitoring time for the valve run time (dynamic)
● "Runtime": Monitoring time for maintaining the valve position (static)

Enable monitoring
You enable monitoring by clicking the check box (☑).
(3) Monitor motor

In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the motor.
● "Control": Monitoring time during starting and stopping of the motor (dynamic)
● "Runtime": Monitoring time for the motor operation characteristics (static)
Enable monitoring
(4) Monitoring
In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the control valve.
● "Control": Monitoring time during opening and closing of the control valve (dynamic)
● "Runtime": Monitoring time of the end position of the control valve (static)
Enable monitoring
(5) Operator control enable


8.8.7.5 S7VlvMot preview
S7VlvMot preview
The preview shows you the parameters that you, as an OS operator, can control. You cannot
control anything in this view, however.
(1) Automatic preview

This area shows you the block status after it has switched from manual mode to "Automatic
mode".
If the block is in "Automatic mode", the current block state is displayed.

(2) External MV
This field displays the external manipulated variable (MV_Ext).
(3) Internal MV
This field displays the internal manipulated variable (MV_Int).
(4) Local MV
This field displays the local manipulated variable (MV_Local).
(5) Control deviation

This field displays the control deviation ((ER).
(6) Track MV
This field displays the MV tracking (MV_TrkOn).
(7) Track MV
This field displays the tracking value (MV_Trk).
(8) Operator control enables

The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor of the valve.
● "Open": You can open the motor valve.
● "Close": You can close the motor valve.
● "Reset": You can reset the motor valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "Automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "Manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "Local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.

(9) Display current control signals

This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current control:
● "Enable":
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "opening" / "closing" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
– 0 = Protective interlocking in effect; once the interlocking condition has cleared, you
have to reset the block
– 1 = Good state
● "Interlock":
– 0 = Interlocking without reset in effect; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has cleared
– 1 = Good state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is enabled
● "Motor protection": 0 = Motor protection enabled
● "Bypass protection":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "Local mode" and in simulation
● "Torque opening": 0 = Torque shutoff when opening
● "Torque closing": 0 = Torque shutoff when closing
● "Local stop": 1 = Stop the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Local open": 1 = Open the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Local close": 1 = Close the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Feedback open": 1 = Motor valve is opened
● "Feedback close": 1 = Motor valve is closed
● "Open": 1 = Motor valve is opening
● "Close": 1 = Motor valve is closing
8.8.7.6 S7VlvMot block icons
S7VlvMotL block icons

A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes

● Display for bypassing interlocks

● Interlocks
● Valve status display
● Switching authority: Operator panel "OP", Local control center "LC" or Local OS (no icon)
The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:
Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC

1
Valve status display

The following valve states are shown here:
Icon Meaning
Valve open
Valve closed
Error at valve
Valve is opening
Valve is closing
Valve stops

Panel blocks 9
9.1 S7PCalcWatP - Operator panel interface for S7CalcWatP
9.1.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PCalcWatP

The "S7PCalcWatP" block acts as the interface between a "S7CalcWatP" technological block
and the operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7CalcWatP block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7CalacWatP
block.
The IDBNR output must point to an address in the PanelConDB data block. This location in
the data block is required for connecting the panel.



Panel blocks
9.1.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDTxx UDT_S7PCalcWatP

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_MODE WORD IN 0 Reserved
QOP_T_FORERN REAL IN 0 Supply temperature status
QOP_T_RETURN REAL IN 0 Return temperature status
QOP_V_FL_RT REAL IN 0 Flow rate status
QOP_QTH_POW REAL IN 0 Thermal power status
QOP_QTH_ENGY REAL IN 0 Thermal energy status
QOP_QTH_ENGY2 REAL IN 0 Reserved
QOP_QHEATING BOOL IN 0 Heating or cooling status
EN_AUX BOOL IN 0 Enable for associated values
AUX1 REAL IN 0 Associated value 1
OS_STAT DWORD IN 0 Status WinCC
OS_STAT_AL DWORD IN 0 Bit message procedure
OP_MSG_FILTER DINT IN 0 Message filter for Panel faceplate
OP_PERM_LOG DWORD IN 0 Operator enable
OP_VISIBILITY DWORD IN 0 Visibility in OP
OP_PERMIS INT IN 0 Panel priority
BL_CONN ANY IN 0 Reserved
AS_NR INT IN 0 AS number for message filter (max. 999)
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PCalcWatP
OP_STAT.QOP_T_FORERN REAL IN_OUT 0 Supply temperature status
OP_STAT.QOP_T_RETURN REAL IN_OUT 0 Return temperature status
OP_STAT.QOP_V_FL_RT REAL IN_OUT 0 Flow rate status
OP_STAT.QOP_QTH_POW REAL IN_OUT 0 Thermal power status
OP_STAT.QOP_QTH_ENGY REAL IN_OUT 0 Thermal energy status

Panel blocks

OP_STAT.QOP_QHEATING BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Heating, 0=Cooling
OP_STAT.QOP_QERR BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel error
OP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD IN_OUT 0 Status for panel messages
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_ACTIVE BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Operator authorization
MSG_FILTER DINT OUT 0 Message filter
IDBNR INT OUT 0 InstanceDB - Number
QDB_CO_ERR BOOL OUT 0 Reserved
9.1.6.1 S7CalcWatP views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.1.6.2 S7CalcWatP standard view

Panel blocks
9.1.6.3 S7CalcWatP block icons

Panel blocks
9.2 S7PHxFct - Operator panel interface for S7HxFct
9.2.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PHxFct

The "S7PHxFct" block acts as the interface between the "S7HxFct" technological block and
the operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7HxFct block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7HxFct block.


9.2.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDTxx UDT_S7PHxFct

Panel blocks

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_MODE WORD IN 0 RESERVED. Not used yet.
QOP_T_CENTC REAL IN 0 Status temperature
QOP_H_REL REAL IN 0 Status humidity
QOP_QENT REAL IN 0 Status enthalpy
QOP_QH_ABS REAL IN 0 Status absolute humidity
QOP_QH_SAT REAL IN 0 Status saturated humidity
EN_AUX BOOL IN 0 Activate associated values
AUX1 REAL IN 0 AssociatedValue1
OS_STAT DWORD IN 0 WinCC status
OP_MSG_FILTER DINT IN 0 Message filter for Panel Faceplate
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of cycles for which all messages are suppressed
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Unit status
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PCalcWatP
OP_STAT.QOP_T_CENTC REAL IN_OUT 0 Status temperature
OP_STAT.QOP_H_REL REAL IN_OUT 0 Status relative humidity
OP_STAT.QOP_QENT REAL IN_OUT 0 Status enthalpy
OP_STAT.QOP_QH_ABS REAL IN_OUT 0 Status absolute humidity
OP_STAT.QOP_QH_SAT REAL IN_OUT 0 Status saturated humidity
OP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD IN_OUT 0 Status panel messages
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_ACTIVE BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Operator enable

Panel blocks
9.2.6.1 S7PHxFct views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.2.6.2 S7PHxFct standard view
9.2.6.3 S7PHxFct block icon

Panel blocks
9.3 S7PMonAn - Operator panel interface for S7MonAn
9.3.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonAn

The "S7PMonAn" block acts as the interface between the "S7MonAn" technological block and
the operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAn block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAn
block.


9.3.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT69 UDT_S7PMonAn

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QOP_V REAL IN 0 Process value status
QOP_MO_PVHR REAL IN 0 High range bar
QOP_V_AH REAL IN 0 Reserved
QOP_V_WH REAL IN 0 Reserved
QOP_V_WL REAL IN 0 Reserved
QOP_V_AL REAL IN 0 Reserved
QOP_MO_PVLR REAL IN 0 Low range bar
QOP_GRAD REAL IN 0 Gradient status
OS_STAT DWORD IN 0 Panel status
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for S7MonAn
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAn
OP_STAT.QOP_V REAL IN_OUT 0 Measured value status
OP_STAT.MO_PVHR REAL IN_OUT 0 High range bar
OP_STAT.MO_PVLR REAL IN_OUT 0 Low range bar
OP_STAT.MAN_EN BOOL IN_OUT 0 Manual mode enabled
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Panel blocks


Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -
Status word assignment for QOS_STAT_AL parameter

Bit0 External error occurred (CSF)
Bit1 PV - Alarm high limit violated
Bit2 PV - Alarm low limit violated
Bit3 – Bit 4 -
Bit5 PV - Warning high limit violated
Bit6 PV - Warning low limit violated
Bit 7 – Bit 31 -
9.3.6.1 S7PMonAn views

● Standard view
● Message view

Panel blocks
9.3.6.2 S7PMonAn standard view
9.3.6.3 S7PMonAn block icons

Panel blocks
9.4 S7PMonAn08 - Operator panel interface for S7MonAn08
9.4.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonAn08

The "S7PMonAn08" block acts as the interface between the "S7MonAn08" technological block
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAn08 block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAn08
block.


9.4.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT70 UDT_S7PMonAn08

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QOP_V_LIM_1 REAL IN 0 Reserved
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for S7MonAn08
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAn08

Panel blocks

ENO BOOL OUT 0

Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -

Bit1 Limit 1
Bit2 Limit 2
Bit3 Limit 3
Bit4 Limit 4
Bit5 Limit 5
Bit6 Limit 6
Bit7 Limit 7
Bit8 Limit 8
Bit 9 – Bit 31 -
9.4.6.1 S7PMonAn08 views

● Standard view
● Message view

Panel blocks
9.4.6.2 S7PMonAn08 standard view
9.4.6.3 S7PMonAn08 block icons

Panel blocks
9.5 S7PMonAnDi - Operator panel interface for S7MonAnDi
9.5.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonAnDi

The "S7PMonAnDi" block acts as the interface between the "S7MonAnDi" technological block
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAnDi block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAnDi
block.


9.5.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT71 UDT_S7PMonAnDi

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
Q_AH BOOL IN 0 Limit error HH
Q_WH BOOL IN 0 Limit error H
Q_WL BOOL IN 0 Limit error L
Q_AL BOOL IN 0 Limit error LL
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message sup‐
pression
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for S7MonAnDi
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAnDi
OP_STAT.Q_AL BOOL IN_OUT 0 Limit error LL
OP_STAT.Q_AH BOOL IN_OUT 0 Limit error HH

Panel blocks

OP_STAT.Q_WL BOOL IN_OUT 0 Limit error L
OP_STAT.Q_WH BOOL IN_OUT 0 Limit error H
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -

Bit3 – Bit 4 -
Bit 7 – Bit 31 -
9.5.6.1 S7PMonAnDi views

● Standard view
● Message view

Panel blocks
9.5.6.2 S7PMonAnDi standard view
9.5.6.3 S7PMonAnDi block icons

Panel blocks
9.6 S7PMonAnGrad - Operator panel interface for S7MonAnGrad
9.6.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonAnGrad

The "S7PMonAnGrad" block acts as the interface between a "S7MonAnGrad" technological
block and the operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonAnGrad
block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the
S7MonAnGrad block.
9.6.2 Calling OBs


9.6.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT73 UDT_S7PMonAnGrad

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QOP_GRAD REAL IN 0 Gradient status
EN_AUX BOOL IN 0 Enable associated value view
sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for SMEASGRAD
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAnGrad
OP_STAT.QOP_GRADIENT REAL IN_OUT 0 Gradient status
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Panel blocks


Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -

Bit3 – Bit 4 Limit 3
Bit7 Limit (high) positive gradient
Bit8 Limit (low) negative gradient
Bit 9 – Bit 31 -
9.6.6.1 S7PMonAnGrad views

● Standard view
● Message view

Panel blocks
9.6.6.2 S7PMonAnGrad standard view
9.6.6.3 S7PMonAnGrad block icons

Panel blocks
9.7 S7PMonDi - Operator panel interface for S7MonDi
9.7.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonDi

The "S7PMonDi" block acts as the interface between the "S7MonDi" technological block and
the operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonDi block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonDi
block.
The IDBNR output has to point to an address of the PanelConDB data block. This location in
9.7.2 Calling OBs


9.7.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT67 UDT_S7PMonDi

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QOP_Q BOOL IN 0 Process value status
sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for DIGMO
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonDi
OP_STAT.QOP_Q BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
OP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F DWORD IN_OUT 0 Status panel messages
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Panel blocks

Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -

Bit1 Out – Binary value set
Bit 2 – Bit 31 -
9.7.6.1 S7PMonDi views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.7.6.2 S7PMonDi standard view

Panel blocks
9.7.6.3 S7PMonDi block icon

Panel blocks
9.8 S7PMonDi08 - Operator panel interface for S7MonDi08
9.8.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMonDi08

The "S7PMonDi08" block acts as the interface between a "S7MonDi08" technological block
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonDi08 block.
The MSG_FILTER output must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MonDi08
block.
9.8.2 Calling OBs


9.8.4 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT68 UDT_S7PMonDi08

Panel blocks
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
QOP_Q1 BOOL IN 0 Status process value 1
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status of S7MonDi08
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonDi08
OP_STAT.QOP_Q1 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
tive
tive
tive
tive

Panel blocks

tive
tive
tive
OP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F DWORD IN_OUT 0 Status panel messages
ENO BOOL OUT 0
IDBNR INT OUT 0 Instance DB number (Panel parameter)

Bit 0 – Bit 2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit7 Fault
Bit 8 – Bit 31 -

Bit0 -
Bit1 Signal change signal 1 has occurred
Bit 9 – Bit 31 -

Panel blocks
9.8.6.1 S7PMonDi08 views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.8.6.2 S7PMonDi08 standard view
9.8.6.3 S7PMonDi08 block icons

Panel blocks
9.9 S7PMot - Operator panel interface for S7Mot
9.9.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMot

The S7PMot block acts as the interface between a "S7Mot" technological block and an operator
panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7Mot block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7Mot block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_RESET
● QOP_AUT_ON
● QOP_MAN_ON
● MSG_FILTER
Only if the configured operating level OP_PERMIS and the current operator control permission
for the unit PERMIS are identical is the QOP_ACTIVE output set and the technology function
of S7PMot controlled.

9.9.3 How it works

The S7PMot block checks if operator permission for the single-stage motor has been granted
to the operator panel. If the operator panel has switch permission, all switching commands
affecting the single-stage motor are sent from the operator panel. The commands are output
at the motor control block S7Mot via the command outputs that are interconnected to the motor
block S7Mot. The motor control block checks for error states. If no error states are found, the
commands are output to the motor.

Panel blocks
Switching commands cannot be sent from the operator panel in the following operating states:
● "Forced on"
● "Forced off"
● "Local operation"
If the operator panel does not have switch permission, all switching states are forwarded from
the motor block S7Mot to the operator panel.
If a relevant system error or state affecting the motor occurs, this is reported to the operator
system by S7PMot.

9.9.5 Called blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT62 UDT_S7PMot
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_MODE WORD IN 0 Operator mode
OP_STOP_MAN BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input for manual stop
OP_START_MAN BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input for manual stop

Panel blocks

sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for SMOT1
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMot
OP_STAT.QOP_RESET BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel reset
OP_STAT.QOP_AUT_ON BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
OP_STAT.QOP_MAN_ON BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running
OP_STAT.QOS_STAT DWORD IN_OUT 0 Status for WinCC
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_RESET BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Reset error
QOP_AUT_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_MAN_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor running

Bit1 Motor feedback error
Bit2 -
Bit3 Motor protection triggered
Bit4 Repair
Bit5 – Bit31 -

Panel blocks
9.9.7.1 S7PMot views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.9.7.2 S7PMot standard view
9.9.7.3 S7PMot block icon

Panel blocks
9.10 S7PMotRev - Operator panel interface for S7MotRev
9.10.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMotRev

The S7PMotRev block acts as the interface between a "S7MotRev" technological block and
an operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MotRev block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7MotRev block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_RESET
● QOP_AUT_ON
● QOP_MOT_OFF
● QOP_FORW
● QOP_REV
● MSG_FILTER
of S7PMotRev controlled.


Panel blocks
9.10.3 How it works

The "S7PMotRev" block checks if operator permission for the reversing motor has been
granted to the operator panel. If the operator panel has switch permission, all switching
commands affecting the reversing motor are sent from the operator panel. The commands are
sent at the motor control block S7MotRev via the command outputs that are interconnected
to the motor block S7MotRev. The motor control block checks for error states. If no errors are
found, the commands are sent to the motor.
● "Forced on"
● "Forced off"
the motor block S7MotRev to the operator panel.
system by S7PMotRev.

SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT74 UDT_S7PMotRev
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor OFF
OP_FORW BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor forward
OP_REV BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor reverse

Panel blocks

sion
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotRev
OP_STAT.QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Motor stopped
OP_STAT.QOP_FORW BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=Motor running forward
OP_STAT.QOP_REV BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=Motor running reverse
OP_STAT.QOP_RES_1 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Reserved for external use
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor OFF
QOP_FORW BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor forward
QOP_REV BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor reverse
QERR BOOL OUT 0 1 = Error

Panel blocks

Bit2 -
Bit4 Repair
Bit5 – Bit31 -
9.10.7.1 S7PMotRev views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.10.7.2 S7PMotRev standard view
9.10.7.3 S7PMotRev block icons

Panel blocks
9.11 S7PMotSpd - Operator panel interface for S7MotSpd
9.11.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMotSpd

The "S7PMotSpd" block acts as the interface between the "S7MotSpd" technological block
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MotSpd block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7MotSpd block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_RESET
● QOP_AUT_ON
● QOP_MOT_OFF
● QOP_MANS1
● QOP_MANS2
● MSG_FILTER
of S7PMotSpd controlled.
9.11.2 Calling OBs

9.11.3 How it works

The "S7PMotSpd" block checks if operator permission for the two-stage motor has been
granted to the operator panel. If the operator panel has switch permission, all switching
commands affecting the single-stage motor are output from the operator panel.

Panel blocks
The commands are sent at the motor control block S7MotSpd via the command outputs that
are interconnected to the motor block S7MotSpd. The motor control block checks for error
states. If no errors are found, the commands are sent to the motor.
● "Forced on"
● "Forced off"
the motor block S7MotSpd to the operator panel.
system by S7PMotSpd.

SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT63 UDT_S7PMotSpd
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor OFF
OP_MANS1 BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor speed 1
OP_MANS2 BOOL IN 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor speed 2

Panel blocks

sion
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotSpd
OP_STAT.QOP_RESET BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Panel reset
OP_STAT.QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Motor stopped
OP_STAT.QOP_MANS1 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=Motor running speed 1
OP_STAT.QOP_MANS2 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=Motor running speed 2
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_MOT_OFF BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor OFF
QOP_MANS1 BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor running at speed 1
QOP_MANS2 BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor running at speed 2

Panel blocks

Bit2 -
Bit4 Repair
Bit5 – Bit31 -
Block icon
Views
● Standard view
● Message view
Standard view

Panel blocks
9.12 S7PMotSpdC - Operator panel interface for S7MotSpdC
9.12.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMotSpdC

The "S7PMotSpdC" block acts as the interface between the "S7MotSpdC" technological block
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MotSpdC block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7MotSpdC block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_RESET
● QOP_AUT_ON
● QOP_MAN_ON
● MSG_FILTER
If the current setpoint is to be displayed in the faceplate, the SP output of the "S7MotSpdC"
block must be interconnected to the SP_EXT input of the "S7PMotSpdC" block.
of S7PMotSpdC controlled.
9.12.2 Calling OBs


Panel blocks
9.12.3 How it works

The "S7PMotSpdC" block checks if operator permission for the frequency-controlled motor
has been granted to the operator panel. If the operator panel has switch permission, all
switching commands affecting the frequency-controlled motor are output from the operator
panel.
The commands are sent at the motor control block S7MOTSPDC via the command outputs
that are interconnected to the motor block S7MotSpdC. The motor control block checks for
error states. If no errors are found, the commands are sent to the motor.
● "Forced on"
● "Forced off"
the motor block S7MotSpdC to the operator panel.
system by S7PMotSpdC.

SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT66 UDT_S7PMotSpdC
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_FORW BOOL IN 0 Not used

Panel blocks

OP_REV BOOL IN 0 Not used
OP_SP_EXT REAL IN 0 Operator panel input external setpoint
OP_SP_HL REAL IN 0 Operator panel input external setpoint high limit
OP_SP_LL REAL IN 0 Operator panel input external setpoint low limit
sion
SP_EXT REAL IN 0 Analog setpoint
SP_HL REAL IN 0 High limit
SP_LL REAL IN 0 Low limit
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for SVSD
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMotSpdC
OP_STAT.QOP_RESET BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Panel reset
OP_STAT.QOP_MAN_ON BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Motor running
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_MAN_ON BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor running
QOP_SP REAL OUT 0 Setpoint
QOP_SP_HL REAL OUT 0 Setpoint high limit
QOP_SP_LL REAL OUT 0 Setpoint low limit

Panel blocks


Bit2 -
Bit4 Repair
Bit5 – Bit31 -
9.12.7.1 S7PMotSpdC views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.12.7.2 S7PMotSpdC standard view

Panel blocks
9.12.7.3 S7PMotSpdC block icons

Panel blocks
9.13 S7PPID - Operator panel interface for S7PIDCon
9.13.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PPID

The "S7PPID" block acts as the interface between the "S7PIDCon" technological block and
the operator panel.
9.13.2 Configuration notes

The "BlockConnector" input of the "S7PPID" block must be interconnected with any output of
the "S7PIDCon" block.
The data that is of relevance to the panel block (such as status information) is automatically
evaluated and displayed by the panel block.
Exception
The ENO output must not be used for interconnection with the "BlockConnector" input.
The IDBNo output must point to an address in the PanelConDB data block. This area of the
data block is needed to connect the panel.
9.13.3 Calling OBs


The RunUpCyc parameter can be used to specify for how long (number of cycles) the
Restart = TRUE can be used to simulate a restart.

Panel blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC24 TEST_DB
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0 1 = Called block is processed
Restart BOOL IN 0 Manual startup
Op_Mode WORD IN 0 Operating mode (Panel parameter)
Op_MV REAL IN 0 Operator input manipulated variable (Panel param‐
eter)
Op_MVHL REAL IN 0 Operator input manipulated variable high limit (Pan‐
el parameter)
Op_MVLL REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint low limit (Panel parameter)
Op_ScMVHL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (high limit) for manipulated variable
Op_ScMVLL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (low limit) for manipulated variable
Op_Rbk REAL IN 0 Operator input readback value (Panel parameter)
Op_PV REAL IN 0 Operator input process value (Panel parameter)
Op_SP_Ext BOOL IN 0 Operator input setpoint external (Panel parameter)
Op_SP_Int BOOL IN 0 Operator input setpoint internal (Panel parameter)
Op_SP REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint (Panel parameter)
Op_SPHL REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint high limit (Panel parameter)
Op_SPLL REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint low limit (Panel parameter)
Op_ScPVHL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (high limit) for process value
Op_ScPVLL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (low limit) for process value
EnAux BOOL IN 0 Enable associated value view (Panel parameter)
Aux1 REAL IN 0 Associated value 1 (Panel parameter)
OSStat DWORD IN 0 WinCC status
OSStatAl DWORD IN 0 Bit message procedure (Panel parameter)
Op_MsgFilter DINT IN 0 Message filter for Panel faceplate
Op_PermLog DWORD IN 0 Operator authorization
Op_Visibility DWORD IN 0 Object visibility
SwitchPerm DWORD IN 1 Switching authority
PanelPerm DWORD IN 0 Panel operating level

Panel blocks

BlockConnector ANY IN 0 Connection to S7PIDCon block
RunUpCyc INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message suppression
AS_Nr INT IN 0 AS number for message filter (max. 999)
ENO BOOL OUT 0
SwitchPerm_Out DWORD OUT 1 Switching authority output
OSStat_Out DWORD OUT 0 WinCC status
OSStatAl_Out DWORD OUT 0 Bit message procedure (Panel parameter)
PanelAct BOOL OUT 0 Panel active
MsgFilter DINT OUT 0 Message filter
IDBNo STRUCT OUT 0 Instance DB number (Panel parameter)
DB_ConnErr BOOL OUT 0 Data block connection error
Status word assignment for OSStatAl and OSStatAl_Out parameters

Bit0 - Bit4 BOOL External error occurred (CSF)
Bit1 BOOL PV - Alarm high limit
Bit2 BOOL PV - Warning high limit
Bit3 BOOL -
Bit5 BOOL PV - Warning low limit
Bit6 BOOL PV - Alarm low limit
Bit7 BOOL ER - Alarm high limit
Bit8 BOOL ER - Alarm low limit
Bit9 BOOL Rbk - Warning high limit
Bit10 BOOL Rbk - Warning low limit
…
Bit31 BOOL -
Status word assignment for OSStat and OSStat_Out parameters

Bit0 BOOL -
Bit1 BOOL ManAct
Bit2 BOOL -
Bit3 BOOL Panel active
Bit4 BOOL Auto active
Bit5 - Bit6 BOOL -
Bit7 BOOL Error (CSF)
Bit8 BOOL FbkOpened
Bit9 BOOL FbkClosed
Bit10 - Bit11 BOOL -

Panel blocks

Bit12 BOOL Control + (NegGain = 0)
Bit13 BOOL Control – (NegGain = 1)
Bit14 BOOL MV_ForOn
Bit17 BOOL SP_LiOp
Bit20 BOOL AdvCoActMV
Bit21 BOOL AdvCoActSP
Bit22 BOOL OosAct
Bit23 BOOL SP_Ext
…
9.13.7.1 S7PPID views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.13.7.2 S7PPID standard view

Panel blocks
9.13.7.3 S7PPID block icons

Panel blocks
9.14 S7PMV3P - Operator Panel Interface for S7MV3P
9.14.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PMV3P

The S7PMV3P block acts as the interface between a "S7MV3P" technological block and an
operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7MV3P block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7MV3P block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_AUT_ON
● QOP_SP
● MSG_FILTER
of S7PMV3P controlled.

9.14.3 How it works

The "S7PMV3P" block checks if operator permission for the valve has been granted to the
operator panel.
If the operator panel has switch permission, all switching commands affecting the valve are
sent from the operator panel. The commands are sent at the valve control block S7MV3P via
the command outputs that are interconnected to the valve block S7MV3P. The valve control
block checks for error states. If no errors are found, the commands are sent to the valve.

Panel blocks
● "Forced open"
● "Forced close"
the valve block S7MV3P to the operator panel.
If a relevant system error or state affecting the valve occurs, this is reported to the operator
system by S7PMV3P.

SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT65 UDT_S7PMV3P
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_SP_EXT REAL IN 0 Operator panel input external setpoint
OP_SP_HLM REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint high limit
OP_SP_LLM REAL IN 0 Operator input setpoint low limit
OP_PV REAL IN 0 Process value

Panel blocks

sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for S7MV3P
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMV3P
OP_STAT.QOP_SP REAL IN_OUT 0 Status panel setpoint
OP_STAT.QSP_HLM REAL IN_OUT 0 Active setpoint high limit
OP_STAT.QSP_LLM REAL IN_OUT 0 Active setpoint low limit
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_SP REAL OUT 0 Status panel setpoint
QDB_ERR BOOL OUT 0 1 = Error data block write-protected / too short

Bit1 Feedback error
Bit2 – Bit31 -

Panel blocks
9.14.7.1 S7PMV3P views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.14.7.2 S7PMV3P standard view
9.14.7.3 S7PMV3P block icon

Panel blocks
9.15 S7POpA - Operator panel interface for S7OpA
9.15.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7POpA

The "S7POpA" block acts as the interface between the "S7OpA" technological block and the
operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7OpA block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7OpA block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_U
of S7POpA controlled.



Panel blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT76 UDT_S7POpA
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_SP REAL IN 0 Operator panel setpoint
OP_VHL REAL IN 0 High limit U
OP_VLL REAL IN 0 Low limit U
OP_FB_U REAL IN 0 Status 1=Operator panel feedback 1: 0=inactive,
1=active
sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for SOP_A
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7POpA
OP_STAT.QOP_Link BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=LINK is active <=> "Automatic"
OP_STAT.QOP_EN BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator can enter
OP_STAT.QOP_U REAL IN_OUT 0 Operator enable for operator panel
OP_STAT.QOP_VHL REAL IN_OUT 0 Operator panel high limit U
OP_STAT.QOP_VLL REAL IN_OUT 0 Operator panel low limit U
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Panel blocks

QOP_U REAL OUT 0 Operator panel entry

Bit0 Bit2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit4 – Bit31 -
9.15.6.1 S7POpA views

● Standard view
9.15.6.2 S7POpA standard view
9.15.6.3 S7POpA block icons

Panel blocks
9.16 S7POpD - Operator panel interface for S7OpD
9.16.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7POpD

The "S7POpD" block acts as the interface between the "S7OpD" technological block and the
operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7OpD block.
The following outputs must be connected to the associated inputs of the S7OpD block:
● QOP_ACTIVE
● QOP_IO
of S7POpD controlled.
9.16.2 Calling OBs



Panel blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT75 UDT_S7POpD
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_Q BOOL IN 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
OP_FB_ON BOOL IN 0 Status 1=Operator panel feedback 1: 0=inactive,
1=active
sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for OP_D
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7POpD
OP_STAT.QOP_Q BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
OP_STAT.QOP_EN0 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator can set 0
OP_STAT.QOP_EN1 BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator can set 1
OP_STAT.QOP_LINK BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=LINK is active <=> "Automatic"
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_I0 BOOL OUT 0 Operator panel entry

Panel blocks


Bit0 Bit2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit4 – Bit31 -
9.16.6.1 S7POpD views

● Standard view
9.16.6.2 S7POpD standard view
Static (S7OpD MODE = 1)

Panel blocks
Pulse (S7OpD MODE = 0)
9.16.6.3 S7POpD block icons
Static (S7OpD MODE = 1)
Pulse (S7OpD MODE = 0)

Panel blocks
9.17 S7PUsrM - operator panel interface for S7UsrM
9.17.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PUsrM

The "S7PUsrM" block acts as the interface between the "S7UsrM" technological block and the
operator panel.
The "BlockConnector" input of "S7PUsrM" must be connected to any "S7UsrM" output.
The relevant data for the panel block (for example, status information or messages) are then
automatically processed via the panel block and displayed accordingly.
Exception:
The ENO output cannot be used for the interconnection to the "Block connector".
The IDBNo output must point to an address in the PanelConDB data block. This location in
Operation can be enabled for PUsrM on the panel using the "@ILPanelStation" operator station
ID. The "PUsrM" block is enabled when the comparison between the PanelPerm parameter
and "@ILPanelStation" does not equal "0".
9.17.2 Calling OBs

The cyclic interrupt OB into which you install the block (for example, OB32). Additionally in
OB100 (see Startup characteristics).

The RunUpCyc parameter can be used to set for how long (number of cycles) messages are
to be suppressed.

Panel blocks
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC24 TEST_DB
9.17.5 Block parameter
Block I/Os

BlockConnector ANY IN 0 Connection to S7UsrM block
Op_MAXLEVEL INT IN 0 Maximum number of input devices
Op_MODE BOOL IN 0 Operator mode
Op_MsgFilter BOOL IN 0 Message filter for panel
Op_QPERMIS INT IN 0 Output value
Op_ S_DEV INT IN 0 Substitute value
OSStat DWORD IN 0 Status WinCC
ENO BOOL OUT 0
OSStat_Out DWORD OUT 0 Status WinCC

Bit0 Keyswitch activated
Bit1 Parameter assignment error

Panel blocks

Bit2 Operating level changed
Bit3 Backup level 1 selected
Bit4 Backup level 2 selected
Bit5 Next available level activated
Bit6 No operating level available
Bit7 External error
Bit8 - 31 Not used

Bit0 OPDEAV_1
Bit1 OPDEAV_2
Bit2 OPDEAV_3
Bit3 OPDEAV_4
Bit4 OPDEAV_5
Bit5 OPDEAV_6
Bit6 OPDEAV_7
Bit7 OPDEAV_8
Bit8 QOPACT_1
Bit9 QOPACT_2
Bit10 QOPACT_3
Bit11 QOPACT_4
Bit12 QOPACT_5
Bit13 QOPACT_6
Bit14 QOPACT_7
Bit15 QOPACT_8
Bit16 Keyswitch activated
Bit17 EnAux
Bit18 Parameter assignment error
Bit19 Process errors
Bit20 - 31 Not used

Panel blocks
9.17.6.1 S7PUsrM views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.17.6.2 S7PUsrM standard view
9.17.6.3 S7PUsrM block icons

Panel blocks
9.18 S7PVlv - Operator panel interface for S7Vlv
9.18.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PVlv

The "S7PVlv" block acts as the interface between the "S7Vlv" technological block and the
operator panel.
The OP_STAT input must be connected to the corresponding output of the S7Vlv block.
The following outputs must be connected to the corresponding inputs of the S7Vlv block:
● QOP_ACTIVEQ
● OP_RESETQ
● OP_AUT_OC
● QOP_MAN_OC
● MSG_FILTER
of S7PVlv controlled.
9.18.2 Calling OBs

9.18.3 How it works

The "S7PVlv" checks if the operator panel has permission to switch the valve. If the operator
panel has switch permission, all switching commands affecting the valve are sent from the
operator panel. The commands are sent to the valve control block S7Vlv via the command
outputs that are interconnected to the valve block S7Vlv. The valve control block checks for
error states. If no errors are found, the commands are sent to the valve.

Panel blocks
● "Forced open"
● "Forced close"
the valve block S7Vlv to the operator panel.
If a relevant system error or state affecting the valve occurs, this is reported to the operator
system by S7PVlv.

SFC6 RD_SINFO
UDT64 UDT_S7PVlv (UDT_OP_SVALVE)
Block I/Os
Parameter Type Class HMI Meaning

EN BOOL IN 0
OP_OPEN_MAN BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input for manual open
OP_CLOSE_MAN BOOL IN 0 Operator panel input for manual close

Panel blocks
Parameter Type Class HMI Meaning

sion
OP_STAT STRUCT IN_OUT 0 Status for S7Vlv
OP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE IN_OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PVlv
OP_STAT.QOP_AUT_OC BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
OP_STAT.QOP_MAN_OC BOOL IN_OUT 0 Status 1=Panel 1=Valve opening
ENO BOOL OUT 0
QOP_AUT_OC BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=AUTO, 0=Manual mode
QOP_MAN_OC BOOL OUT 0 Status operator panel 1=Motor running

Bit1 Feedback error
Bit2 – Bit31 -

Panel blocks
9.18.7.1 S7PVlv views

● Standard view
● Message view
9.18.7.2 S7PVlv standard view
9.18.7.3 S7PVlv block icons

Panel blocks
9.19 S7PVlvMot - Operator panel interface for S7VlvMot
9.19.1 Function

Family: Panel
Area of application for S7PVlvMot

The "S7PVlvMot" block acts as the interface between the "S7VlvMot" technological block and
the operator panel.
The "BlockConnector" input of "S7PVlvMot" must be connected to any "S7VlvMot"" output.
The relevant data for the panel block (for example, status information or messages) are then
automatically processed via the panel block and displayed accordingly.
Exception:
The ENO output cannot be used for the interconnection to the "Block connector".
The IDBNo output must point to an address in the PanelConDB data block. This location in
9.19.2 Calling OBs

The cyclic interrupt OB into which you install the block (for example, OB32). Additionally in
OB100 (see Startup characteristics).

The RunUpCyc parameter can be used to set for how long (number of cycles) messages are
to be suppressed.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC24 TEST_DB

Panel blocks
9.19.5 Block parameter
Block I/Os

Op_Mode WORD IN 0 Operator input operating mode (Panel parameter)
Op_OpenMan BOOL IN 0 Operator input manual: Open (Panel parameter)
Op_CloseMan BOOL IN 0 Operator input manual: Close (Panel parameter)
Op_StopMan BOOL IN 0 Operator input manual: Stop (Panel parameter)
Op_Rbk REAL IN 0 Readback value (Panel parameter)
Op_MV REAL IN 0 Operator input manipulated variable (Panel param‐
eter)
Op_MVHL REAL IN 0 Manipulated variable high limit (Panel parameter)
Op_MVLL REAL IN 0 Manipulated variable low limit (Panel parameter)
Op_ScMVHL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (high limit) for manipulated variable
Op_ScMVLL REAL IN 0 OpScale value (low limit) for manipulated variable
Op_Reset BOOL IN 0 Operator input reset error (Panel parameter)
OSStat DWORD IN 0 Status WinCC
Op_MsgFilter DINT IN 0 Message filter for Panel
SwitchPerm DWORD IN 1 Switching authority
BlockConnector ANY IN 0 Connection to S7VlvMot block
RunUpCyc INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message suppression
ENO BOOL OUT 0
SwitchPerm_Out DWORD OUT 1 Switching authority output
OSStat_Out DWORD OUT 0 Status WinCC
PanelAct BOOL OUT 0 Panel active

Panel blocks

Bit3 Valve feedback error
Bit4 Feedback error
Bit5 - Bit6 -
Bit7 ER - Alarm high limit
Bit8 ER - Alarm low limit
Bit9 Rbk - Warning high limit
Bit10 Rbk - Warning low limit
Bit11 - Bit15 -
Bit16 Torque shutoff open enabled
Bit17 Torque shutoff closed enabled
Bit18 - Bit30 -
Bit31 Repair switch active

Bit0 LocalAct
Bit1 ManAct
Bit2 -
Bit3 Panel active
Bit4 AutoAct
Bit5 - Bit6
Bit7 Error
Bit8 Open
Bit9 Closed
Bit10 Stopped
Bit11 -
Bit12 Open
Bit13 Close
Bit14 Forced open
Bit15 Forced close
Bit16 Forced stop
Bit17 Output open command
Bit18 Display errors
Bit19 Output close command
Bit20 Command for rapid stop
Bit21 Output stop command
Bit22 OosAct

Panel blocks

Bit23 MV_Ext
Bit24 - Bit31 -
Status word assignment for the Op_Visibility parameter

0 Error
1 Alarm
2 Warning
3 Display OP
4 Alarm high
5 Alarm low
6 Warning high
7 Warning low
8-15 -
16 Lock
17 Repair switch
18 MV_St
19 -
20 MV_Edit
21-23 -
24 Aux
25-31 -
9.19.6.1 S7VlvMot views

● Standard view
● Message view

Panel blocks
9.19.6.2 S7PVlvMot standard view
Display when calling via block icon without MV (S7VlvMot Feature.Bit13 = 0)
Display when calling via block icon with MV (S7VlvMot Feature.Bit13 = 1)
9.19.6.3 S7PVlvMot block icons

There are two versions of each block icon. One version for the binary mode (S7VlvMot
Feature.Bit13 = 0) and one version for analog mode (S7VlvMot Feature.Bit13 = 1).
The versions for analog mode have "MV" in their name.
Both versions of the block icons look identical. The difference is in the display of the standard
view of the called faceplate.

Panel blocks

Controller blocks 10
10.1 S7PIDCon - Continuous PID controller
10.1.1 S7PIDCon description

Family: Control
Area of application for S7PIDCon

The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control
● Smith predictor closed-loop control
● Override control (override)
How it works
The block is a PID controller with continuous output signal (manipulated variable). It is used
to activate a final controlling element with continuous action input.
The block functions following the PID algorithm with a delayed D action and an integrator with
double precision.
The block is suitable for controlling sluggish control loops, for example, for temperatures and
filling levels, and high-speed control loops, for example, for flow rates and speed. For a given
CPU, a compromise has to be made between the number of controllers and the frequency
with which the individual controllers have to be processed. The faster the modulated control
loops are (i.e., the more frequently the manipulated variables have to be calculated per time
unit), the lower the number of controllers that can be installed.
Configuration

Controller blocks
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the S7_archive:='shortterm' attribute must be set for the following tags in the process tag types
for control loops at the controller function blocks:
● Output parameters
– MV
– RbkOut
– SP
– PV_Out
Use the startup characteristics Feature bit to define the startup characteristics for this block.
Following startup, the messages are suppressed for the number of cycles configured in the
RunUpCyc parameter.
Status word assignment for Status1 parameter

0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct
4 OosLi
5 AutAct
6 Not used
7 ManAct
8 SP_ExtAct
9 MV_ForOn
10 MV_TrkOn AND NOT (ManAct OR OosAct OR MV_ForOn)
11 MV > ManLoLim
12 - 18 Not used
19 AdvCoAct
20 Not used
21 NegGain
22 Not used
23 OptimEn
24 OptimOcc
25 - 31 Not used

Controller blocks

0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act
2 PV_WH_Act
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 PV_WL_Act
6 PV_AL_Act
7 PV_AH_En
8 PV_WH_En
9 Not used
10 Not used
11 PV_WL_En
12 PV_AL_En
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 Not used
16 Not used
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act
20 ER_AL_Act
21 ER_AH_En
22 ER_AL_En
23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act
26 RbkWL_Act
27 RbkWH_En
28 RbkWL_En
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 Not used

0 - 26 Not used
27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr
29 RdyToStart
30 - 31 Not used

Controller blocks
10.1.2 S7PIDCon operating modes

The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode
● Manual mode
● Program mode for controllers
● Out of service
10.1.3 Functions
Generation of manipulated variables

The manipulated variable MV can be generated as follows:
MV_ForOn MV = Limit monitor‐ State

ManAct ing
MV_TrkOn
AdvCoAct AND
NOT AdvCo‐
ModSP
1 - - - MV_Force none Forced tracking through con‐
d straint without limitation
0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual mode, set by the opera‐
ManLoLim tor
0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 1 AdvCoMV MV_HiLim Higher-level program mode
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 0 P_Part + MV_HiLim Automatic mode (PID algorithm)
I_Part + MV_LoLim
D_Part +
FFwd
If the controller is in "Out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid
value in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature
bit (neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup).
Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable

The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable.

Controller blocks
Neutral position
The block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves, and controllers.
Group error
This block includes the standard function, Group error. For more information see the APL
Function Manual.
The following parameters are taken into consideration when generating the group error:
● CSF
Output a signal for ready to start

This block provides the standard function, Output a signal for ready to start. For more
"Final controlling element active" information

If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the minimum manual limit ManLoLim, this is
recognized as final controlling element active. This status can be used to display a custom
icon in the process image, for example, and is saved in the status word (see Status word
section in description of S7PIDCon (Page 369)).
Limit monitoring of position feedback

The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of feedback. For more information
see the APL Function Manual.
External/internal setpoint specification

The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external. For more
Setpoint limiting for external setpoints D

The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints. For more
Gradient limit of the setpoint

The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint. For more information
Using setpoint ramp

The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp. For more information see the

Controller blocks
Tracking setpoint in manual mode

The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode. For more
Limit monitoring of the process value

The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value. For more
Control error generation and dead band

The block provides the standard function Control deviation generation and dead band. For
more information see the APL Function Manual.
Feature bit 14 can be used to feedforward an external control error ER_Ext. When the external
control error is activated, ER_Ext affects both the dead band and the control error alarm
generation.
Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes
Limit monitoring of control error

The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable,
and control deviation. For more information see the APL Function Manual.
Inverting control direction

The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction. For more information see
Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable, and process value

Controller gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
Gain as physical variable:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
● NormPVH = 100 and NormPVL = 0
● NormMVH = 100 and NormMVL = 0
The effective gain is:
GainEff = Gain
Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):

Controller blocks
Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and manipulated
variables.
● Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
● The manual value, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, feedforward control, and
the corresponding parameters are set according to the physical measuring range of the
manipulated variable.
The effective gain is:
● GainEff = (NormMVH - NormMVL) / (NormPVH - NormPVL) • Gain
Select a unit of measure

The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure. For more information
PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
● MV = Gain • (1 + 1 / (TI • s) + (TD • s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain • s)) • ER
Where:
● s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

Controller blocks
Note
This formula describes a standard application where the P, I, and D component is activated
and the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1,TI <> 0,DiffToFbk =
0andPropFacSP = 1).
The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.

● The P component is at the P_Part I/O and can be deactivated using PropSel = 0.
● The I component is displayed at the I_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TI = 0.
● The D component is displayed at the D_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TD = 0.
Structure segmentation at controllers

The block provides the standard function Structure segmentation at controllers. For more
Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables

The block provides the standard function Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables.
Control zone
The block provides the standard function Using control zones. For more information see the
The following characteristics are available for this block at the relevant bits:
Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics
1 Characteristics for the out of service mode
2 Reset the commands for switching the operating mode
4 Set switch or button mode
12 Control zone with specified I component
13 Control zone with frozen I component
14 External control error
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "Out of service" operating
mode
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call

Controller blocks
Bit Function
24 Enable local operator authorization
25 Suppress all messages
26 Characteristics of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode
28 Disabling switching points
29 Signal at limit violation
The block provides the standard function Operator authorizations. For more information see
Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "Automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "Manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoEn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
8 1 = Operator can change maximum usage limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change minimum usage limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change maximum operating limit of the manipulated variable Man‐
HiLim
11 1 = Operator can change minimum operating limit of the manipulated variable Man‐
LiLim
12 1 = Operator can use the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can change between the time value or the value for the ramp
SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can activate the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 1 = Operator can permit the PID optimization function OptimEn
20 1 = Operator can activate the track setpoint in "Manual mode" function SP_TrkPV
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral action time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative action time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain

Controller blocks
Bit Function
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 1 = Operator can change the control zone parameter ConZone
28 - 31 Not used
The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:
Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) for the high alarm PV_AH_Lim
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) for the high warning PV_WH_Lim
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) for the low warning PV_WL_Lim
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) for the low alarm PV_AL_Lim
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (control error) for the high alarm ER_AH_Lim
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (control error) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (control error) for the low alarm ER_AL_Lim
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high
warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) for the low warning RbkWL_Lim
13 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can change MsgLock
17 - 31 Not used
Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed as a parameter in OS_Perm, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm.Bit.
Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
SIMATIC BATCH functionality

This block provides the standard function, SIMATIC BATCH functionality. For more information

Controller blocks

The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1
66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low
10.1.5 Messaging
Message characteristics
● Process messages

The following messages can be output for process control errors:
Message instance Message class Event

MsgEvId09 AS process control message - fault External error occurred
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If this signal changes
to CSF = 1, a process control error is triggered (MsgEvId09).
Process messages

MsgEvId01 Alarm - high PV - Alarm high limit violated
MsgEvId02 Warning - high PV - Warning high limit violated
MsgEvId03 Warning - low PV - Warning low limit violated
MsgEvId04 Alarm - low PV - Alarm low limit violated
MsgEvId05 Alarm - high ER - Alarm high limit violated
MsgEvId06 Alarm - low ER - Alarm low limit violated

Controller blocks

MsgEvId07 Warning - high Rbk - Warning high limit violated
MsgEvId08 Warning - low Rbk - Warning low limit violated
Associated value structure for message instances
Data type Block parameter

REAL Aux
DWORD BatchID
DINT MsgFilter
10.1.6 I/Os
Input parameters

EN 1 = Called block is processed BOOL 1
NegGain 0 = Positive controller gain: ER = Gain · (SP - PV), 1 = Negative BOOL 0
controller gain: ER = Gain · (PV - SP)
Gain Proportional gain REAL 1.0
NormPVH Process value range (PV)) for standardizing the proportional gain REAL 100.0
(GAIN) high
NormPVL Process value range (PV) for standardizing the proportional gain REAL 0.0
(GAIN) low
NormMVH Manipulated variable range (MV) for standardizing the proportional REAL 100.0
gain (GAIN) high
NormMVL Manipulated variable range (MV) for standardizing the proportional REAL 0.0
gain (GAIN) low
TI Integral time [s] REAL 100.0
IntHoldPos 1 = Integrator cannot run in positive direction BOOL 0
IntHoldNeg 1 = Integrator cannot run in negative direction BOOL 0
TD Derivative time [s] REAL 0.0
DiffGain Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain = TD / (delay time of D com‐ REAL 5.0
ponent)
PropSel 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
DiffToFbk 1 = D component is placed in the feedback BOOL 0
IntSel Reserved BOOL 0
DiffSel Reserved BOOL 0
PropFacSP Applying the P component to the feedback [0..1]. 0 = P component REAL 1.0
fully in feedback
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
ConZone Width of control zone REAL 0.0

Controller blocks

SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/external): 1 = Interconnection, 0 = BOOL 0
Operator
SP_ExtOp 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_IntOp 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnection) BOOL 0
SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnection) BOOL 0
SP_Int Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_InHiLim Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Ext external setpoint - (to interconnection) REAL 0.0
SP_ExHiLim Limit (high) for external setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_ExLoLim Limit (low) for external setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "Manual mode" and with tracking BOOL 0
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint active BOOL 1
SP_RateOn 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradients BOOL 0
SP_RmpOn 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target setpoint SP_RmpTarget BOOL 0
SP_RmpMod‐ 1 = Use time (SP_RmpTime) for setpoint ramp, 0 = Use gradient BOOL 0
Time
SP_UpRaLim Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint [SP_Unit/s] REAL 100.0
SP_DnRaLim Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint [SP_Unit/s] REAL 100.0
SP_RmpTime Time for setpoint ramp [s] from current SP up to SP_RmpTarget REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTarget Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
PV Process value (controlled variable) REAL 0.0
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm and warning limits REAL 1.0
PV_A_DC Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_A_DG Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_W_DC Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_W_DG Delay time for outgoing PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
ER_Ext External control error REAL 0.0
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for control error monitoring REAL 100.0

Controller blocks

ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for control error monitoring REAL -100.0
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for control error REAL 1.0
ER_A_DC Delay for incoming alarms during control error monitoring REAL 0.0
ER_A_DG Delay for outgoing alarms during control error monitoring REAL 0.0
ER_AH_DFac Delay factor for positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms REAL 0.0
during control error monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_AL_DFac Delay factor for negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms REAL 0.0
during control error monitoring ER_AL_Lim
ER_AH_En 1 = Enable alarm (high) for control error monitoring BOOL 1
ER_AL_En 1 = Enable alarm (low) for control error monitoring BOOL 1
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (high) for control error monitoring BOOL 1
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (low) for control error monitoring BOOL 1
MV_Offset Manipulated variable for ER=0, operating point for controller with REAL 0.0
deactivated I component
FFwd Input for additive disturbance variable activation REAL 0.0
FFwdHiLim Limit (high) for additive disturbance variable activation REAL 100.0
FFwdLoLim Limit (low) for additive disturbance variable activation REAL -100.0
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV BOOL 0
MV_Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable MV REAL 0.0
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: 0 = Operator, 1 = Intercon‐ BOOL 0
nection or SFC
AutModOp 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (controlled by ModLiOp = 0) BOOL 0
ManModOp 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (controlled by ModLiOp = 0) BOOL 1
AutModLi 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnection or SFC (controlled by BOOL 0
ModLiOp = 1)
ManModLi 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection or SFC (controlled by Mod‐ BOOL 0
LiOp = 1)
AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via interconnection BOOL 0
AdvCoOn 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0
AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": 1 = Setpoint target, 0 = Manipulated vari‐ BOOL 1
able target
AdvCoMstrOn Activate (0-1) or deactivate (1-0) "program mode" via edge transition BOOL 0
AdvCoMV Specified value from the external program REAL 0.0
OosOp 1 = "Out of service", via OS operation BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 edge transition) BOOL 0
OptimEn 1 = Enable optimization of PID parameters by PID tuner BOOL 0
OptimOcc 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
CPI_In Reserved REAL 0.0
RefStdDevIn Reference value of PV standard deviation (sigma) in defined "good" REAL 0.0
state of control loop
Man Manual specification for the manipulated variable REAL 0.0
ManHiLim Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0

Controller blocks

MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV REAL 100.0
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV REAL 0.0
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable MV_Forced unlimited at out‐ BOOL 0
put MV
MV_Forced Forced manipulated variable that is not limited and assumes top REAL 0.0
priority
SafePos 1 = Neutral position for controller manipulated variable is ManHiLim, BOOL 0
0 = Neutral position for controller manipulated variable is ManLoLim
Rbk Position feedback for display on OS REAL 0.0
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (high) REAL 100.0
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (low) REAL 0.0
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position feedback BOOL 1
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position feedback BOOL 1
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) for position feedback BOOL 1
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) for position feedback BOOL 1
PV_OpScaleH Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate high REAL 100.0
PV_OpScaleL Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate low REAL 0.0
MV_OpScaleH OS display area for manipulated variable MV high REAL 100.0
MV_OpScaleL OS display area for manipulated variable MV low REAL 0.0
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
TimeFactor Time unit: 0 = seconds, 1 = minutes, 2 = hours INT 0
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in WinCC SCADA BYTE 16#00
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are suppressed during these INT 3
cycles
MsgEvId01 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
Aux Associated value REAL 0.0
BatchEn 1 = Batch enable for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch number DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name STRING[32]
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0

Controller blocks

CmpID Reserved DWORD 16#00000000
Permis Switching authority INT 2
CSF 1 = External error (process control error) BOOL 0
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. BOOL 0
OS_Perm I/O for operator authorizations STRUCT -
… ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator authorizations STRUCT -
… ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Feature I/O for additional functions STRUCT -

… ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions STRUCT -

… ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
algorithm.
Output parameters

MV Manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable violated BOOL 0
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable violated BOOL 0
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "Manual mode", corresponds to input parameter REAL 100.0
ManHiLim
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "Manual mode", corresponds to input parameter Man‐ REAL 0.0
LoLim
RbkOut Output for position feedback REAL 0.0
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback enabled. You can change BOOL 0
the response for this parameter by setting Feature bit 28 (deactivate
trigger points) and Feature bit 29 (signal limit overshoot/undershoot)
accordingly.

Controller blocks

RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback enabled. You can change BOOL 0
accordingly.
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending BOOL 0
RdyToStart 1 = Ready to start pending BOOL 0
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" BOOL 0
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" is enabled BOOL 1
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" is active BOOL 0
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed, 0 = Control loop opened BOOL 0
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint active; 0 = Internal setpoint active BOOL 0
AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" is active BOOL 0
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available BOOL 0
CascaCut Cascade connection: 1 = Control chain from primary to secondary BOOL 0
controller is interrupted
SP Setpoint used by controller REAL 0.0
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corresponds to input parameter SP_Ext REAL 0.0
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external setpoint has been reached BOOL 0
SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external setpoint has been reached BOOL 0
SP_UpRaAct 1 = Positive gradient limiting of setpoint is active BOOL 0
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint is active BOOL 0
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corresponds to input parameter SP_InHiLim REAL 100.0
SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corresponds to input parameter SP_InLoLim REAL 0.0
PV_Out Output for process value REAL 0.0
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. You can change the response for this BOOL 0
parameter by setting Feature bit 28 (deactivate trigger points) and
Feature bit 29 (signal limit overshoot/undershoot) accordingly.
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. You can change the response for this BOOL 0
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. You can change the response for this BOOL 0
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. You can change the response for this BOOL 0
PV_ToleHi Reserved REAL 0.0
PV_ToleLo Reserved REAL 0.0
ER Control deviation REAL 0.0
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation violated. You can change BOOL 0
accordingly.

Controller blocks

ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation violated. You can change BOOL 0
accordingly.
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time [s] for incoming alarms during control error REAL 0.0
monitoring
FFwdHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for additive disturbance variable activation violated BOOL 0
FFwdLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for additive disturbance variable activation violated BOOL 0
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt BOOL 0
GainEff Effective proportional gain, depends on Gain, NormPV and NormMV REAL 1.0
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value INT 0
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 0
P_Part P component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
I_Part I component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
D_Part D component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error numbers that can be output INT -1
by this block, see the error handling of S7PIDCon.
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the block algorithm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm with settings changed by the block algorithm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
LocAuthAct Local operator authorization enabled BOOL 0
QMsgErr 1 = Message error BOOL 0
MsgAck01 Message acknowledgment status 1 BOOL 16#0000

Controller blocks

Calculation of the output parameter ER_A_DCOut

ER_A_DC is assigned by default to the output before a setpoint change.
● ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC
In the case of a setpoint change in the positive direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
● ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)
In the case of a setpoint change in the negative direction during automatic mode, the output
is calculated as follows:
● ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, -1*ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)
Once the control loop has stabilized again, i.e., (ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <=
(ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst) and the delay time for outgoing alarms ER_A_DG has expired, the
output is reset to ER_A_DC:
● ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC
Activating and deactivating the function

The function is deactivated (default) when the following applies: ER_AH_DFac = 0.0 and
ER_AL_DFac = 0.0
10.1.7.1 S7PIDCon views

The block S7PIDCon provides the following views:
● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Ramp view
● Parameter view
● Preview
● Batch view
● Block icon

Controller blocks
10.1.7.2 S7PIDCon standard view
19
1
18 5
2
3
17 4
16 5
15 3
6
14
7
6
13 9
12
10
11
(1) Display and switch the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode
● Automatic mode
● Program mode for controllers
● Out of service
(2) Displaying and switching the setpoint specification
This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.
(4) Display of the process value
This area shows the current process value.
(5) Display and change the setpoint
This area shows the current setpoint.
(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint
This area is already set and cannot be changed.
(7) Display and change the manipulated variable
This area shows the current manipulated variable.

Controller blocks
(8) Display of the position feedback

This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable.
(9) Bar graph for the manipulated variable
This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
(10) Bar graph for position feedback
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Optimizing"
● "Tracking"
● "Forced tracking"
(13) Display area for operating levels
This area shows the current operating level of the block.
(14) Limit display
These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
(15) Bar graph for the process value
This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
(16) Bar graph for the setpoint
This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
(17) Display of external setpoint
This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".
(18) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp
This display [R] shows you the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the ramp view.
(19) Limit display for the setpoint
These triangles show SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim limits which can be configured for the setpoint
in the engineering system ES.

Controller blocks
10.1.7.3 Limit view of S7PIDCon
You can set several values in this view by default:

● Control deviation limits
● Setpoint operating range
● Manipulated variable operating range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.
(1) "Process value limits (PV)"
In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value.
● "Hysteresis"

Controller blocks

(2) "Control deviation limits (ER)"
In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation.
● "Hysteresis"
(3) "Readback limits (RBK)"
In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value.
● "Hysteresis"
(4) Setpoint operating range (SP)
In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint operating range.
(5) Manipulated variable operating range
In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operating range.
(6) "Operator control enable"
● Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
operator control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Controller blocks
10.1.7.4 Ramp view of S7PIDCon
(1) Enable "gradient limit"

Use this check box to enable "gradient limit" for the setpoint. "Gradient limit" can be set
separately for positive or negative setpoint changes ("Gradient +" or "Gradient -").
(2) "Ramp function"
In this area, you can set the type of ramp function for the setpoint.
You can set the following types of ramp function:
● "Time duration"
● "Target setpoint"
You can set the time duration and the target setpoint.
(3) Enable "Ramp"
You can use this control to enable or disable the configured function in the ramp function for
the setpoint change.
You can only enable this when the setpoint specification is set to "internal" in the standard view
of the block. The enable is only valid for one setpoint change and is subsequently disabled
again.
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
authorizations (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Controller blocks
10.1.7.5 S7PIDCon parameter view
(1) "Settings"
You can enable the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "PID optimization": ☑ activate controller optimization
● "SP := PV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from "manual mode" to "automatic
mode"
● "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of the setpoint for setpoint switchover from
"external" to "internal". The internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.
(2) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and, therefore, influence the controller.
● "Gain": Proportional gain
● "Integral time" Integral action time in [s]
● "Derivative time TD": Derivative action time in [s]
● "Derivative gain": Gain of the derivative action
● "Dead band": Width of dead band
● "Control zone": Width of control zone
(3) "Delay factor"
In this area, you set the following delay factors for the controller:
● "ER H Alarm": Factor for high alarm in [s/PV_Unit]
● "ER L Alarm": Factor for high alarm in [s/PV_Unit]

Controller blocks

process
authorizations (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
10.1.7.6 S7PIDCon preview
The preview shows you the parameters that you, as an OS operator, can control. You cannot
control anything in this view, however.
(1) Process value
This area shows the real process value (PV).
(2) Preview area
This area shows you a preview for the following values:
● "SP external": currently applicable external setpoint
● "SP internal": currently applicable internal setpoint
● "Control deviation": Current control deviation
● "Program value": specified value for program mode
● "Disturbance variable": additive value for feedforward control

Controller blocks
● "Track MV": track manipulated variable (value is 1)

● "Tracking value": effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable"
(3) Operator control enables
process
authorizations (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● Change "SP": You can change the setpoint.
● Change "MV": You can change the manipulated variable.
● "Program mode": You can switch to "program mode".
● "Automatic": You can switch to "Automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "Manual mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
10.1.7.7 S7PIDCon block icons

A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Violation of alarm and warning limits as well as the process control error CSF
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Process value (black)
● Setpoint (blue)

Controller blocks
● Feedback value (red), not available for types 3 and 4

● Switching authority: Operator panel “OP”, local control station "LCS" or local OS (no icon)

Controller blocks
10.2 S7TiSwitch - Time switch with 8 switch points
10.2.1 S7TiSwitch description

Family: Control
Area of application
The S7TiSwitch block is a software implementation of a clock timer. Eight switch channels
(pairs of "On" and "Off" switch points) can be preset. Each channel can be switched On or Off
for every day of the week separately.
Configuration
Compilation settings
The S7TiSwitch block requires different FCs in the number range 1-8. Therefore, the
compilation settings for the CFC must be configured under Options\Settings\Compile
\Download in such a way that the FC numbers 1-8 are in the reserved area.
All pulse timers are reset during startup. According to APL (Feature Bit0 ‘Startup’), messages
and operator authorizations either retain their last value or they are reset.
Called blocks
FC1 AD_DT_TM
FC7 DT_DAY
FC8 DT_TOD
FC14 GT_DT
FC34 SB_DT_DT
FC69 LOC_TIME
SFC1 READ_CLK
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC19 ALARM_SC
SFC20 BLKMOV
SFC107 ALARM_DQ

Controller blocks
Configuration

For a description of the individual parameters, refer to the section S7TiSwitch I/Os
(Page 404).

0 Allocated
1 BatchEn
2 On.Value
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 OnAct.Value
22 - 31 Not used

(Page 404).

0 MsgLock.Value
1 - 31 Not used

(Page 404).

0…31 Not used
Status word assignment for the parameter Status4

For a description of the individual parameters, refer to section S7TiSwitch I/Os (Page 404).

0…31 Not used

Controller blocks
10.2.2 S7TiSwitch operating modes
The block can be operated using the following modes:

● On
● Out of service
If the block is in the "On" mode it functions as described. If the block is in the "Out of service"
mode, all switching outputs are immediately set to "Off". When this happens, no "Off" pulses
(P_Offn) are output.
General information on operating modes is available in the APL documentation.
10.2.3 S7TiSwitch functions
Function
Every switch point can be set to a time between 00:00:00 and 23:59:59. The switch-on time
must always be earlier than the switch-off time.
The output signal of a switch channel is set to "On" if the current time is later than or the same
as the switch-on time and earlier or the same as the switch-off time. Timings are to the second.
Example:
Switch-on time: 08:00:00 ⇒ Output is set to "On" at 08:00:00

Switch-off point: 09:00:00 ⇒ Output is set to "Off" at 09:00:01
All eight switch channels are logically ORed and the result determines the status of the block
switching output. In other words, if a switch channel is 'On' then the switching output is 'On'.
As a result, the switching output can be left "On" continuously overnight (00:00:00).
Example:
Switch-on time for channel 1: 22:00:00 (day 1) ⇒ Output is set to "On" at 22:00:00 (day 1)
Switch-off time for channel 1: 23:59:59 (day 1) ⇒
Switch-on time for channel 2: 00:00:00 (day 2) ⇒ Output is set to "Off" at 03:00:01 (day 2)
Switch-off time for channel 2: 03:00:00 (day 2) ⇒
For every switching output there are two pulsed outputs–one for the "On" pulse (P_Onn) and
another one for the "Off" pulse (P_Offn). The pulse length can be set for all pulses at once in
the parameter view of the faceplate.
In addition to performing the switching function, the S7TiSwitch block indicates when each
channel is next due to be switched "On" or "Off" based on the current program. The periods
of time prior to the next switch-on points are indicated at the NxTiOn block outputs and the
periods of time prior to the next switch-off points at the NxTiOffn block outputs. The amount
of time is indicated in seconds (double integer).

Controller blocks
At OS level, the information is displayed in the faceplate preview in

"dd hh:mm:ss" format when you move the mouse pointer to a channel display and left-click.
This block provides the standard function, operator authorizations. Information is available in
the section Operator control permissions in the APL Function manual.
Bit Function
0 Reserved
1 1 = Operator can change switching points
2 1 = Operator can activate "On" mode
3 1 = Operator can activate "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can change pulse time
5 1 = Local internal AS time used (LOC_TIME block)
5 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can activate MsgLock
17 - 31 Not used
External time signal

If Feature.Bit 2 'External time signal' is activated, the S7TiSwitch block uses the time at the
block inputs TiExt, TiExtQc, TiExtSt as the basis for switching.
Automatic switching of the time signal

Feature.Bit 3 only has an effect if the 'External time signal' Feature is active. If Feature.Bit 3
is activated and the quality code of the external time signal is poot (TiExtQc ≠ 16#80 and
TiExtQc ≠ 16#60), the block uses the AS time or local AS time (depending on Feature.Bit 4)
as the basis for switching.
Internal timing signal

If Feature.Bit 2 'External time signal' is not activated, the S7TiSwitch block uses the CPU time
as the basis for switching. Feature.Bit 4 "AS time" can be used to influence how the CPU time
is to be used:
Bit = 1: The AS time (UTC) is used as the basis for switching.
Bit = 0: The local AS time (UTC with time zone) is used.
The CPU in use determines how the AS time is formed. The reaction in this case is defined
by Feature.Bit 5:
Bit = 1: The local time and standard/daylight saving time is read from the time status of the
CPU using the LOC_TIME block. This function can only be used in CPUs with time status (e.g.
S7-400).
Bit = 0: The local time and standard/daylight saving time must be determined for each user
and enabled at the TiLoc input. For the visualization of the standard/daylight saving time, the

Controller blocks
LocTiSetting input must be adapted for each user to the user-specific parameter
assignment.
S7TiSwit use in CPU with time status (e.g. S7400):

For this, the Feature input parameter must be set as follows:
● Feature.Bit4 = 0
No additional blocks and interconnections are needed:
S7TiSwit use in CPU without time status (e.g. S7300) - "Local and standard/daylight saving
time in the CPU":
The function BT_LT (FC 61) of the standard library is used to determine the standard and the
daylight saving time.
The standard/daylight saving time parameters can be assigned using the rule DB of the
standard library. The structure of the rule DB must be connected to the LocTiSetting input
(see documentation for the standard library rule DB / UDT 60). For this function, the Feature
input parameter of S7TiSwitch must be set as follows:
Additional blocks and interconnections are needed:
S7TiSwit use in CPU without time status (e.g. S7300) - "Local time in the CPU":
The function AD_DT_TM (FC1) of the standard library is used to determine the local time.

Controller blocks
The time offset can be configured at the D input of the AD_DT_TM function. (The
LocTiSetting.B2L.T input of S7TiSwitch must be set to 0 for this). For this function, the
Feature input parameter of S7TiSwitch must be set as follows:
Additional blocks and interconnections are needed:

An overview of all the reactions provided by the Feature parameter can be found in the section
titled Configurable response using the Feature I/O in the APL Function manual.
The following modes of behavior are available for this block at the relevant bits:
Bit Function
0 0 = Start up with initialization defined in OB100, 1 = Retain last stored values
1 1 = OosLi can set "Out of service"
2 1 = External time signal is used for switching
3 1 = Automatically switch over to internal time if TiExtQc <> 16#80 or 16#60
4 0 = Local time, 1 = AS internal time used for switching
5 1 = Local internal AS time used (LOC_TIME block)
6 - 21 Not used
22 1 = Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call
23 Not used
24 1 = Local operator authorization enabled
25 1 = Suppress all messages if MsgLock = 1
26 - 31 Not used
Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

An overview of all the reactions provided by the Feature2 parameter can be found in the
section titled Configurable response using the Feature I/O in the APL Function manual.

Controller blocks
The following modes of behavior are available for this block at the relevant bits:
Bit Function
0 - 31 Not used
10.2.4 S7TiSwitch error handling
Since the block does not handle process values, it only recognizes two errors:
● ErrorNum
Displays the current error number.

The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

00 No error
10.2.5 S7TiSwitch messaging
Message behavior

The following control system fault messages can be output:

MsgEvId01 AS control system message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error
Associated values for the message instance
Associated value Block parameters

1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID

Controller blocks
10.2.6 S7TiSwitch I/Os
Input parameters
Parameter Description Data type Default

EN BOOL 1
SwTiOn1 … SwTiOn8 * Time switching point 1 … 8 on DINT 0
SwTiOff1 … Time switching point 1 … 8 off DINT 86399
SwTiOff8 *
SwAct1 … SwAct8 * active days switching point 1 … 8 BYTE 16#00
OnOp * 1 = On mode: On mode by operator BOOL 0
OosOp * 1 = Oos mode: Oos mode by operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = Oos mode: Oos mode by field signal BOOL 0
TiExt External time DATE_AND_TIME 2011-04-04-0:00:00
TiExtQc Quality of external time signal BYTE 16#80
TiExtSt Daylight saving time BOOL 0
LocTiSetting Local Time Settings / Struct Rule-DB STRUCT -
UDT60
MsgLock * Inhibit process message BOOL 0
P_Time * Time for on/off pulse REAL 2.0
SampleTime Sampling time [s] REAL 0.1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles for which all messages INT 3
are suppressed
MsgEvId01 Message ID DWORD 16#60000001
Aux * Auxiliary value REAL 0.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID * Batch number DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName * Batch name STRING[32] ''
StepNo * Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
CmpID area code DWORD 16#00000001
Permis * Switch authority INT LeitstandOS
CSF Control system fault message - External BOOL 0
error
UserStatus * User status bits BYTE 300
algorithm.

Controller blocks
Output parameters
Parameter Description Data type Default

ENO BOOL 0
TdAs AS time of day DINT 0
DwAs AS day of the week INT 0
TdLoc Local time of the day DINT 0
DwLoc Local day of the week INT 0
StLoc Local daylight saving time active BOOL 0
TdExt External time of the day DINT 0
DwExt External day of the week INT 0
StExt External daylight saving time active BOOL 0
TdCurr Currently used time of the day DINT 0
DwCurr Currently used day of the week INT 0
StCurr Current daylight saving time BOOL 0
SumMsgAct Summary message Active BOOL 0
OnAct On mode is active BOOL 0
OosAct Out of service is active BOOL 0
On Output switch point general BOOL 0
P_On On pulse output switch point general BOOL 0
P_Off Off pulse output switch point general BOOL 0
NxTiOn Next on switch point REAL 0.0
NxTiOff Next off switch point REAL 0.0
On1 … On8 Output switch point 1 … 8 BOOL 0
P_On1 … P_On8 On pulse output switch point 1 … 8 BOOL 0
P_Off1 … P_Off8 Off pulse output switch point 1 … 8 BOOL 0
NxTiOn1 … NxTiOn8 Next on switch point 1 … 8 REAL 0.0
NxTiOff1 … NxTiOff8 Next off switch point 1 … 8 REAL 0.0
OS_PermOut Operator permission: Output for OS DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Operator permission: Output for OS DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
LocAuthAct Local authorization active BOOL 0
Status1 Status1 Word DWORD 16#00000000
ErrorNum Error number INT -1
QMsgErr Message error BOOL 0
MsgStat01 Message status WORD 16#0000
MsgAck01 Message acknowledge BOOL 0

Controller blocks
10.2.7.1 S7TiSwitch views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Trend view
● Parameter view
● Preview
● Batch view
10.2.7.2 S7TiSwitch standard view
4
3

Controller blocks
(1) Mode
Display and switchover of the operating mode This area provides information on the currently
valid operating mode. The following operating modes can be shown here:
● On
● Out of service
(2) Display of the activation and deactivation times
This display shows the activation and deactivation times and displays the active/inactive
weekdays. The 8 time windows can be activated or deactivated. If a time window is currently
active, this is visualized by a green square.
● "Maintenance"
Additional information is available in the 'Maintenance enable' section in the APL manual.
(5) Current time display
This area displays the current day and current time and whether daylight-saving time is
currently active.
(6) Status display
The current status of the timer block is graphically displayed here.
10.2.7.3 S7TiSwitch parameter view
(1) Settings
You can change parameters in this area. Refer to the section "Changing values" in the APL
manual for more information on the following parameters you can set:
● "Pulse time": Length of the pulse time

Controller blocks
10.2.7.4 S7TiSwitch preview
1
4
(1) Enabled operations

This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Red X: The OS operator is generally prohibited from accessing this parameter due to the
configured AS operator control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
(2) Switch points
Graphic representation of the switching points.
(3) Week, Day
Buttons to change the switchover point view
(5) Time
● Current time
● AS time
● AS local time
● External time signal

Controller blocks
10.2.7.5 S7TiSwitch block icons
S7TiSwitch/1:
S7TiSwitch/2:
S7TiSwitch/3:
S7TiSwitch/4:

Controller blocks
10.3 S7SplitRange - Split range for control
10.3.1 Function
Area of application for S7SplitRange

The block divides the manipulated variable of a controller into a maximum of 4 final controlling
elements and, if necessary, changes the controller manipulated variable to bypass deadbands.

Family: System
10.3.2 Calling OBs



Controller blocks
10.3.4 Interconnection in the CFC
10.3.5 Supplying the manipulated variables

When the startup of the split range block is finished and the controller enable is present, the
manipulated variables are output for the final controlling elements.
Final controlling elements that are not available are assigned the configured lower limit as a
manipulated variable.
Manipulated variables are calculated for final controlling elements that are available based on
the "inverted" state, the slope, and the ranges of the final controlling elements and the
manipulated variable of the controller.
If the manipulated variable of the controller is outside the limits determined by the block, the
value is limited internally.
10.3.6 Adjusting the controller

If the active manipulated variable of the controller is in a standby area, the manipulated variable
of the controller is adjusted in order to skip this standby area. This means that a jump to the
higher or lower limit of the next final controlling element takes place. A deadband is taken into
consideration to prevent cyclic switching on and off of the final controlling elements. The
controller is adjusted; if it was not, the next final controlling element would not be activated
due to limitation of the final controlling elements. If the manipulated variable of the controller
exceeds the limits determined by the block, it is adjusted to the limits.

Controller blocks

The sequence of the final controlling elements is checked for plausibility. An uninverted final
controlling element must not be followed by an inverted final controlling element.
The lower limit of the final controlling elements must not be less than 0.0.
If an error occurs, the QERR output is set. The manipulated variables are set to their lower
limits.

During startup, the outputs for the enabled manipulated variables are set to their lower limits.
When the startup cycles are finished, the block waits for the feedback from the final controlling
elements indicating that their startup phase is complete. It is only at this point that calculation
of the manipulated variables commences.
The RUNUPCYC parameter can be used to set how long (number of cycles) the outputs are
to be disabled for the manipulated variables.

No message behavior is applicable to the S7SplitRange block.
10.3.10 Diagram of a split range control process

The example in the diagram uses 2 inverted and 2 uninverted final controlling elements. The
manipulated variable of the final controlling elements is shown on the y axis (LMN_x: 0 – 100%).
The x axis shows the manipulated variable which is output by the controller block (PID
controller, e.g., CONT_C). The range of the manipulated variable of the controller is determined
by the S7SPLITRANGE block and calculated from the individual ranges of the final controlling
elements.
The ranges of the LMN_x_INIT final controlling elements are determined from:
● LMN_[x]_INIT = LMN_[x-1]_INIT + (100 / STATUS_x.GRAD)
(STATUS_X.GRAD = slope of the final controlling element). These limits are determined
cyclically and stored internally. If a final controlling element is not enabled or not available
(EN_x = FALSE), the range = 0 and thus LMN_[x]_INIT = LMN_[x+1]_INIT.
The following is calculated for the controller.
● Upper limit LMN_HLM = Σ (100 / STATUS_x.GRAD) of the uninverted final controlling
elements.
● Lower limit LMN_LLM = Σ (100 / STATUS_x.GRAD) of the uninverted final controlling
elements.

Controller blocks
The final controlling elements are limited to their respective limits STATUS_x.SP_HLM and
STATUS_x.SP_LLM. This would mean that a deadband would be created for a controller
manipulated variable between x1 and x2 in which there would be no change in the final
controlling elements. To prevent this from happening, waiting for a configured deadband
(DEADB_W) is incorporated after violations of SP_HLM / SP_LLM and then a jump is made
to the limit of the next final controlling element.
Example
LMN_PID > x1 + DEADB_W and control deviation is positive
⇒ LMN_PID is tracked to x2 by setting for EXT_T seconds the output LMN_TRK = x2 and
LMN_SEL = TRUE.
UDT52 UDT_S7SPLITRANGE
SFC6 RD_SINFO
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
sion

Controller blocks

LMN_PID REAL IN 0 PID LOOP output of final controlling element
ER_PID REAL IN 0 PID LOOP output of control deviation
DEADB_W REAL IN 0 Deadband
EN_CTRL BOOL IN 0 Enable PID LOOP
EN_1 BOOL IN 0 Enable LMN1
STATUS_1 STRUCT IN 0 Status byte LMN1
STATUS_1.SP_HLM REAL IN 0
STATUS_1.SP_LLM REAL IN 0
STATUS_1.GRAD REAL IN 0
STATUS_1.STATUS BYTE IN 0
EXT_T REAL IN 0 Adjustment time for LMN_SEL
ENO BOOL OUT 0
LMN_1 REAL OUT 0 Assigned final controlling element 1
LMN_HLM REAL OUT 0 High limit LMN for PID loop
LMN_LLM REAL OUT 0 Low limit LMN for PID loop
LMN_TRK REAL OUT 0 External value for PID loop
LMN_SEL BOOL OUT 0 Select external LMN value

Controller blocks

QRESTART BOOL OUT 0 1=Restart
Status word assignment for STATUS_x.STATUS parameter

Bit 0 Available
Bit 1 Inverted
Bit 2 Closed (PV = 0%)
Bit 3 Open (PV = 100%)
Bit 4 Startup done
Bit 5 – Bit 7 -
Status word assignment for UDT_S7SPLITRANGE
Parameter Type Description

SP_HLM REAL High limit of final controlling element
SP_LLM REAL Low limit of final controlling element
GRAD REAL Slope of final controlling element
STATUS BYTE Status of final controlling element
Example
The following example contains 3 final controlling elements with the following data:
Final controlling elements 1 – 3 are available and enabled:
● EN_x = TRUE, STATUS_x.STATUS Bit 0 = TRUE
Final controlling element 4 is not used:
● EN_4 = FALSE.
Final controlling el‐ Variable Value

ement
1 STATUS_1.SP_HLM 80%
STATUS_1.SP_LLM 20%
STATUS_1.GRAD 1
STATUS_1.STATUS Bit 1 Invertiert TRUE
STATUS_2.SP_LLM 20%
STATUS_2.GRAD 0,5
STATUS_2.STATUS Bit 1 Invertiert FALSE

Controller blocks
Final controlling el‐ Variable Value

ement
STATUS_3.SP_LLM 30%
STATUS_3.GRAD 1
STATUS_3.STATUS Bit 1 Invertiert FALSE
General information
Variable Value
DEADB_W 5%
Scenarios
The following scenarios apply to the example:
LMN_PID ER_PID LMN_1 LMN_2 LMN_3 LMN_TRK LMN_SEL

-100 x 80% 20% 30% -80.0 TRUE
-50 x 50% 20% 30% X FALSE
-20 x 20% 20% 30% X FALSE
-16 x 20% 20% 30% X FALSE
-14 + 20% 20% 30% 40.1 TRUE
- 20% 20% 30% -20.1 TRUE
0 20% 20% 30% X FALSE

Controller blocks
LMN_PID ER_PID LMN_1 LMN_2 LMN_3 LMN_TRK LMN_SEL

2 + 20% 20% 30% 40.1 TRUE
- 20% 20% 30% -20.1 TRUE
0 20% 20% 30% X FALSE
46 x 20% 23% 30% X FALSE
140 x 20% 70% 30% X FALSE
162 x 20% 80% 30% X FALSE
167 + 20% 80% 30% 230.1 TRUE
- 20% 80% 30% 159.9 TRUE
0 20% 80% 30% X FALSE
228 x 20% 80% 30% X FALSE
270 x 20% 80% 70% X FALSE
300 x 20% 80% 90% 290.0 TRUE
x: Irrelevant
+: Positive control deviation
-: Negative control deviation

Controller blocks
10.4 S7MVLd - Retrieving the manipulated variable for the controller
10.4.1 Function
Area of application for S7MVLd

During startup, the block supplies the controller with the state data before the controller stops
and restores this state.

Family: System
10.4.2 Calling OBs

(see How it works / Startup characteristics (Page 418)).

10.4.4 How it works / Startup characteristics

After startup the block briefly sets the output LMN_SEL for the controller to reactivate the old
manipulated variable (before the STOP state). In addition, the old setting, selection of external /
internal setpoint value, is output. To ensure that the controller accepts the values, the startup
cycles (RUNUPCYC) of the S7MVLD block must be longer than those of the controller block.
SFC6 RD_SINFO

Controller blocks

EN BOOL IN 0
MAN_AUT BOOL IN 0 AUTO / MANUAL operation of PID LOOP
SPEXTON BOOL IN 0 External / internal setpoint mode of PIDLOOP
LMN REAL IN 0 PID LOOP Output of manipulated value
S_LMN REAL IN_OUT 0 Saved manip. value
S_MAN_AUT BOOL IN_OUT 0 Saved mode
S_SPEXTON BOOL IN_OUT 0 Saved setpoint mode
ENO BOOL OUT 0
LMN_TRK REAL OUT 0 External value for PID Loop
LMN_SEL BOOL OUT 0 Select external LMN value
LIOP_SEL BOOL OUT 0 Selection: 1=Linking , 0=Operation
AUT_L BOOL OUT 0 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL mode
SPEXON_L BOOL OUT 0 Setpoint 1=External, 0=Internal mode
QRESTART BOOL OUT 0 1=Restart

Controller blocks

System blocks 11
11.1 S7ASTimeBCD - Output the CPU time in BCD format
11.1.1 Function

Family: System
Area of application for S7ASTimeBCD

The block calls the SFC READ_CLK system function and transfers the read time stamp (date
and time) to the output in BCD format.

This is the cyclic interrupt -OB in which you install the block (e.g. OB32).
SFC1 READ_CLK

EN BOOL IN 0
ENO BOOL OUT 0
YEAR BYTE OUT 0 Output year in "Integer" format
MONTH BYTE OUT 0 Output month in "Integer" format
DAY BYTE OUT 0 Output day in "Integer" format
HOUR BYTE OUT 0 Output hour in "Integer" format
MINUTE BYTE OUT 0 Output minute in "Integer" format

System blocks
11.1 S7ASTimeBCD - Output the CPU time in BCD format

SECOND BYTE OUT 0 Output second in "Integer" format
MSEC WORD OUT 0 Output millisecond in "Integer" format

Monitoring blocks 12
12.1 S7MonAn - Measured value monitoring
12.1.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonAn

The block is used to monitor a measured value (analog signal) with the following limit values:
● Warning limit (high/low)
● Alarm limit (high/low)

In the same OB that accompanies and follows the block whose measured value is to be
monitored. Additionally in OB100 (see Startup characteristics (Page 424)).

12.1.4 How it works

The block monitors the measured value connected to the U input. If a limit value is overshot/
undershot, this is indicated at a corresponding output and, if necessary, reported (see Message
behavior (Page 424)).

Monitoring blocks
12.1.5 Output V
The measured analog value appears on output V. The analog value can be from the process
(U), simulated (MAN_EN, U_MAN) or specified for a pending CSF via a substitute value
(SUBST_EN, U_SUBST). If the simulation value has been activated, it is given the highest
priority.
The output V is generated as shown in the following table.
MAN_EN SUBST_EN CSF V

0 0 0 V=U
1 x x V = U_MAN
0 1 0 V=U
0 1 1 V = U_SUBST
The following applies, in general: MAN_EN has priority over SUBST_EN

an operator panel, the "S7PMonAn" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

When an arithmetic error occurs, ENO = 0 or QERR = 1 is set.

Following startup, the messages are suppressed until the number of cycles configured in value
RUNUPCYC is reached.

The S7MonAn block uses the ALARM_DQ block for generating messages.
● Functions for monitoring the measured value limits
● The CSF signal (QCSF)
The signaling of the messages can be delayed by the time configured in the DELAY_T
parameter.

Monitoring blocks
Message Block param‐ Default message Message class Can be suppressed by

number eter text MSG_LOCK or
L_MSGLCK or
1 Q_AL Alarm low Alarm low M_SUP_AL
2 Q_AH Alarm high Alarm high M_SUP_AH
3 Q_WL Warning low Warning low M_SUP_WL
4 Q_WH Warning high Warning high M_SUP_WH
5 QCSF External error AS control system Fault -
The messages for limit value violations can be suppressed individually via the appropriate
M_SUP_xx inputs. The messages can be locked centrally with MSG_LOCK (OS operation) or
L_MSGLCK (program).
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT69 UDT_S7PMonAn (UDT_OP_SMEAS)

EN BOOL IN 0
U REAL IN 0 Measured value
MO_PVLR REAL IN 1 Low range bar graph
MO_PVHR REAL IN 1 High range bar graph
DELAY_T REAL IN 0 Delay time for limit monitoring hysteresis
U_MAN REAL IN 1 Simulation value
U_SUBST REAL IN 1 Substitute value
CSF BOOL IN 0 External error (process value channel error)
MAN_EN BOOL IN 1 Apply simulation value
SUBST_EN BOOL IN 1 Apply substitute value
M_SUP_AL BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress LL alarm
M_SUP_AH BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress HH alarm

Monitoring blocks

M_SUP_WL BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress L alarm
M_SUP_WH BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress H alarm
MSG_EVID_1 DWORD IN 0 Message ID
2]
U_AL REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value LL
U_AH REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value HH
U_WL REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value L
U_WH REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value H
ENO BOOL OUT 0
V REAL OUT 1 Measured value
V_AL REAL OUT 0 Limit value LL
V_AH REAL OUT 0 Limit value HH
V_WL REAL OUT 0 Limit value L
V_WH REAL OUT 0 Limit value H
QCSF BOOL OUT 1 External error
QMSG_7 BOOL OUT 0 Message 7
QMSG_8 BOOL OUT 0 Message 8
QERR BOOL OUT 0 Group error
QSIM BOOL OUT 1 1=Simulation active
Q_AL BOOL OUT 0 Limit error LL
Q_AH BOOL OUT 0 Limit error HH
Q_WL BOOL OUT 0 Limit error L

Monitoring blocks

Q_WH BOOL OUT 0 Limit error H
QMSG_SUP BOOL OUT 1 Message suppressed
MSG_STAT_1 WORD OUT 0 Message status
MSG_ACK_1 BOOL OUT 0 Message acknowledge status
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAn08
QOP_STAT.QOP_V REAL OUT 0 Measured value status
QOP_STAT.MO_PVHR REAL OUT 0 High range bar
QOP_STAT.MO_PVLR REAL OUT 0 Low range bar
QOP_STAT.MAN_EN BOOL OUT 0 Manual mode enabled
12.1.12.1 S7MonAn views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Batch view

Monitoring blocks
12.1.12.2 S7MonAn standard view
5 2
(1) Measured value

(2) Hysteresis
● LocalOS
12.1.12.3 Limit view of S7MonAn
(1)
● AH
● WH

Monitoring blocks
(2)
● WL
● AL
12.1.12.4 Maintenance view of S7MonAn
(1) Simulation value

● Simulation value temperature
● Simulation value selection
(2) Substitute value
● Substitute value temperature
● Substitute value selection

Monitoring blocks
12.1.12.5 Trend view of S7MonAn
The procedure for configuring trends is described in the document titled "Block description –
General".
12.1.12.6 S7MonAn block icons

Monitoring blocks
12.2 S7MonAn08 - Measured value monitoring with 8 limits
12.2.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonAn08

The block monitors the measured value connected at input U. Up to 8 limits can be configured
by the user.
The violation of the limits is indicated at the output (Q_LIM_x) (See Message characteristics
(Page 433)).
12.2.2 Calling organization blocks



RUNUPCYC is reached. Startup can be simulated with input RESTART.
12.2.5 Output V
priority.

Monitoring blocks

0 0 0 V=U
1 x x V = U_MAN
0 1 0 V=U
0 1 1 V = U_SUBST

The error is not evaluated. A message is generated at the ALARM_DQ block.
12.2.7 Measured value monitoring

The V output is monitored for the observance of a maximum of 8 limits. The limits can be
configured by the user. Message output can be delayed with the DELAY_Tx input (x = 1 to 8).
The behavior of each limit is specified in a parameter MODE_x in more detail.
The specification of the MODE_x parameter is bit-coded:
Bit 0: 0=Monitoring for low limit / 1= Monitoring for high limit
Bit 1: 1=Message type is a status (color = violet)
Bit 2: 1=Message type is an alarm (color = red)
Bit 3: 1= Message type is a warning (color = yellow)
Bit 4,5,6: not assigned
Bit 7: Input is active/not active
The hexadecimal values for input in CFC are derived from this:
16#85: High alarm (HHH)
16#89: High warning (HH)
16#83: High status (H)
16#81: High switching point
16#80: Low switching point
16#82: Low status (L)
16#88: Low warning (LL)
16#84: Low alarm (LLL)

So that various technological functions can also be controlled and monitored from an operator
panel, the S7MonAn08 block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block
S7PMonAn08.

Monitoring blocks

The S7MonAn08 block uses two ALARM_DQ blocks for generating messages. Message
triggers are:
● The CSF signals (QCSF), which are obtained as process control errors through connection.
parameter.
Message Block param‐ Default message Message class Can be suppressed by

number eter text MSG_LOCK or
L_MSGLCK
1 Q_LIM_1 Limit 1 Warning high M_SUP_1
9 QCSF External error AS control system -
fault
M_SUP_x inputs. The messages can be locked centrally with MSG_LOCK (OS operation) or
L_MSGLCK (program).
Block I/Os

EN BOOL IN 0
HYS REAL IN 1 Hysteresis

Monitoring blocks

DELAY_T1 REAL IN 0 Limit monitoring delay time for limit 1
MODE_1 BYTE IN 1 Mode for limit 1
CSF BOOL IN 0 External error (process control error)
M_SUP_1 BOOL IN 1 Suppress alarm 1
RUNUPCYC INT IN 0 Number of startup cycles with message sup‐
pression
MSG_EVID_1 DWORD IN 0 Message ID1

Monitoring blocks

U_LIM_1 REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit 1
ENO BOOL OUT 0
Q_LIM_1 BOOL OUT 0 Limit 1 active
V_LIM_1 REAL OUT 0 Limit 1
QOS_STAT BYTE OUT 1 Status mask of the Q_LIM_x outputs

Monitoring blocks

QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAn08
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F WORD OUT 0 Status for operator panel messages
Status word assignment for the QOS_Stat parameter

Bit 0 Limit 1 violated

Monitoring blocks
Status word assignment for the MODE_x parameter

Bit 0 0=Monitoring for lower limit
1=Monitoring for upper limit
Bit 1 1=Message type is status (color = violet)
Bit 2 1=Message type is alarm (color = red)
Bit 3 1=Message type is warning (color = yellow)
Bit 4 – Bit 6 -
Bit 7 0=Input is not active
1=Input is active (default setting)
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SF107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT70 UDT_S7PMonAn08
12.2.12.1 S7MonAn08 views

The views of the faceplate differ from the faceplate of S7MonAn only in the limit view.
● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Batch view

Monitoring blocks
12.2.12.2 Limit view of S7MonAn08
(1)
● High limit
● Low limit
(2)
● Limits 1 to 8
● Limits 1 to 8
● Message lock 1 to 8
12.2.12.3 S7MonAn08 block icons

Monitoring blocks
12.3 S7MonAnDi - Measured value monitoring for 4 analog and binary limits
12.3.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonAnDi

● Warning limit (high/low) as analog and binary limits
● Alarm limit (high/low) as analog and binary limits
12.3.2 Calling OBs


12.3.4 How it works

The block monitors the measured value at input U. If a limit value is overshot/undershot or a
limit input is triggered, this is indicated at a corresponding output and, if necessary, reported
(see Message behavior (Page 440)).
12.3.5 Output V
priority.

Monitoring blocks

0 0 0 V=U
1 x x V = U_MAN
0 1 0 V=U
0 1 1 V = U_SUBST

an operator panel, the "S7PMonAnDi" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

When an arithmetic error occurs, ENO = 0 or QERR = 1 is set.


The S7MonAnDi block uses the ALARM_DQ block for generating messages.
● The CSF signal
parameter.
Message Block param‐ Default message text Message class Can be suppressed by
number eter MSG_LOCK or
L_MSGLCK or

Monitoring blocks
L_MSGLCK or
Fault
L_MSGLCK (program).
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT71 UDT_S7PMonAnDi (UDT_OP_SMEASB)

EN BOOL IN 0
AL BOOL IN 0 1=Limit LL
AH BOOL IN 0 1=Limit HH
WL BOOL IN 0 1=Limit L
WH BOOL IN 0 1=Limit H
DELAY_T REAL IN 0 Delay time for limit monitoring
CSF BOOL IN 0 External error #1

Monitoring blocks

sion
ENO BOOL OUT 0

Monitoring blocks

QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAnDi
QOP_STAT.Q_AL BOOL OUT 0 Limit error LL
QOP_STAT.Q_AH BOOL OUT 0 Limit error HH
QOP_STAT.Q_WL BOOL OUT 0 Limit error L
QOP_STAT.Q_WH BOOL OUT 0 Limit error H
12.3.12.1 S7MonAnDi views

The views of the faceplate differ from the faceplate of S7MonAn only in the standard view and
the limit view.
● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Batch view

Monitoring blocks
12.3.12.2 S7MonAnDi standard view
5 2
(1) Measured value

(2) Hysteresis
● LocalOS
12.3.12.3 Limit view of S7MonAnDi
(1)
● AH
● WH

Monitoring blocks
(2)
● WL
● AL
12.3.12.4 S7MonAnDi block icons

Monitoring blocks
12.4 S7MonAnGrad - Measured value monitoring with gradient function
12.4.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonAnGrad

● Warning limit (high/low)
● Alarm limit (high/low)
● Gradient (high/low)
12.4.2 Calling OBs


12.4.4 How it works

The block monitors the measured value at input U. If a limit value is overshot/undershot, this
is indicated at a corresponding output and, if necessary, reported (see Message behavior
(Page 447)).

Gradient monitoring does not start until the second measuring interval.

Monitoring blocks
Startup can be simulated with input RESTART.

When an arithmetic error occurs, ENO=0 or QERR=1 is set.
12.4.7 Output V
priority.

0 0 0 V=U
1 x x V = U_MAN
0 1 0 V=U
0 1 1 V = U_SUBST

The S7MonAnGrad block uses the ALARM_DQ block for generating messages. Message
triggers are:
● The CSF signal provided by the interconnection as the process control error (QCSF).
parameter.
L_MSGLCK
Fault

Monitoring blocks
L_MSGLCK
6 Q_GN Violation, gradient low Warning low M_SUP_GN
7 Q_GP Violation, gradient high Warning high M_SUP_GP
L_MSGLCK (program).
12.4.9 Measured value monitoring

Output V is monitored for adherence to 4 limits. The limits can be configured by the user. The
message output can be delayed via input DELAY_T.
12.4.10 Gradient monitoring

Gradient monitoring is activated via the inputs L_GRAD_EN and GRAD_EN. Monitoring of the
individual limits can be enabled or disabled individually (M_SUP_GN, M_SUP_GP).
The gradient is calculated from the change of input U within the configured time DELTA_T.
Message output can be delayed with the parameter DELAY_GR.
The gradients must be always entered as positive values.
When the positive/negative gradient limit is exceeded, the message is not marked as outgoing
until the measured value U no longer violates the upper/lower warning limit.

an operator panel, the "S7PMonAnGrad" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT73 UDT_S7PMonAnGrad (UDT_OP_SMEASGRAD)

Monitoring blocks

EN BOOL IN 0
DELTA_T REAL IN 1 Time basis for gradient monitoring
DELAY_GR REAL IN 0 Delay time for gradient monitoring
DELAY_T REAL IN 0 Delay time for limit monitoring
CSF BOOL IN 0 External error
GRAD_EN BOOL IN 1 Gradient monitoring enable
M_SUP_GN BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress negative gradient alarm
M_SUP_GP BOOL IN 1 1=Suppress positive gradient alarm
L_GRAD_EN BOOL IN 0 Interconnectable input gradient mon enable
sion
MSG_EVID_1 DWORD IN 0 Message ID 1

Monitoring blocks

U_GRAD_N REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value negative gradient
U_GRAD_P REAL IN_OUT 1 Limit value positive gradient
ENO BOOL OUT 0
V_GN REAL OUT 0 Limit value negative gradient
V_GP REAL OUT 0 Limit value positive gradient
GRADIENT REAL OUT 1 Gradient value
Q_GN BOOL OUT 0 Negative grad error
Q_GP BOOL OUT 0 Positive grad error

Monitoring blocks

QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonAnGrad
QOP_STAT.QOP_GRADI‐ REAL OUT 0 Gradient status
ENT
12.4.14.1 S7MonAnGrad views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Limit view
● Trend view
● Parameter view
● Batch view

Monitoring blocks
12.4.14.2 S7MonAnGrad parameter view
(1)
● Time base in seconds
● Time base selection
(2)
● Gradients below in °C
● Gradients above selection
(3)
● Gradients above in C
● Gradient selection
12.4.14.3 S7MonAnGrad block icons

Monitoring blocks
12.5 S7MonDi - Monitoring of a binary process tag
12.5.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonDi

The block monitors a binary input signal.
12.5.2 Calling OBs


12.5.4 Output Q
A message is sent to WinCC on a positive edge at the output Q. When a negative edge occurs,
the message assumes the status "departed." The output Q is generated; it is dependent on
the input type configured at the N_OP_CL parameter (break contact/make contact).. The output
Q always indicates the state triggering the message, except when HOLD_EN = TRUE. In this
case, the output Q is set and stored when the state triggering the message is queued. The
output remains queued when the state triggering the message departs and is not reset until a
positive edge occurs on the acknowledgment input L_RESET.
If the MAN_EN input is set to TRUE, the output Q is set based on the I_MAN parameter, which
is controlled in the faceplate of WinCC. In this case, a queued message is marked as departed.
The message path is then suppressed.
If SUBST_EN = TRUE, the substitute value I_SUBST is forwarded to the output Q in the event
of an external error (CSF = TRUE). MANUAL mode (MAN_EN = TRUE) has higher priority. If
manual mode is not selected, the I_MAN input is adjusted to the output Q to permit bumpless
switchover to manual mode.
The output Q is output as not malfunctioning if LOCK = TRUE, regardless of input I.

Monitoring blocks
Output Q is generated as shown in the following tables.
HOLD_EN MAN_EN SUBST_EN CSF N_OP_CL LOCK Q

0 0 0 0 0 0 Q=I
0 0 0 0 1 0 Q= NOT I
x 1 x x x 0 Q=I_MAN
x 0 1 0 0 0 Q=I
x 0 1 1 x 0 Q=I_SUBST
x x x x x 1 Q=0
If MAN_EN, SUBST_EN and LOCK = FALSE, then:
HOLD_EN L_RESET Q old I Q new

1 0 0 0 Q=0
1 0 0 1 Q=1
1 0 1 0 Q=1
1 0⇒1 1 0 Q=0
12.5.5 Monitoring the process tag

The block monitors the digital value at the input I for changes. The suppression timer is
restarted on each edge of the input signal (only in malfunctioning state). The input value I is
sent time-delayed to the output Q once the wait time configured in SUPPTIME has expired.
If SUPPTIME < SAMPLE_T, the input signal I is forwarded to the output Q without a time delay.
In manual operation (MAN_EN = TRUE) or when the substitute value is activated, the output
Q is written without the suppression time.
The N_OP_CL input can be used to set whether the signal to be monitored is a make-contact
signal (N_OP_CL = 0) or a break-contact signal (N_OP_CL = 1).

an operator panel, the "S7PMonDi" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology block.

A message is generated when the output Q is TRUE (see above).
In manual mode and with use of the substitution value, the message of the binary value is
locked.

Monitoring blocks

number ter
1 Q Alarm high Alarm high
2 CSF / QERR External error AS control system Fault
(program).

The RUNUPCYC parameter is used to specify for how long (number of cycles) the messages
are to be suppressed.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT67 UDT_S7PMonDi (UDT_OP_SDIGMO)

EN BOOL IN 0
I BOOL IN 1 Input signal
I_SUBST BOOL IN 1 Substitution signal
MAN_EN BOOL IN 1 Manual signal enable
SUBST_EN BOOL IN 1 Substitution signal enable
HOLD_EN BOOL IN 0 Enable 1=Signal is set holding
N_OP_CL BOOL IN 0 =0 Break contact; =1 Make contact
LOCK BOOL IN 1 1=Lock: Output OK

Monitoring blocks

MSG_EVID_1 DWORD IN 0 Message ID_1
sion
I_MAN BOOL IN_OUT 1 Manual signal
I_ST BOOL IN_OUT 1 Standard input
I_HOLD BOOL IN_OUT 0 Input signal set holding
ENO BOOL OUT 0
Q BOOL OUT 1 Output: 0=inactive, 1=active
QSIM BOOL OUT 1 1=Simulation active
MSG_STAT_1 WORD OUT 0 Message: STATUS output
MSG_ACK_1 BOOL OUT 0 Message: ACK_STATE output
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonDi
QOP_STAT.QOP_Q BOOL OUT 0 Panel status output: 0=inactive, 1=active
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F DWORD OUT 0 Status for panel messages

Monitoring blocks
12.5.11.1 S7MonDi views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Batch view
12.5.11.2 S7MonDi standard view
3
5
(1)
● Input
● Output
● Normalization
(2) Suppression time
● Enabled
● LocalOS

Monitoring blocks
12.5.11.3 Maintenance view of S7MonDi
(1) Simulation value

(2) Substitute value
12.5.11.4 S7MonDi block icons

Monitoring blocks
12.6 S7MonDi08 - Monitoring of 8 binary process tags
12.6.1 Function

Family: Monitor
Area of application for S7MonDi08

The block monitors up to 8 connected input signals.
12.6.2 Calling OBs


12.6.4 Outputs Qx
A message is generally sent to WinCC when a positive edge occurs on one of the outputs Qx.
When a negative edge occurs, the message assumes the status "departed." The outputs Qx
are generated at parameter N_OP_CLx (break contact/make contact) based on the configured
input type. However, the outputs Qx always indicate the status which triggered the message.
When the MAN_ENx inputs are set to TRUE, the outputs Qx are not supplied by the inputs Ix
but by the I_MANx parameter which is controlled in the WinCC faceplate. A queued message
is marked as departed and no more messages are generated.
If SUBSTENx = TRUE, the substitute value Ix_SUBST is forwarded to the output Qx in the
event of an external error (CSFx = TRUE). MANUAL mode (MAN_ENx = TRUE) has higher
priority. If MANUAL mode is not selected, the I_MANx input is adjusted to the corresponding
output Qx to permit bumpless switchover to manual mode.
If LOCK = TRUE or the corresponding enable EN_Ix = FALSE, the outputs Qx are output as
not malfunctioning, regardless of the input.

Monitoring blocks
The output Qx is generated as shown in the following table.
MAN_ENx SUBSTENx CSFx N_OP_CLx LOCK EN_Ix Qx

0 0 0 0 0 1 Qx=Ix
0 0 0 1 0 1 Qx=NOT Ix
1 x x x 0 1 Qx=I_MANx
0 1 0 0 0 1 Qx=Ix
0 1 1 x 0 1 Qx=Ix_SUBST
x x x x 1 x Qx=0
x x x x x 0 Qx=0
12.6.5 Monitoring the process tag

The digital value at the inputs Ix is monitored for changes. The timer is started again with each
edge of the input signal (only in malfunctioning status). After expiration of the wait time
configured in SUPPTIME, the input value Ix is sent to the corresponding output Qx.
This ensures that only signals which are queued for at least as long as specified under
SUPPTIME are forwarded to the output. If SUPPTIME < SAMPLE_T, the input signal Ix is
forwarded to the output Qx without a time delay.
During manual operation (MAN_ENx = TRUE) or when the substitute value is active, the
corresponding output Qx is written without the suppression time.

an operator panel, the "S7PMonDi08" block is installed in the CFC for the actual technology
block.

A message is generated when the output Qx is TRUE (see above).
In MANUAL mode and when the substitute value is used, the message of the binary value is
locked.

number ter
1 Q1 Input 1 Alarm high

Monitoring blocks

number ter
9 QERR External error AS control system Fault
(program).

The RUNUPCYC parameter is used to specify for how long (number of cycles) the messages
are to be suppressed.
SFC6 RD_SINFO
SFC107 ALARM_DQ
SFC19 ALARM_SC
UDT68 UDT_S7PMonDi08

EN BOOL IN 0
I1 BOOL IN 1 Input signal 1

Monitoring blocks

EN_I1 BOOL IN 1 Signal 1 enable
I1_SUBST BOOL IN 1 Substitution signal 1
MAN_EN1 BOOL IN 1 Manual signal 1 enable
SUBSTEN1 BOOL IN 1 Substitution signal 1 enable
N_OP_CL1 BOOL IN 0 =0 Break contact; =1 Make contact signal 1
N_OP_CL2 BOOL IN 0 =0 Normally open; = 1 Normally closed signal 2

Monitoring blocks

LOCK BOOL IN 1 1=Lock: Output OK
CSF1 BOOL IN 0 Control system error 1=External control error 1
I_MAN1 BOOL IN_OUT 1 Manual signal 1
I_ST1 BOOL IN_OUT 1 Standard input 1

Monitoring blocks

ENO BOOL OUT 0
Q1 BOOL OUT 1 Output 1: 0=inactive, 1=active
QMAN BOOL OUT 1 1=At least 1 signal in manual mode
QOP_STAT.UDT_IDENT BYTE OUT 0 UDT identifier for UDT_S7PMonDi08
QOP_STAT.QOP_Q1 BOOL OUT 0 Status 1=Operator panel output 1: 0=inactive, 1=ac‐
tive
tive

Monitoring blocks

tive
tive
tive
tive
tive
tive
QOP_STAT.QOS_STAT_F DWORD OUT 0 Status for panel messages
ENABLED BYTE OUT 1 Display of enabled inputs
ON BYTE OUT 1 Inputs on display
12.6.11.1 S7MonDi08 views

● Standard view
● Message view
● Batch view

Monitoring blocks
12.6.11.2 S7MonDi08 standard view
3
6
4
5
(1)
● Inputs 1 to 8
● Input signal 1 to 8 Off
● Output signal 1 to 8 Off
(2) Suppression time
(4)
● Enabled
● LocalOS

Monitoring blocks
12.6.11.3 Maintenance view of S7MonDi08
(1) Inputs 1 to 8
● Sim. 1 to 8
● Sub. 1 to 8
● Enabled 1 to 8
12.6.11.4 S7MonDi08 block icons
● : Signal not enabled

● : Signal enabled and signal state = Off
● : Signal status = On

Monitoring blocks

Index
S7SndHAna, 120
S7SndHDig, 116
A S7TiSwitch, 399
Area of application
S7RcvAna, 111
S7RcvDig, 107
H
S7RcvHAna, 127 How it works
S7RcvHDig, 123 S7RcvAna, 111
S7SndAna, 104 S7RcvDig, 107
S7SndDig, 101 S7RcvHAna, 127
S7SndHAna, 119 S7RcvHDig, 123
S7SndHDig, 115 S7SndAna, 104
S7SndDig, 101
S7SndHAna, 119
C S7SndHDig, 115
Called blocks
S7TiSwitch, 397
Configuration
I
S7RcvAna, 112 Input parameters
S7RcvDig, 108 S7TiSwitch, 404
S7RcvHAna, 128
S7RcvHDig, 124
S7SndAna, 105 M
S7SndDig, 102
Messages
S7SndHAna, 120
S7RcvAna, 113
S7SndHDig, 116
S7RcvDig, 109
S7TiSwitch, 397
S7RcvHAna, 129
S7RcvHDig, 125
S7SndAna, 106
E S7SndDig, 102
Error handling S7SndHAna, 121
S7TiSwitch, 403 S7SndHDig, 117
S7UsrM, 61
O
F Object name
Feature S7RcvAna, 111
S7TiSwitch, 402 S7RcvDig, 107
Function S7RcvHAna, 127
S7TiSwitch, 399 S7RcvHDig, 123
Functions S7SndAna, 104
S7RcvAna, 112 S7SndDig, 101
S7RcvDig, 108 S7SndHAna, 119
S7RcvHAna, 128 S7SndHDig, 115
S7RcvHDig, 124 S7TiSwitch, 397
S7SndAna, 105 Operating mode
S7SndDig, 102 S7RcvAna, 112

Index
S7RcvDig, 108 Configuration, 128

S7RcvHAna, 128 Functions, 128
S7RcvHDig, 124 How it works, 127
S7SndAna, 105 Messages, 129
S7SndDig, 102 Object name, 127
S7SndHAna, 120 Operating mode, 128
S7SndHDig, 116 Startup characteristics, 128
Operating modes Troubleshooting, 129
S7TiSwitch, 399 S7RcvHAna block diagram, 130
Operator authorizations S7RcvHAna I/Os, 129
S7TiSwitch, 400 S7RcvHDig
Output parameters Area of application, 123
S7TiSwitch, 405 Configuration, 124
Overview of error numbers Functions, 124
S7TiSwitch, 403 How it works, 123
S7UsrM, 62 Messages, 125
Object name, 123
Operating mode, 124
P Startup characteristics, 124
Time behavior, 124
Panel blocks
Troubleshooting, 125
Views, 45
S7RcvHDig block diagram, 126
S7RcvHDig I/Os, 125
S7SndAna
S Area of application, 104
S7RcvAna Configuration, 105
Area of application, 111 Functions, 105
Configuration, 112 How it works, 104
Functions, 112 Messages, 106
How it works, 111 Object name, 104
Messages, 113 Operating mode, 105
Object name, 111 Startup characteristics, 105
Operating mode, 112 Time behavior, 105
Startup characteristics, 112 Troubleshooting, 105
Troubleshooting, 113 S7SndAna block diagram, 106
S7RcvAna block diagram, 114 S7SndAna I/Os, 106
S7RcvAna I/Os, 113 S7SndDig
S7RcvDig Area of application, 101
Area of application, 107 Configuration, 102
Configuration, 108 Functions, 102
Functions, 108 How it works, 101
How it works, 107 Messages, 102
Messages, 109 Object name, 101
Object name, 107 Operating mode, 102
Operating mode, 108 Startup characteristics, 102
Startup characteristics, 108 Time behavior, 102
Time behavior, 108 Troubleshooting, 102
Troubleshooting, 109 S7SndDig block diagram, 103
S7RcvDig block diagram, 110 S7SndDig I/Os, 103
S7RcvDig I/Os, 109 S7SndHAna
S7RcvHAna Area of application, 119
Area of application, 127 Configuration, 120

Index
Functions, 120 S7SndHDig, 116

How it works, 119 S7TiSwitch, 397
Messages, 121 Status word assignment
Object name, 119 S7TiSwitch, 398
Operating mode, 120
Startup characteristics, 120
Time behavior, 120 T
Time behavior
S7SndHAna block diagram, 122
S7RcvDig, 108
S7SndHAna I/Os, 121
S7RcvHDig, 124
S7SndHDig
S7SndAna, 105
Area of application, 115
S7SndDig, 102
Configuration, 116
S7SndHAna, 120
Functions, 116
S7SndHDig, 116
How it works, 115
Snd_DigVal, 112, 128
Messages, 117
Troubleshooting
Object name, 115
S7RcvAna, 113
Operating mode, 116
S7RcvDig, 109
S7RcvHAna, 129
Time behavior, 116
S7RcvHDig, 125
S7SndAna, 105
S7SndHDig block diagram, 118
S7SndDig, 102
S7SndHDig I/Os, 117
S7SndHAna, 120
S7TiSwitch
S7SndHDig, 116
Called blocks, 397
Configuration, 397
Error handling, 403
Feature, 402
V
Function, 399 Views
Functions, 399 S7TiSwitch, 406
Input parameters, 404
Object name, 397
Operating modes, 399
Operator authorizations, 400
Output parameters, 405
Overview of error numbers, 403
Status word assignment, 398
Views, 406
S7UsrM
Error handling, 61
Overview of error numbers, 62
Snd_DigVal
Time behavior, 112, 128
S7RcvAna, 112
S7RcvDig, 108
S7RcvHAna, 128
S7RcvHDig, 124
S7SndAna, 105
S7SndDig, 102
S7SndHAna, 120

Index


S7IL90b en-US PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

S7IL90b en-US PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Security information 1

Operator control blocks 3

Motor and valve blocks 8

Siemens AG A5E42064473-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

3.2 S7UsrM - Selection of operating level from 8 levels..............................................................61

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

4.1.10 Operator control and monitoring............................................................................................81

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

5.3.7 S7SndAna block diagram.....................................................................................................106

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

5.10 ASRcvH - H-system communication receive block..............................................................131

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

6.3.3 Block parameters.................................................................................................................173

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

8.1.18 Called blocks........................................................................................................................196

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

8.4.10 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................223

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

8.7.15.4 S7MV3P block icons............................................................................................................255

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

9.4.3 Startup characteristics..........................................................................................................302

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

9.9.3 How it works.........................................................................................................................322

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

9.18.7.3 S7PVlv block icons...............................................................................................................362

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

10.3.10 Diagram of a split range control process..............................................................................412

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

12.2.12.1 S7MonAn08 views...............................................................................................................437

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

12.5.11.2 S7MonDi standard view.......................................................................................................457

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

2.2 Overview of function blocks

FB/FC name FB/FC Function OCM

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

FB/FC name FB/FC Function OCM

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

2.3 Operator control and monitoring in WinCC

2.3.1 Block icon

General information about block icons

Representation of a technological icon

Table 2-1 Status table

Status of icon Color

Table 2-2 Status display

Status Status icon

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

Status Status icon

Local operating mode active

Table 2-3 Button mapping

Icon Stored faceplate view

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

Icon Stored faceplate view

Fix faceplate in the front at screen change

Operation within a faceplate

Analog text boxes

(1) Mouse click opens the operator window

PCS 7 Industry Library for S7 V9.0

Binary text boxes